JMA-9172-SA

MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ◆◆◆ PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION ◆◆◆

■ Cautions for high voltage

High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to
the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any
danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance,
inspection and adjustment of their internal components. (Maintenance, check-up
and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are prohibited except by
maintenance specialists.)

High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an

instantaneous death from electric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may
sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make
it a rule to turn off the power switch, discharge capacitors with a wire surely
earthed on an end make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you
touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves
ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put
one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time.

It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries

once you were shocked by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock,
disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly.

■ What to do in case of electric shock

When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the
circuit immediately.

If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using
insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly.

In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the
respiration center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration
may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look
very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and
rigidity. In this case, it is necessary to perform an emergency measure
immediately.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ◆◆◆ FIRST-AID TREATMENTS ◆◆◆
☆ First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move
him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should
be continued rhythmically.

(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the
rescuer may also get an electric shock.

(2) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from
the electric line.

(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.

(4) Lay the victim on this back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.

(5)

a. Examine the victim's pulse.

b. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.

c. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face
close to his face.

d. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.

(6) Open the victim's mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing
gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or
the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to
open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel
in this mouth.)

(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.

ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ☆ When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.

(1) Tilt the victim's head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be
inserted his neck.)

(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).

(3) Pinch the victim's nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth
completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath
again and blow into his mouth. Continue this 10 to 15 times a minutes
(blocking his nostrils).

(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and atop
practicing artificial respiration.

(5) If it is difficult to open the victim's mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into
one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth
completely.

(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly,
but let him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep
him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)

Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising hea

(1)Raise the victim's head. Support
his forehead with one of your hand
and his neck with the other hand. 1

When you tilt his head backward, the

victim, in most cases, opens his
mouth to the air. This makes mouth-
to mouth respiration easy.

(2)Cover his mouth as widely as

possible with yours and press your
cheek against his nose 2

or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers

to prevent air from leaking. 3

(3)Blow into his lungs. Continue

blowing into his mouth until his breast
swells. Blow into his mouth as quickly
as possible for the first 10 times.

Fig 1. Mouth-to mouth respiration

iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ☆ When both pulse and breathing have stopped
Perform the (Cardiac massage) Fig 2. and (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.

When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is
heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must
be performed.

(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of
his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your
weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (Repeat compressing his
breast 50 times or so a minutes). (Cardiac massage)

(2) In case of one rescuer,

Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times
quickly, and repeat this combination.

In case of two rescuers,

One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow
into his mouth twice, and they shall repeat this combination. (Perform the
cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)

(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned
to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee
or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit
the victim to a medical specialist depending on his condition. (Never give
him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from the mental shock, it is
necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the
necessary treatment.

Fig 2. Cardiac massage

iv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-
9172-SA.

This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of

marine ships.

This equipment consists of a radar signal transmitter-receiver unit, a LCD display

unit and a scanner unit as its main units.

• Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual

carefully for correct operation.
• Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime.

Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ● Before Operation ●
Pictorial Indication

Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these
equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any
danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your property during
operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows.

Please understand them before you read this manual:

This indication is shown where incorrect

equipment operation due to negligence may
cause death or serious injuries.

This indication is shown where any person is

supposed to be in danger of being killed or
seriously injured if this indication is neglected
and these equipment are not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is
supposed to be injured or any property damage
is supposed to occur if this indication is
neglected and these equipment are not
operated correctly.

Examples of Pictorial Indication

The △ mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and

WARNING).Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric
Shock" in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.

Electric Shock

The mark represents prohibition. Detailed contents of the

prohibited action “Disassembling
( Prohibited”in the example
on the left.) is shown in the mark.

Disassembling Prohibited
Prohibited

The mark represents instruction.

! Detailed contents of the instruction (“Disconnect the power

plug “ in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
Disconnect the Instruction
power plug

Warning Label

There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.

Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.

vi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ● PRECAUTIONS ●

Never conduct inspection or repair work of equipment

components.
Inspection or repair work by uncertified personnel may
result in fire hazard or electrocution.
For inspection and repair work of equipment
components, consult with our branch office, branch
shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.
When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the
! main power off.Failure to comply may result in
electrocution.

Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.

! Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it
off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even
after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure to
comply may result in equipment failure, or death or
serious injury due to electric shock.
When conducting maintenance work on the scanner,
! make sure to turn its main power off.Failure to comply
may result in electrocution or injuries.

vii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Make sure to turn off the scanner safety switch. Failure to
! comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact
with the rotating scanner.

Never directly touch the internal components of the

scanner or indicator. Direct contact with these high-
voltage components may cause electrocution. For
maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment
components, consult with our branch office, branch
shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.
To contact our sales department, branch offices, branch
shops, and sales offices:
Please refer to the "Office List" at the end of the
document.
Do not get close to the radiant section of the scanner. It
is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly
starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is
recommended that the radiant section be installed at a
high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the
flying bridge, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that
no one can get close to it. When any work must be done
on the scanner, make sure to turn the safety switch off.

viii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Microwave radiation level:
Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting.
The high level of microwave is radiated from the front
face of the scanner specified below. The microwave
exposure at close range could result in injuries
(especially of the eyes).

Microwave radiation level

System 10 W/m2

NKE-1532 10cm

Make sure to install the scanner at a place higher than

! human height.
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range
will have adverse effects on the human body.
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range
! will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is
necessary to get close to the scanner for maintenance or
inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator
power switch to "OFF" or "STBY."
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range
will have adverse effects on the human body.
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn
! off the power so that the power supply to the equipment
is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current
even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting
maintenance work without unplugging the power
connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure,
or accidents.

ix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too
strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or
thinner to clean the screen. Failure to comply will result
in damage to the screen surface.
Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely
necessary.
Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby
target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.
When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to
! insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive
tape on the + and - terminals. Failure to comply may
cause heat generation, explosion, or fire when the
batteries get shorted out.

Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final

! navigation decision must always be made by the
operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision
based only on the radar display may cause accidents
such as collisions or running aground.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation
! aid. The final navigation decision must always be made
by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation
decision based only on tracking target information may
cause accidents.
Tracking target information such as vector, target
numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors.
Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be
acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the
radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or
running aground.
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is
! instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar.
In this case, the power should be turned on again.

When using the [AUTO SEA] function, never set the

suppression level too high canceling out all image noises
from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets
such as other ships or dangerous objects will become
inhibited.
When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to
choose the most appropriate image noise suppression
level.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the
suppression level too high canceling out all image noises
from the rain or snow at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but
also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects
will become inhibited.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to
choose the most appropriate image noise suppression
level.

xi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When setting a guard zone, make sure to properly adjust
! gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/
snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal
target images are always on the radar screen. The guard
zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by
the radar, and it may result in accidents such as
collisions.
The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding
whether or not target tracking is properly operating.
Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to
check target tracking operations.
Note especially that, if this function is used during actual
navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may
become confused with other actual targets. Therefore,
never use this function during actual navigation.
Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and
CONSTANT; therefore, never change their values unless
absolutely necessary. Failure to comply may result in
accidents that would lower target tracking performance.
Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing
! parts. Failure to comply may result in electrocution or
equipment failure.

xii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Make sure that two or more staff member work together
! when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to
replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured.

Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD

display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily
remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut
off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
Any adjustments must be made by specialized service
personnel.
Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation.

Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure

to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar
function which may lead to accidents or equipment
failure.
Any adjustments must be made by specialized service
personnel.
Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment
failure.
Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure
to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar
function which may lead to accidents or equipment
failure.
Do not change the quantization level settings unless
absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the
target acquisition or target tracking function deteriorates,
and this may lead to accidents.

xiii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Mounting Point of the Warning Label

Warning Label

NCD-9170 Display Unit

Warning Label

Front face Back face

NWZ-178 Monitor Unit

xiv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning Label

NDC-1478 Radar Process Unit

(Desktop Type)

xv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning
Label

NQE-3141-4A/8A Interswitch Unit

xvi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 xvii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1532 (12 feet)

Display Unit Type NCD-9170 (Stand alone type)

xviii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Interswitch Unit Type NQE-3141-4A

Monitor Unit Type NWZ-178 (Desktop type)

Operation Unit Type NCE-5322 (Desktop type)

xix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Radar Process Unit Type NDC-1478 (Desktop type)
DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD-9170T (DESKTOP TYPE)

xx

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GLOSSARY
This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related
maritime terms.

A
AZ Acquisition/Activation zone
A zone set up by the operator in which the system should
automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets
when entering the zone.
Activated target A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a
sleeping target for the display of additional information.
AIS Automatic Identification System
A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain
identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea,
using an automated transponder.
Anti-clutter rain Rain/snow clutter suppression.
Anti-clutter sea Sea clutter suppression.
Associated target A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported
AIS target having similar parameters (position, course, speed)
which comply with an association algorithm.
AZI AZImuth stabilization mode
B
BCR/BCT Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time
C
C up Course up
Own ship's course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.
CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point
A location on own ship, to which all horizontal measurements such
as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or
TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge.
Clutter Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or
snow.
COG Course Over Ground
The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured
on board the ship, expressed in angular units from true north
CORREL CORRELation

xxi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CPA/TCPA The distance to the Closest Point of Approach/Time to the Closest
Point of Approach.
Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship.
CTW Course Through Water
The direction of the ship's movement through the water
D
DRIFT The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on
the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.
E
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
An electronic bearing line originated from own ship's position.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
G
Ground A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
stabilization to the ground, using ground track input data.

H
HDG Heading
The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any
instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction.
HL Heading line
A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent
common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading
of the ship .
HSC High Speed Craft
Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed
craft
H up Head up
Own ship's heading line is always pointed to the top center of the
radar display.
I
IMO International Maritime Organisation
IR RADAR Interference Rejector
ISW A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or
more scanners.
L

xxii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lost AIS target A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target
before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned
position.
Lost tracked One for which target information is no longer available due to poor,
target lost or obscured signals.

LP Long Pulse
M
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB Man OverBoard
MON Performance monitor
MP Medium Pulse
N
NM 1nm=1852m
N up North up
P
PI Parallel Index line
Past positions Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target
and own ship.
POSN POSitioN
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.
PROC PROCess
Radar signal processing function
R
Radar cross- Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density
section returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the
target
Range Rings A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP.
Reference target A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target is
used as a speed reference for the ground stabilisation
Relative speed The speed of a target relative to own ship's speed data
Relative vector A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship's motion
RM Relative Motion
A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all
targets move relative to own ship.

xxiii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RM(R) Relative Motion. Relative Trails.
RM(T) Relative Motion. True Trails.
ROT Rate Of Turn
Change of heading per time unit.
Route A set of waypoints.
RR Range Rings
S
Sea stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
to the sea.
Sea state Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment,
expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to
sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions.
SET The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on
the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.
Sleeping AIS A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel
target equipped with AIS in a certain location.

SOG Speed Over the Ground

The speed of the ship relative to the earth, measured on board of the
ship.
SP Short Pulse
STAB STABilization
STW Speed Through Water
The speed of the ship relative to the water surface.
T
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship
Test target Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement
TM True Motion
A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion.
Trails Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an
afterglow.
Trial manoeuvre A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to
perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision
avoidance purposes.
True course The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target
expressed as an angular displacement from north
True speed The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea

xxiv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 True vector A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing
course and speed with reference to the ground or sea
TT Target Tracking.
A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the
position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a
target is a Tracked Target.
TTG Time To Go.
Time to next waypoint.
TXRX Transmitter Receiver Unit
U
UTC Universal Time Coordinated.
The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around
the world.
V
VRM Variable Range Marker
An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target.
W
Waypoint A geographical location on a route indicating a event.

xxv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 xxvi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ◆◆◆ PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION ◆◆◆ .............................................. i
◆◆◆ FIRST-AID TREATMENTS ◆◆◆ .................................................................. ii
PREFACE ................................................................................................................... v
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label ................................................................ xiv
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ................................................................................. xviii
GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................. xxi

SECTION 1
GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
1.1 FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Function of This System .................................................................1-1
1.2 FEATURES .............................................................................................1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................1-4
1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS .........................................................................1-5
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................1-14

SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY .............................................................................2-1
2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16

SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................................3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................3-4
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5
3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ..................................................3-6
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ......................................3-6
3.2.3 Tune ..................................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ...........................................3-11
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .............................................3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed .
3-14
3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES ..............................................................3-15
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................3-15
3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons ...........................................................3-16
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation ..................................................................3-17
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character
Input menu .....................................................................................3-18
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-23
3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................3-24
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................3-24
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] ....................................3-25
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................................3-26
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) .....................................................3-27
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................3-28
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) .................3-29
3.4.7 Move Own Ship’s Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-30
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) .........................................................3-31
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-34
3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ...........................................3-35
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] .......3-35
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] .........................................3-36
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................3-36
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-37
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed .....................................................................3-37
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) .............3-38
3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-40
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) .........................3-40
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) .3-41
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................3-42
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........3-42
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-43
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) .................3-43
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-45
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) ..................3-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) .........................3-47
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ...........................................................................3-48
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-48
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) .............................3-51
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) .....................................................3-53
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) .........................3-61
3.6.5 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-62
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) .............................3-66
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-68
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) .........................3-68
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-69
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) 3-76
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-80
3.7.5 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-82
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................3-83
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) .................3-88
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-89
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-93
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .........................3-93
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-97
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) .................................................3-99
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ........................................................3-100
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ..........................................3-101
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-104
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-104
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-106
3.8.9 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-111
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-113
3.9.1 Operation Procedures .................................................................3-113
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-114
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-115
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-119
3.10 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-120
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-120
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ...........................3-121
3.11 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-122
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-122
3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING .................................................................3-129
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port) ...................................................3-129

SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) ....4-14
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-20
4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range
Marker [EBL] [VRM] .....................................................................4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points .....................................4-21

SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS
5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Collision Avoidance ........................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 Radar Display ..................................................................................5-9
5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor) .................................................................5-11
5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria ..............................................5-13
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ......................................................5-14
5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location ................................................5-14
5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION .....................................................5-15
5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ] ................................................................5-15
5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL] .............5-17
5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA] ..................................5-18
5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) .....................5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) .....................................5-20
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference) ......................................................5-21
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ...................................................5-22
5.3 AIS OPERATION ..................................................................................5-27
5.3.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................5-27
5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) ..............................5-27
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) .............................................5-28
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) .....................................5-28
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA] .....................................5-29
5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) ....................5-32
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) ...........................................5-33
5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost ..........................5-36
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ...............5-37
5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) ...................5-38
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) 5-38
5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as
Identical (Association Setting) .....................................................5-38
5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set ......................................5-39
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY .................................................................................5-40
5.5.1 CPA / TCPA Alarm .........................................................................5-41
5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
(New Target) ...................................................................................5-42
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ...............................................................5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm ..............................................................................5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-44
5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN) ...........................................................5-44
5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) ............................................5-45
5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) ..........................5-54
5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ................................5-55
5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ..........................5-56
5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function ...................................5-57

SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ...................................................6-1
6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET ...........................6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER ..............................6-5
6.4 FALSE ECHOES ....................................................................................6-9
6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART .......................................................................6-12
6.5.1 Display ...........................................................................................6-12
6.5.2 Numeric Display ............................................................................6-13

SECTION 7
SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................7-1
7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu（Service Man Menu）.........7-1
7.1.2 GYRO I/F Setting .............................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) .............................................................7-5
7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................7-5
7.1.5 Range Adjustment ...........................................................................7-5
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-6
7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................7-7
7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) .....................................7-7
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) ....................................................7-8
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-11
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) .......................7-11
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................7-15
7.2.3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ...7-16
7.2.4 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) ..............................................7-16
7.2.5 Language Setting (Language) ......................................................7-17
7.2.6 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-18
7.2.7 Input Installation Information .......................................................7-19
7.2.8 Setting the Alarm System .............................................................7-19
7.2.9 Network Setting (Network) ...........................................................7-24
7.2.10 LAN Port Setting) ..........................................................................7-27
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................7-30
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................7-30
7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................7-31
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) .....................7-33
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (SSR MON) .......................7-35
7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................7-38
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) .......................................7-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) ...................................7-39
7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) .....................................7-40
7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) ......7-41
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-43

SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................8-1
8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ...........................................................8-2
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532 .................................................................8-2
8.2.2 Display Unit (NCD-9170) ................................................................8-4
8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ......................................................................8-5
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu ...............................................8-5
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-11
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ..................................8-12
8.4.2 Replacement of Motor ...................................................................8-12
8.4.3 Replacement of 23inch LCD ........................................................8-17
8.4.4 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-20

SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE
9.1 FAULT FINDING .....................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications .............................................9-1
9.1.2 Operation Checking ........................................................................9-6
9.1.3 Fuse Checking .................................................................................9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ...........................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Circuit Block to be Repaired ..........................................................9-7
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ......................................................................9-9
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ...........................................9-9
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ........................................................9-9
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ..........................................................9-9

SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ....................................................................10-1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .....................................................10-1
10.3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS .................................................................10-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9172-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-1
11.2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532) ...............................................................11-2
11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170) .................................................................11-3
11.4 Target Tracking Function ...................................................................11-6
11.5 AIS FUNCTION .....................................................................................11-7

Appendix A
NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit
A.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ A-1
A.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Interswitch Setup ........................................................................... A-1
A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A.2.1 Operation Flow ............................................................................... A-3
A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu ........................................................................... A-4
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................ A-6
A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display Units) .. A-7
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units ................................. A-9
A.3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-10
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-10
A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern .................................... A-10
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-10
A.3.4 Setting at Installation ................................................................... A-11

Appendix B
DRAWINGS
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-1
B.1.1 NCD-9170 ........................................................................................ B-2
B.1.2 NCD-9170T ...................................................................................... B-3
B.1.3 NWZ-178-R ...................................................................................... B-4
B.1.4 NWZ-178-RT .................................................................................... B-5
B.1.5 NCE-5322-R ..................................................................................... B-6
B.1.6 NCE-5322-RT ................................................................................... B-7
B.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ............................................. B-8
B.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit .................................................. B-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B.4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-10
B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ B-11
B.5.1 NKE-1532 ...................................................................................... B-12
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit ....................................... B-13
B.6.1 NKE-1532 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-14
B.6.2 NKE-1532 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-15
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-16
B.7.1 JMA-9172-SA ................................................................................ B-17
B.7.2 NCD-9170T .................................................................................... B-18
B.8 GYRO I/F ............................................................................................. B-19
B.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-21
B.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ......................................... B-21
B.9.2 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................. B-23

Appendix C
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.5 AZ .......................................................................................................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-10
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
C.9 Serviceman Menu ............................................................................... C-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modified April 15, 2011 15:46

1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

1
2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL
KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2
3 BASIC OPERATION
3
4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
4
5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS
5
6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
6
7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
7
8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND
ADJUSTMENT 8
9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES
SERVICE 9
10 DISPOSAL
10
11 SPECIFICATIONS
11
Appendix
A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 1
GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

1.1 FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Function of This System .................................................................1-1
1.2 FEATURES .............................................................................................1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................1-4
1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS .........................................................................1-5
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................1-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.1 FUNCTIONS

1.1 FUNCTIONS
1
This equipment is a high-performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner
unit, a transmitter-receiver unit and a high resolution color LCD display unit.

This equipment complies with the performance standard of IMO.

1.1.1 Function of This System

The JMA-9172-SA is a color radar system designed to comply with the

international standards of the IMO.The main functions include:

• sensitivity adjustment
• sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression
• interference rejection
• bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fixed/variable range markers,
and electronic bearing line
• colored own track display(7 colors)
• NAV line and marker displays
• TM (True Motion) presentation
• self-diagnostic facilities
• radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor)
• Target Tracking functions (manual/automatic, target acquisition and tracking,
vector and trail displays, Trial maneuver and alarm displays)
• 8-unit switchover (Interswitch) function (option)

1－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.2 FEATURES

1.2 FEATURES

Realization of Large, Easy-to-see Screen with High Resolution

The 23.1-inch color LCD1 with high resolution can display radar images of 320
mm or more in diameter. Even short-range targets can also be displayed as high-
resolution images.

Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology

The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate
undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver
with a wide dynamic range, thus improving the target detection.

Target Tracking (TT) Function based on Advanced Technology

The target acquisition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the
fastest DSP and tracking algorithm. So stable operation in target tracking under
clutter is ensured.

• Acquisition and tracking of 100 targets.

• Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well
as sounds.
• Trial maneuvering functions provided.
• Tracks of up to 20 target ships can be stored with a maximum of 1,500 points
for each of them, and displayed distinguished by using seven different colors.

Overlay of Radar Images, Coastlines, and Own Ship's Track

As well as operator-created NAV lines and own ship's tracks/ARPA tracks, which
is stored on the memory card can be superimpose-displayed with radar images and
radar trails in all display modes including the head-up mode.

Easy Operation with GUI

All the radar functions can be easily controlled by simply using the trackball and
two switches to operate the buttons shown on the radar display.

1.The displayed resolution corresponds to SXGA(1280x1024).

1－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.2 FEATURES

Improved Day/Night Mode

Five types of background colors are available in Day/Dusk/Night mode (total 5

1
background colors). Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the
user's operating environment by simple key operation. The radar echoes and a
variety of graphics can also be represented in different colors, ensuring easy-to-
see displays.

Compact Design and Low Power Consumption

Since an LCD has been implemented as the display device, the weight of the
display is greatly reduced and the power consumption is lowered in comparison
with the conventional radar equipment.

Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated

The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If
any function deteriorates, an alarm message will appear on the radar display and
an alarm sounds at the same time. Even when the system is operating, the
functionality test can be carried out. (except on some functions)

Performance Monitor

The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity) can
appear on the radar display.

Easy Interswitch Operation (Option)

If an interswitch unit (option) is connected, up to eight JMA-9172-SA radar can

be switched over by performing simple operation.

Up to 2 radars: NQE-3141-2A is needed in Display Unit.

Up to 4 radars: NQE-3141-4A is needed separately.

Up to 8 radars: NQE-3141-8A is needed separately.

Various Functions

• RADAR Trails (Other ship's track display)

• TM (True Motion) display
• Head-up/North-up/Course-up display
• Own ship's track display
• Auto-acquisition Zone function

1－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.3 CONFIGURATION

1.3 CONFIGURATION

Table1-1:Specified of scanner, and categories of ship/craft for SOLAS V

Type of Radar Antenna type Transmitted Band Rate of Category

Output Power rotation

JMA-9172-SA 12ft Slotted Antenna 250W S 24rpm CAT 1

The class of emission: P0N , Q0N

Table1-2:Radar Configuration and Ship's Mains

Type of Radar Scanner Unit Display Ship’s Main

Unit

JMA-9172-SA NKE-1532 NCD-9170 AC100 to 115V, or

AC220 to 240V 50/60Hz
1φ

Notes:

1) The drive motor for the scanner unit is available in AC100-115V

or AC220-240V type for NKE-1532 . Please specify the motor type
when ordering.

2) The scanner unit can be equipped with a deicing heater as an

option, and '-D' shall be suffixed to the type name. (e.g. NKE-
1532-D).

3) When using the ship's mains of AC440V as the radar power

source, a step-down transformer shall be used.

4) The desktop option is available for display NCD-9170. It has a

separate structure consisting of the following:

Monitor Unit NWZ-178

Radar Process Unit NDC-1478

Operation Unit NCE-5322

1－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

1
Fig 1-1: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1532

Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-9170

Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-178 (Desktop type option)

Fig 1-4: Outline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1478 (Desktop type option)

Fig 1-5: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5322 (Desktop type option)

Fig 1-6: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-4A (Option)

Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-8A (Option)

Fig 1-8: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option)

1－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-1: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1532

1－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-9170

1－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-178 (Desktop type option)

1－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-4: Outline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1478 (Desktop type option)

1－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-5: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5322 (Desktop type option)

1 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-6: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-4A (Option)

1－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-8A (Option)

1 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS

Fig 1-8: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option)

1 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

Fig 1-9: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9172-SA

1 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

NKE-1532
SCANNER UNIT
1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)

AC100V,60Hz (5A)
1φ,200W

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

NBL-175
SHIP’S MAIN
for HEATER
STEPDOWN AC220V,60Hz,1φ
TRANSFORMER

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2695110056
MAX 23φ (JRC SUPPLY)

NCD-9170
DISPLAY UNIT

250V-MPYCYS-7 0.6/1kV-DPYCY-6 SHIP’S MAIN

GYRO
250V-TTYCS-1 AC220V,60Hz,1φ,800VA
LOG (NMEA 0183)
250V-TTYCS-1 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 SHIP’S MAIN
DGPS for POWER FAIL ALARM
3C-2V x5 (MAX 30m)
VDR DC24V(BATTERY),1W
18 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE
H-2695111153
MAX 18.0φ (JRC SUPPLY)
RADAR (INTER SWITCH)
250V-TTYCS-4
H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY )
ECDIS (JAN-901M)
H-2668510019 (JRC SUPPLY) SPARE

ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM

(NEAREST APPROACH) 250V-MPYC-4
(POWER FAIL)
250V-TTYCS-4
CONNING DISPLAY (JAN-701-CON)
250V-TTYCS-4
AIS

Fig 1-9: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9172-SA

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation
due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio
equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. )
Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be
run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

1 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

1 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL
PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY .............................................................................2-1
2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

2
Example of screen display

In this example, the screen is divided into a number of areas and the names in
each area are indicated.

Upper left Upper right

of the display PPI of the display

Tuning OK

Own ship' s
information
S

Target
tracking(TT) /
AIS information

Digital information

Menu
Brilliance /
Display information
Alarm
Lower left Lower right
of the display of the display

2－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

PPI

Automatic acquisition/
activation zone Association target Own ship' s symbol

Ship' s heading Tuning OK

marker
Past position
Ship' s
heading line S
AIS target number

Cursor mark

AIS target symbol

Tracked target
vector

Tracked target
AIS target vector
number

Radar trails
Tracked target
symbol
Parallel index lines
VRM2

Other ship' s track

EBL2

VRM1 EBL1 CPA ring

2－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Upper left of the display

Range scale Optimum performance indication

Range rings display On / Off

2
Range rings interval
Transmission pulse length
Tuning OK

Motion mode true / relative

Radar trail true / relative

Stability mode
Off center
On / Off

S Azimuth display mode

Transmission / standby

S band

Interswitch connection status

About ground and sea stabilization

Speed sensor source is MAN , LOG , 2AXW

If Set/Drift Setting menu is on ：GND (Ground stabilization)

If Set/Drift Setting menu is off ：Sea (Sea stabilization)

Speed sensor source is GPS , 2AXG ：GND (Ground stabilization)

Lower left of the display

Double zoom On / Off

Interference rejection (IR) mode

Radar video processing (PROC)

Target enhance (ENH) mode
mode

Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

Function (FUNC) mode
mode
Gain dial position
Rain / snow clutter suppression
(Rain) mode
Sea clutter uppression (Sea)
dial position

Rain / snow clutter

suppression (Rain)
dial position

2－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Upper right of the display

Cursor bearing Cursor bearing Cursor mode
numeric value indication Cursor latitude
true / relative

Cursor range Cursor longitude

EBL1 numeric value indication EBL1

true / relative starting point mode

EBL2
EBL1 bearing
starting point mode

Parallel index line

VRM1 range
starting point mode

EBL2 numeric value indication Consistent Common

true / relative Reference Point (CCRP)
EBL2 bearing VRM2 range

Lower right of the display

Own ship's track interval

Mark color

Own ship's track interval unit

Own ship's track color

Map display Map position correction

On / Off indication

Graphic display CPA ring display

On / Off On / Off
Ship's heading line
On / Off

Own ship's information

Operation status

Ship's heading bearing

Heading device

Own ship's speed

Speed sensor
Own ship's
course over ground
Time display mode
Own ship's
speed over ground
Positioning system
(example: GPS, DGPS )
Date and time

Geodetic positioning system

CCRP latitude CCRP longitude

2－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Target tracking (TT) / AIS information

Target tracking (TT) /
Target vector true / relative Target vector length
EPA / AIS

2
Past position display
TCPA limit
interval
CPA limit
Past position display
interval unit
Past position true / relative

AIS On / Off Association On / Off

AIS filter mode

Tracked target symbol
display On / Off
Radar trails remaining time
AIS target symbol display
On / Off
Radar trails true / relative Radar trails display time

Numeric information: AIS target information

AIS target number

Simple display item

Ship's name
Unread message

Call sign
MMSI
Course
CPA
Speed
TCPA

Bearing Ship's heading bearing

Rate of turn
Range
Latitude

Latitude / longitude error Longitude

Navigation status Destination

2－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

About time display mode

UTC : Universal Time Coordinate

UTC(S) : UTC (System Time)

LMT : Local Mean Time

LMT (S) : LMT (System Time)

Numeric information: Tracked target information

Tracked target number

Bearing

True course Range

True speed

CPA
BCR
TCPA
BCT

No information is displayed
if digital information value is
not displayed

Numeric information: Enhancement of cursor position numeric value indication

Cursor bearing numeric
Cursor bearing value indication
true / relative

Cursor range
Cursor latitude

Cursor longitude

2－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Numeric information: Enhancement of EBL / VRM numeric value display

EBL bearing
EBL bearing numeric value indication
true / relative

VRM range

2
Numeric information: Navigation information

Depth

Current direction Water temperature

Current speed Wind direction

Wind direction / speed Wind speed

numeric value indication
true / relative

Destination bearing Destination distance

Remaining time before

arriving destination

Graph information: Depth indication

Depth

Depth range
Depth graph

Time range

2－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Graph information: Water temperature indication

Water temperature

Water temperature range

Water temperature graph

Time range

Graph information: Wind direction / speed

Wind direction / speed

true / relative
Wind direction

Wind speed

Graph information: Course bar

Auto pilot course

Ship's heading bearing

Rudder Rate of turn

2－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Numeric information: Marker

Marker bearing Marker latitude

Marker range Marker longitude

Arrival time 2

Menu
Main menu

Digital information Parallel index line menu

Automatic acquisition /
Target Tracking (TT) menu
activation zone (AZ) menu

Own Track menu User map menu

AIS menu Route menu

Brilliance
Main menu

Digital information Parallel index line menu

Automatic acquisition /
Target Tracking (TT) menu
activation zone (AZ) menu

Own Track menu User map menu

AIS menu Route menu

Display information

Panel lighting brilliance Day / night mode

Radar video brilliance Tracked target / AIS target

symbol brilliance

2－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY

Alarm

Alarm indication
(The system alarm indicated in red .
Other information indicated in blue or yellow.)

2 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS

2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF

CONTROL PANEL KEYS

30
28

29
RANGE

VRM2
14
9

15
VRM1
13
GAIN
8

23
CANCEL

OPTION
DATA

27
ACQ

OFF
19

2
SEA
7

22
MANUAL

OPTION
ACQ
18

26
OFF
HL

1
RAIN

AIS/AR

USER
DATA
6

TGT

25
17

PA

21
TUNE

PANEL
NIGHT
VECT

DAY
5

16

24
T/R

20
ALARM
PWR FAIL

ACK
4
PWR
ACK
2

EBL2
11

12
POWER

STBY

EBL1
10
TX
1

The name of each button is described from the following page. See below.

2－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS

1 [POWER] (Power supply) switch

The lamp is lit and the equipment is activated.
If this switch is pressed while the equipment is running, the power of the equipment is
shut down.
→ 3.1.1 on page 3-2

2 [PWR ACK] (Power alarm acknowledgement) key

Use this function to acknowledge the alarm when power supply abnormality occurs.
To enable this key, an external battery (separate power from normal AC) is required.

3 [TX／STBY] (Transmission/Standby) key

When the [POWER] switch is pressed, the "STANDBY" message is displayed in the
top-left corner of the screen in about 10 seconds. If this key is pressed, transmission
starts. If this key is pressed during transmission, the equipment is set to a standby state.
→ 3.1.1 on page 3-2

4 [ALARM ACK] (Alarm acknowledgement) key

Use this function to acknowledge alarms such as failure alarm, approaching target alarm,
and collision alarm.
By pressing this key at the occurrence of an alarm, the alarm sound can be stopped.
If multiple alarms occur, press this key same time as the alarms.
→ 3.2.7 on page 3-13

5 [TUNE] (Tuning) dial

Not function.
JMA-9172-SA radar is fully automatic. There is no necessary for a tuning function.

6 [RAIN] (Rain / snow clutter suppression) dial

This function suppresses rain / snow clutters.
To increase the effect of suppression, turn the dial clockwise.
The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial.
→ 3.2.6 on page 3-11

7 [SEA] (Sea clutter suppression) dial

This function suppresses sea clutter.
To increase the effect of suppression, turn the dial clockwise.
The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial.
→ 3.2.5 on page 3-9

2 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS

8 [GAIN] (Gain/pulse length) dial

This function adjusts the reception sensitivity of the radar.
To increase the sensitivity, turn the dial clockwise.
The transmission pulse width can be switched by pressing the dial.

2
gain→ 3.2.4 on page 3-8
pulse width →3.4.2 on page 3-25

9 [RANGE ＋／－] (Range switching) key

This function switches the range.
Press [+] to increase the observation range.
Press [-] to reduce the observation range.
→ 3.2.2 on page 3-6

10 [EBL1] (Electronic Bearing Line 1) key

Use this function to display and select EBL1.
If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBL1 is displayed.
→ 4.1.3 on page 4-3

11 [EBL2] (Electronic Bearing Line 2) key

Use this function to display and select EBL2.
If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBL2 is displayed.
→ 4.1.3 on page 4-3

12 [EBL] (Electronic Bearing Line) dial

This function rotates the azimuth of the EBL that is selected in EBL1/2.
By pressing the dial, the selected EBL can be switched to Center fixing → Floating →
Center fixing.
→ 4.1.3 on page 4-3

13 [VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) key

This function selects VRM1. The On/Off and dial use right are switched.
→ on page 4-6

14 [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) key

This function selects VRM2. The On/Off and dial use right are switched.
→ on page 4-6

2 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS

15 [VRM] (Variable Range Marker) dial

This function changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM1/2.
By pressing the dial, the parallel line cursor function can be switched to Operation →
Fixed → Off → Operation.
→ on page 4-6

16 [T／R VECT] (True vector display / Relative vector display) key

This function switches the display mode (true/relative) of the tracked target and AIS
target vector.
→ 5.1.6 on page 5-14

17 [TGT DATA] (Target data display) key

This function displays the digital data of the tracked target or AIS target at the cursor
position.
the tracked target →5.2.3 on page 5-18
the AIS target →5.3.5 on page 5-29

18 [ACQ MANUAL] (Manual acquisition) key

This function enables manual acquisition of the target at the cursor position.
→ 5.2.1 on page 5-15

19 [ACQ CANCEL] (Tracked target cancellation) key

This function cancels the symbol and vector of the target that is being tracked and stops
the tracking of the target.
If this key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, all the targets that are being tracked are
cancelled.
→ 5.2.2 on page 5-17

20 [DAY ／NIGHT] (Day/night mode) key

This function switches the color and brightness of the screen that was preset.
→ 3.4.12 on page 3-36

21 [AIS/TT] (AIS On/Off) key

This function switches the AIS function to ON/OFF when the AIS function is enabled.
→ 5.3.2 on page 5-27

22 [HL OFF] (Ship's heading line Off) key

HL (ship's heading highlight line) can be set to Off only while this key is pressed.
→ 3.4.10 on page 3-35

2 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS

23 [DATA OFF] (DATA Off) key

This function sets the graphics other than HL, range ring, EBL, and VRM to OFF
temporarily while this key is pressed.
→ 3.4.11 on page 3-35
24 [PANEL] (Operator panel brilliance) key
This function adjusts the lighting brilliance of various switches and dial positions on the
operator panel. The brightness changes cyclically whenever this key is pressed. 2
→ 3.4.13 on page 3-36
25 [USER] key
By pressing this key, the signal processing setting that is preset can be called.
The setting changes to FUNC OFF ==> FUNC1 ==> FUNC2 ==> FUNC3 ==>
FUNC4 whenever this key is pressed.
If this key pressed for 2 seconds or more, the function setting menu is displayed.
→ 3.9 on page 3-113
26 [OPTION1] key
By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed.
At factory shipment, the calling of [Main Menu] is assigned.
→ 3.8.7 on page 3-104
27 [OPTION2] key
By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed.
At factory shipment, the calling of [Sub Menu] is assigned.
→ 3.8.7 on page 3-104
28 Track ball
This function moves the cursor mark to any position. Use this function for setting in
each mode.
Use this function to specify a center position of floating EBL and an off-center position.
→ 3.3.1 on page 3-15
29 [Track ball left button]
Use this function to confirm menu selection and numeric value input.
30 [Track ball right button]
Use this function to reset menu selection and numeric value input.
31 [BRILL] (Brilliance dial)
This dial is provided at the right of the monitor. Use this function to adjust the brilliance
of the monitor.
→ 3.2.1 on page 3-6

2 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE

BUTTONS

In this radar, the frequently used functions can be directly set from the screen
without opening the menu by using the software buttons on the screen for quick
handling. The screen is divided into a number of areas and each area is named.

Upper left Upper right

of the display PPI of the display

Tuning OK

Own ship' s
information
S

Target
tracking(TT) /
AIS information

Digital information

Menu
Brilliance /
Display information
Alarm
Lower left Lower right
of the display of the display

The name of each button is described from the next page. The function can be
used by left-clicking while setting the arrow cursor on the button position.

2 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

Upper left of the display

① Range scale sw itching

2
② Range rings display ⑦ Transmission pulse lengt
On /Off Tuning OK sw itching

③ Motion mode true / relative

sw itching

④ Off center switching

⑤ Transmission / Standby
switching S ⑧ Azimuth display mode
switching
⑥ Interswitch connect ion
change

1 Range scale switching

To increase the observation range scale (maximum 96NM), click ＋ and to reduce
the range (minimum 0.125NM), click － .

2 Range rings display On / Off

The display of range rings are set to On / Off whenever this button is clicked.
When the display is set to On, the interval of the fixed range marker is displayed.

3 Motion mode true / relative switching

The screen motion mode is switched whenever the button is clicked.
TM (true motion) ⇒ RM (relative motion) ⇒ TM
RM(R) indicates that the radar trails is a relative trail.
RM(T) indicates that the radar trails is a true trail.

4 Off center switching

If this button is clicked, the cursor is moved, and left-clicked, the ship's position can be
moved to the cursor position. The moving range is within 66% of the radius.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the off-center is set to Off and the ship's position is
returned to the center of the screen.

5 Transmission / standby switching

At expiration of the pre-heat time after the power is turned on, Preheat changes to
Standby .

Standby :Indicates a standby state. If this button is clicked in this state, the
equipment is set to a transmission state.

2 － 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

Transmit :Indicates a transmission state. If this button is clicked in this state,

the equipment is set to a standby state.

6 Interswitch connection change

This button is displayed when the interswitch is connected. This button indicates the
connection status of the scanner unit that is connected to the indicator.
If the button is clicked in the transmission standby state, the menu for changing the
connection state between the scanner unit and the indicator is displayed. The connection
state of the scanner unit and indicator cannot be changed unless the master indicator is in
a standby state.
Refer to the Appendix A NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit Interswitch (Optional) Instruction
Manual that is attached for the setting method. This button is not displayed if the
interswitch is not connected.Un-available for evaluation model.

7 Transmission pulse length switching

The transmission pulse length is switched whenever this button is clicked. Three types
of pulses are available, short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP), and long pulse (LP). The
pulse length and repetition frequency vary even for the same short pulse, according to
the range that is used and it is displayed as SP1 , SP2 .

8 Azimuth display mode switching

The azimuth display is switched whenever this button is clicked.
H Up (Head Up) ⇒ N Up (North Up) ⇒ C Up (Course Up) ⇒ H Up
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the GYTO Setting menu is displayed.

Lower left of the display

① Double zoom switching

② Interference rejection (IR)
④ Radar video processing (PROC)
mode switching
mode switching

⑤ Function (FUNC) ③ Target enhance (ENH)

mode switching mode switching

⑨ Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

⑥ Gain adjustment
mode switching

⑦ Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

⑩ Rain and snow clutter
adjustment
suppression (Rain)
mode switching
⑧ Rain / snow clutter
suppression (Rain)
adjustment

2 － 18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

1 Double zoom switching

Use this function to enlarge to double the size the display screen of the position specified
by the cursor. If this button is clicked, the zoom mode is set. When the cursor is moved
to the radar screen and left-clicked, the screen is enlarged to double the size so that the
middle of the cursor and the own ship's position is set to the center of the screen. This
function cannot be used when the range is 0.125NM.

2 Interference rejection (IR) mode switching 2

The interference rejection mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
IR Off ⇒ IR Low ⇒ IR Meddle ⇒ IR High ⇒ IR Off

3 Target enhance (ENH) mode switching

The target enhance mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
ENH Off ⇒ ENH Level1 ⇒ ENH Level2 ⇒ ENH Level3 ⇒ ENH Off

4 Radar video processing (PROC) mode switching

The radar video processing mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
PROC Off ⇒ 3Scan CORREL ⇒ 4Scan CORREL ⇒ 5Scan CORREL

⇒ Remain ⇒ Peak Hold ⇒ PROC Off

5 Function (FUNC) mode switching

The function mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
FUNC Off ⇒ Coast ⇒ Deep Sea ⇒ Rain

⇒ Storm ⇒ FUNC Off

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the function registration menu (User Function
Setting) is opened.

6 , 7 , and ⑧ Gain, Sea clutter suppression(Sea)、Rain / snow

clutter suppression (Rain)
Adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain / snow clutter suppression and tune using
the track ball.
If the button is clicked on, the adjustment value is shown at the upper-right of the cursor.
Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right. Determine the
adjustment by left-clicking.

2 － 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

10 , 11 and 12 Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode, Rain and snow clutter
suppression (Rain) mode switching
Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter
suppression, rain and snow clutter suppression, and tune. The bar on the left side
indicates the position of the dial.
The mode is switched to MAN (manual) / AUTO (automatic) whenever the
button is clicked. If rain and snow clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode,
sea clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode also.

Upper Right of the display

⑨ EBL1 numeric value indication ② Mark font / line pattern
true / relative switching switching

① Cursor mode switching

③ Mark color / line color
switching
④ Cursor bearing
⑪ EBL1 starting point
numeric value display
mode switching
true / relative switching
⑫ EBL2 starting point
mode switching
⑤ EBL1 adjustment
⑬ Parallel index line
⑥ VRM1 adjustment
setting
⑦ EBL2 adjustment

⑧ VRM2 adjustment
⑩ EBL2 numeric value indication ⑭ Parallel index line
true / relative switching starting point mode
switching

1 Cursor mode switching

The mode of the function that uses the cursor is switched whenever this button is
pressed.
AUTO ⇒ ACQ TT ⇒ ACT AIS ⇒ TGT Data ⇒ CNCL TT ⇒
DEACT AIS ⇒ CNCL Data ⇒ □ ⇒ ------- ⇒ Property ⇒
AUTO

2 Mark font / line pattern switching

This function switches a mark font / line pattern. If this button is clicked while the cursor
mode is □ (mark) or - - - - - - - (line), the mark font / line pattern is
changed.

2 － 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

3 Mark color / line color switching

This function switches a mark color / line color. If this button is clicked while the cursor
mode is □ (mark) or - - - - - - - (line), the mark color / line color is
changed.

4 Cursor bearing numeric value display true / relative switching

The bearing numeric value display T (true bearing) / R (relative bearing) of the
2
cursor is switched whenever this button is clicked.

5 , 6 , 7 and 8 EBL1 / 2 and VRM1 / 2 adjustment

These functions set the EBL1 , VRM1 , EBL2 , and VRM2 displays to On / Off and
acquire the operation right.
If the button is clicked on, the operation right is acquired. Make adjustments by moving
the track ball to the left and right Determine the adjustment by left-clicking.

9 and 10 EBL1, EBL2 numeric value true / relative switching

The EBL1 / 2 bearing numeric value display T (true bearing) / R (relative
bearing) is switched whenever the button is clicked.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the EBL / Cursor Setting menu is displayed.

11 and 12 EBL1 / EBL2 starting point mode switching

The EBL starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this
button is clicked.
_ ⇒ C ⇒ D ⇒ _

_ ：Center The starting point is fixed to the CCRP position.

C ：Screen Fix The starting point is set to the cursor position. If left-
clicked subsequently, the starting position is fixed to
the cursor position.
D ：L/L Fixi The starting point is set to the cursor position. If
left-clicked subsequently, the starting position is
fixed to the latitude / longitude of the cursor.
(Connection of a navigator is necessary.) If the
starting point is moved outside of the screen, the
operation is reset automatically and the starting
point returns to the CCRP position.

i. D is enabled only when a navigator is connected.

13 Parallel index line setting

This function sets the parallel index line display to On / Off and acquires the operation
right.
If this button is clicked, the operation right is acquired and the menu is opened. After
setting, determine the setting by left-clicking.

2 － 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

14 Parallel index line starting point mode switching

The parallel index line starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen
whenever this button is clicked.
In the same way as for the EBL starting point, three options are available, _ : Center,
C : Screen Fix, and D : L/L Fix.

Lower right of the display

③ Own ship's track interval
switching
① Mark color switching
④ Own ship's track interval unit
switching
② Own ship’s track color
switching

⑤ Map display
On / Off
⑧ CPA ring display
On / Off
⑥ Graphic display Off

⑦ Ship's heading line Off

1 Mark color switching

The color of the mark is switched whenever this button is clicked.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Mark Setting menu is opened.

2 Own ship's track color switching

The own ship's track color is switched whenever this button is clicked.

3 Own ship's track interval switching

The own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked.

4 Own ship's track interval unit switching

The unit of the own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked.
sec ⇒ min ⇒ NM ⇒ sec

5 Map display On / Off

The own track, target track and route display are set to On / Off whenever this button is
clicked. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Map Setting menu is opened.

6 Graphic display Off

While the button is clicked, the graphic display other than VRM, EBL, HL, a cursor, and
range rings on the radar screen is cleared temporarily.

2 － 22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

7 Ship's heading line Off

The ship's heading line (HL) display is set to Off while this button is clicked.
Since the ship's heading line is cleared while the button is clicked, the target in the ship's
heading bearing can be clearly seen.
8 CPA ring display On / Off
The CPA ring display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked.
When the target vector display mode is T (true vector), the CPA ring cannot be set to
2
On.

Own ship's information

① Heading device
switching

④ Manual own ship's speed

② Speed sensor setting
switching

③ Time display mode

switching

1 Heading device switching

The heading device is switched whenever this button is clicked.
GYRO ⇒ CMPS (Electronic compass)⇒ GYRO
When the selected heading device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.

2 Speed sensor switching

The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked.
MAN (Manual) ⇒ LOG (Single-axis water log) ⇒ 2AXW (Dual-axis water
log) ⇒ 2AXG (Dual-axis ground log) ⇒ GPS ⇒ MAN

When the selected speed device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.

3 Time display mode switching

The time display mode UTC (universal time clock) / LMT
(local mean time) is
switched whenever this button is clicked.

2 － 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

4 Manual own ship's speed setting

When selection of the speed sensor is set to MAN , enter the own ship's speed
manually.
If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting a value,
determine the entry by clicking ENT .

Target tracking (TT) / AIS information

① Target vector display
② Target vector length setting ④ TCPA limit setting
true / relative switching

⑥ Past position display

③ CPA limit setting
interval switching

⑤ Past position display

true / relative switching ⑦ Past position display
interval unit switching
⑧ AIS
On / Off ⑪ Association
On / Off
⑨ Tracked target symbol
display On / Off
⑫ AIS filter mode switching
⑩ AIS target symbol display
On / Off
⑬ Radar trails display ⑭ Radar trails display time
true / relative switching switching

1 Target vector display true / relative switching

The tracked target / AIS target vector display is switched to T (true vector) / R
(relative vector) whenever this button is clicked.
This setting is switched together with the past position display true / relative switching.

2 Target vector length setting

Set a vector length of the tracked target / AIS target.
If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the
length, determine the setting by clicking ENT .

3 CPA limit setting

Set a CPA limit.
If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit,
determine the setting by clicking ENT .

4 TCPA limit setting

Set a TCPA limit.
If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit,
determine the setting by clicking ENT .

2 － 24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

5 Past position display true / relative switching

The tracked target / AIS target past position display is switched to T (true past
position) / R (relative past position) whenever the button is clicked.
This setting is switched together with the target vector display true / relative switching.

6 Past position display interval switching

The past position display interval is switched whenever the button is clicked.
2
7 Past position display interval unit switching
The past position display interval unit is switched whenever the button is clicked.
min ⇒ NM ⇒ min

8 AIS On / Off
The AIS display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked.

9 Tracked target symbol display On / Off

The tracked target symbol display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is
clicked. Use this function to avoid confusion with the AIS symbol.

10 AIS target symbol display On / Off

The AIS target symbol display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked.
Use this function to avoid confusion with the tracked target symbol.

11 Association On / Off
The tracked target / AIS target association is switched to On / Off whenever the button is
clicked.

12 AIS filter mode switching

The AIS filter is switched whenever the button is clicked.
Range ⇒ Sector ⇒ Zone ⇒ Range

13 Radar trails display true / relative switching

Radar trails are switched to T (true motion trail) / R (relative motion trail)
whenever this button is clicked.
This setting is restricted by the radar display motion mode.
In relative motion display mode (RM), switching to T / R is possible.
In true motion display mode (TM), only T can be set.

2 － 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

14 Radar trails display time switching

The radar trails display time is switched whenever the button is clicked.
If the time does not reach the radar trails time that was set, the remaining time is
displayed on the right-hand side.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the RADAR Trails Setting menu is opened.

Numeric information: AIS target information

simple display

①：Detail / simple
display switching

②：Unread message
display

1 Detail / simple display switching

This function switches the display mode to detail / simple display when AIS target
information is displayed.

2 Unread message display

When there is an unread message from the AIS target that is displayed, the message is
displayed. If this button is clicked, the message is displayed.

2 － 26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

Numeric information: Tracked target information

① Tracked target
numeric value indication
scroll

1 Tracked target numeric value indication scroll

This function scrolls the target numbers that are indicated in the tracked target
information.

Numeric information: Navigation information

① Wind direction / speed

numeric value indication
true / relative switching

1 Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative

switching
The wind direction / speed numeric value indication is switched to T (true) / R
(relative) whenever this button is clicked.

2 － 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

Graph information: Wind direction / speed

① Wind direction / speed

numeric value indication
true / relative switching

1 Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative

switching
The wind direction / speed numeric value indication is switched to T (true) / R
(relative) whenever this button is clicked.

Menu
④ Main menu

① Digital information display ⑦ Parallel index line menu

⑧ Automatic acquisition /
② Target Tracking (TT) menu
activation zone (AZ) menu

③ Own ship’s track menu ⑨ User map menu

⑤ AIS menu ⑥ Route menu

1 Digital information display

If this button is clicked while the menu screen is open, the menu is closed and control
returns to the digital information display.
This function switches between the tracked target / AIS target display and navigation
information or the course bar, and so on.

2 Target Tracking (TT) menu

If this button is clicked, the TT Menu is opened.

3 Own track menu

If this button is clicked, the Own Track Menu is opened.

4 Main menu
If this button is clicked, the Main Menu is opened.

2 － 28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

5 AIS menu
If the button is clicked, the AIS Menu is opened.

6 Route menu

7
If this button is clicked, the Route Menu is opened.

Parallel index line menu

2
If this button is clicked, the PI Menu is opened.

8 Automatic acquisition / activation zone menu

If this button is clicked, the AZ Menu is opened.

9 User map menu

If the button is clicked, the User Map Menu is opened.

Brilliance
① Display item switching

② Panel lighting brilliance

switching ⑤ Day / night mode
switching

③ Radar video brilliance ④ Tracked target / AIS target symbol

switching brilliance switching

Display information

① Display item switching

⑥ User map load

⑦ User setting load

2 － 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

1 Display item switching

The brilliance adjustment screen and display information setting screen interchange
whenever this button is clicked.

⇔
2 Panel lighting brilliance switching
This function enables the setting of the brilliance of the lighting of the control panel.
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are
available.

3 Radar video brilliance switching

Adjust the brightness of the radar video (echo).
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Four levels of settings are
available.

4 Tracked target / AIS target symbol brilliance switching

Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the tracked target / AIS target symbol.
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are
available.

5 Day / night mode switching

The day / night mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
Day1 → Day2 → Day3 → Dusk

　　 Day2 ← Day3 ← Dusk ← Night

6 User map load

If this button is clicked, the user created map read menu is opened.

7 User setting load

If this button is clicked, the user setting read menu is opened.

2 － 30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

Alarm
① Alarm acknowridgement

② Error log display

1 Alarm acknowledgment
2
If this button is clicked, the buzzer sound of the alarm that is currently issued is stopped
and the alarm lamp stops blinking. If multiple alarms are issued, the next alarm to be
acknowledged is displayed.
If the button is clicked, the alarm displayed on the top is acknowledged.
The alarms that are currently issued are displayed at the bottom one by one.

2 Alarm log display

If this button is clicked, the alarm log is display.

2 － 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS

2 － 32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION

BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................................3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................3-4
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5
3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ..................................................3-6
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ......................................3-6
3.2.3 Tune ..................................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ...........................................3-11
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .............................................3-13
3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed ...3-14
3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES ..............................................................3-15
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons ...........................................................3-16
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation ..................................................................3-17
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character
Input menu .....................................................................................3-18
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-23
3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................3-24
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................3-24
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] ....................................3-25
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................................3-26
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) .....................................................3-27
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................3-28
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) .................3-29
3.4.7 Move Own Ship’s Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-30
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) .........................................................3-31
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-34
3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ...........................................3-35
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] .......3-35
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] .........................................3-36
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................3-36
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-37
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed .....................................................................3-37
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) .............3-38
3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-40
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) .........................3-40
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) .3-41
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................3-42
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........3-42
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-43
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) .................3-43
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-45
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) ..................3-46
3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) .........................3-47
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ...........................................................................3-48
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-48
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) .............................3-51
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) .....................................................3-53
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) .........................3-61
3.6.5 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-62
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) .............................3-66
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-68
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) .........................3-68
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-69
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) 3-76
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3.7.5 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-82
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................3-83
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) .................3-88
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-89
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-93
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .........................3-93
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-97
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) .................................................3-99
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ........................................................3-100
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ..........................................3-101
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-104
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-104
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-106
3.8.9 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-111
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-113
3.9.1 Operation Procedures .................................................................3-113
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-114
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-115
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-119
3.10 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-120
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-120
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-121
3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ...........................3-121
3.11 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-122
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-122
3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING .................................................................3-129
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port) ...................................................3-129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW

3.1 OPERATION FLOW

Attention

• Do not put anything on the operation panel.

If you put anything hot on it, it may be deformed.
3
• Do not give any impact to the operation panel,
trackball, or controls.
Otherwise, any failure or damage may result.

POWER ON AND
START THE SYSTEM

OBSERVE AND
ADJUST VIDEO

ACQUIRE AND
MEASURE DATA

END THE OPERATION

AND STOP THE SYSTEM

Each operation is described in detail below.

3－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW

3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System

• A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is

! instantaneously interrupted during operation of the
radar. In this case, the power should be turned on
again.

Attention

• Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the power again.

3－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW

Procedures
1) Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.

2) Press [POWER] key.

The system is turned on, and the preheating time is displayed.
Preheat is indicated at the upper left of the radar display.

3) Wait until the preheating time is over.

When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and
at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby .
Preheat
3
4) Press [TX/STBY] key.
The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating.
Standby at the upper left of the radar display changes to Transmit .

It will be displayed Tuning OK at the upper left of the radar display.

i The radar system is optimum.If not displayed, Radar should be checked
by a service engineer.

The radar does not start transmission if you press [TX/STBY]

NOTE: Preheat
key while is indicated.

3－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW

3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video

Procedures
1) Press [RANGE+] key or [RANGE-] key to set the range to the
scale required for target observation.

2) [GAIN] [SEA] and [RAIN] to obtain the clearest targets.

Refer to

[GAIN] dial→ Section 3.2.4 "Adjust Gain [GAIN]"

[SEA] dial→ Section 3.2.5 "Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]"

[RAIN] dial → Section 3.2.6 "Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter

[RAIN]"

for how to use each dial.

For how to adjust video, see Section 3.2 "OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO"

3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data

For details on how to acquire data and measure, see the SECTION
4"MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING".

3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP

The radar video, range, bearing, Target Tracking and AIS data display etc... are
displayed with reference to CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point).

If scanner is switched, these data are measured from CCRP.

If some kind of functions (for example off center, true motion mode, etc.) set
scanner position to 75% outside of the PPI range, these data except Target
Tracking and AIS data are displayed with reference to scanner position.

For how to setting CCRP, see the Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)".

3－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW

3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System

Exit
1) Press [TX/STBY] key.
The radar will stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating.
Transmit at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby .

Maintain the standby state if radar observation is restarted in a

i relatively short time.Only pressing the [TX/STBY] key starts
observation.
3
2) Press [POWER] key.
The system will be turned off.

• When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn

! off the power and make the main breaker OFF so that the
power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
• Some equipment components can carry electrical
current even after the power switch is turned off, and
conducting maintenance work without unplugging the
power connector may result in electrocution, equipment
failure, or accidents.

3－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]

Procedures
1) Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning
the [BRILL] dial at the lower right of the monitor unit.
Turning the [BRILL] dial clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display.

Conversely, turning the [BRILL] dial counterclockwise decreases the brilliance of the entire
display.

In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust display brilliance that is high enough to
easily observe the radar display but does not glare.

3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-]

Procedures
1) Pressing the [RANGE+] key will increase the observation range,
enabling the wider area to be observed.
Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed.

However, a video image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases.
Therefore, when observing the vicinity of own ship, use the smaller observation range.

2) Pressing the [RANGE-] key will decrease the observation range,

reducing the area that can be observed.
Decreasing the observation range will enable the vicinity of own ship to be enlarged.
However, caution must be taken because video images of the area beyond the observation
range cannot be displayed.

3－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.3 Tune
JMA-9172-SA radar is fully automatic.

There is no adjusted necessary for a tuning function.

It is displayed on the left of the screen, "Tuning OK".

Tuning OK
3

3－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN]

If the gain is too high, unnecessary signals including

receiver noise and false images increase resulting in
reduction of visibility of targets.
On the contrary, if the gain is too low, targets including
ships and dangerous objects may not be clearly
indicated.
Be sure to always adjust for the best gain.

See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".

Procedures
1) Adjust noise on the radar display by turning the [GAIN] dial until
targets can be easily observed.
Turning [GAIN] dial clockwise increases gain.

Turning [GAIN] dial counterclockwise decreases gain.

Turning the [GAIN] dial clockwise will increase the receiving gain, and the
range to observe radar video is widened. However, if the gain is too high,
unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase
resulting in reduction of targets' visibility.

To observe densely crowded targets or short-range targets, turning the

[GAIN] dial counterclockwise will decrease the receiving gain, which
enables targets to be easily observed. However, caution must be taken so
as not to overlook a small and important target.

It is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level

i the factory default, if you lost the appropriate
settings.The factory default level is shown on
the bar chart as a green line.

The factory default level is assigned by Factory Default

every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"

3－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]

When using the sea clutter suppression function,

never set the suppression level too high canceling out
all image noises from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also
targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will
become inhibited.
3
When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to
choose the most appropriate image noise suppression
level.

See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".

3.2.5.1 Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode

Procedures
1) Adjust the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turning the
[SEA] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [SEA] dial clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns.

Turning [SEA] dial counterclockwise intensifies sea clutter returns.

The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by

decreasing the receiving gain on a short range.

Turning the [SEA] dial clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter
suppression. However, be careful that excessive suppression causes
low signal-strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from
the radar display.

It is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level

i the factory default, if you lost the appropriate
settings.The factory default level is shown on
the bar chart as a green line.

The factory default level is assigned by Factory Default

every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"

3－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.5.2 Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode

The sea clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of sea clutter is
possible. Use this mode when the sea clutter's intensity differs according to
directional orientation.

Procedures
1) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea MAN
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO is displayed in the
lower left of the radar display.

2) Make adjustments by turning the [SEA] dial.

Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the [SEA] dial can
make fine adjustments manually.

When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected,

NOTE: the automatic rain/snow suppression mode is switched to the
manual mode.
To select both the sea clutter suppression function and the rain/
snow suppression function in the automatic mode, use the
automatic rain/snow suppression mode.

Cancel
1) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea AUTO
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea MAN is displayed in the
lower left of the radar display.

3 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN]

When using the rain clutter suppression function,

never set the suppression level too high canceling out
all image noises from the rain or snow at the close
range.
Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but
also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects
3
will become inhibited.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to
choose the most appropriate image noise suppression
level.

See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".

3.2.6.1 Using the manual rain / snow clutter suppression mode

Procedures
1) Adjust the rain / snow clutter returns of the display by turning the
[AUTO-RAIN] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [RAIN] dial clockwise suppresses rain / snow clutter returns.

Turning [RAIN] dial counterclockwise intensifies rain / snow clutter returns.

When the [RAIN] dial is turned clockwise, the rain / snow clutter
suppression function suppresses rain / snow clutter returns and gets
targets hidden by rain / snow clutter returns to appear of the display.
However, be careful that excessive suppression may cause small
targets to be overlooked. Since the rain / snow clutter suppression
function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression
efficiency improves when the [RAIN] dial is used with the [SEA] dial. In
general, turn the [RAIN] dial fully to the left.

It is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level

i the factory default, if you lost the appropriate
settings.The factory default level is shown on
the bar chart as a green line.

The factory default level is assigned by Factory Default

every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"

3－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.6.2 Using the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode

The rain / snow clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of rain / snow
clutter is possible. Use this mode when the rain / snow clutter's intensity differs
according to directional orientation.

Procedures
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain MAN
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is displayed in the lower left of the radar display.

2) Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial.
Even when the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the
[RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial can make fine adjustments manually.

When the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is

NOTE: selected, the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and
Doppler Filter* are also activated.
It is not possible to set only the rain / snow clutter suppression
function to the automatic mode.

Cancel
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain AUTO
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is changed to Sea MAN ,Rain MAN in the lower left of the radar display.

* Doppler Filter: This function possible on solid radar is provided superior

ditection in the case of heavy rain and snow situation.

3 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]

When an audible alarm is issued, use ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alarm
information, stop the alarm buzzing, and stop the alarm lamp flashing. (If more
than one alarm has occurred, press the switch for each alarm indication.) The
alarm stops buzzing, but the alarm indication does not disappear.

Procedures
1) Press [ALARM ACK] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Alarm
Acknowridge button located at the lower right of the display. 3
The alarm will stop buzzing.

3 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO

3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily

observed
To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed which requires an
understanding for RADAR signal processing features and an adjustment for the
sea state. All of the parameter can be set indivisually and manually, but it may by
difficult for even expert person.

The sets of signal processing parameters for the general using condition are stored
in FUNC as factory default settings. In most cases, to select the FUNC mode
which fit in the current sea state is lead to get the appropriate image easily and
quickly. So It is recommended to enable the FUNC mode.

Procedures
1) Press [USER] key / Press
FUNC mode switch button
and select the mode which fit Function
(FUNC) mode
in the current sea state.
The four preset modes is assigned on the
FUNC mode. For details, refer to the
Section 3.9 "USE FUNCTION KEY
[USER]".

: Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example,

Coast
bays and coasts where many boats and ships are
running.(Importance is attached to resolution.)
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example,
Deep Sea
the open sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
: Use this mode when many rain / snow clutter returns or sea
Storm
clutter returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is
attached to rain / snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and
gain slightly lowers.)
: Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain / snow
Rain
clutter is strong. (Importance is attached to rain / snow clutter
suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)

2) Make adjustments by turning the [GAIN] dial, the [SEA] dial and
the [RAIN] dial when it is necessary.
In most cases, it may be get the appropriate image.

It is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level

i the factory default, if you lost the appropriate
settings.The factory default level is shown on
the bar chart as a green line.

The factory default level is assigned for Factory Default

every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"

3 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball

The cross cursor mark + is used for position designation and other purposes in
various operating procedures. The cross cursor mark + moves in coupling with
the trackball. If the trackball is rotated up and down or right and left, the cross
cursor mark follows the move of the trackball.
3
Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system.

3.3.1.1 Operation inside Radar Video PPI

The cross cursor mark as shown at right is displayed inside the radar video
PPI.

• The distance, bearing, and latitude/longitude are digitally indicated in the

cursor bearing, distance, latitude, and longitude fields (located at the upper
right of the radar display.)
• When moving the current center position, use the cross cursor mark to
designate a new center position.
• Use the cross cursor mark to create marks and lines.
• Use the cross cursor mark to manually acquire a target in the target tracking /
AIS display functions.

3.3.1.2 Operation outside Radar Video PPI

As shown at right, the cursor mark changes into the cursor outside the radar
video PPI.

• Use the cursor to operate software buttons.

• Use the cursor to select menu items.
The EBL / VRM dial is available for operating the cursor mark.
i Pressing the EBL dial for 2 seconds can perform switching to
the trackball operation. For details, refer to Section 3.8.4 "Set
Cursor (Cursor Setting)".

3 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons

Software buttons are provided on the radar display so as to easily switch functions
without operating menu items.

For software buttons that can be operated and their locations, see Section 2.3
"FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS".

Procedures
1) Put the pointer on the software button on the radar display.
The software button indicated by the cursor will be shown in reverse video, which indicates
that the button is specified.

2) Press the left button of the trackball.

The operating state changes according to the function of the software button.

In this instruction manual, this manual operation is described as "left-clicking."

• On/Off settings
Each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as follows:

On → Off → On → Off

• Multiple settings
For example, each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as
follows:

IR Off → IR Low → IR Meddle → IR High → IR Off

3 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation

3.3.3.1 To open the menu

By left-clicking the Main button located at the lower right of the radar
display, the main menu will open

By left-clicking the buttons, TT , AIS , and AZ , adjacent to

Main , each function's exclusive menu will open.

3
For the arrangement of software buttons, see Section 2.3 "FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS".

3.3.3.2 To close the menu

By left-clicking the Target button, the menu will close and the target data
display screen will appear.

Alternatively, left-click 0.Exit located at the bottom of the menu until the
menu will close.

3.3.3.3 To move to a lower level of the menu

The menu is in hierarchical structure. By left-clicking the software button for a
desired menu item, it is possible to move to the lower level of the menu.

Alternatively, Click items corresponding to the desired menu item number, and the
> mark will appear at the right end of a menu item having a lower level.

3.3.3.4 To move to a higher level of the menu

By left-clicking 0.Exit at the bottom of the menu while the menu is open, it is
possible to return to the upper level of the menu.

3.3.3.5 To determine an item

By left-clicking the software button for a menu item for which settings are to be
changed, the selected item will be displayed.

3.3.3.6 To determine the selected item

Left-click the software button for an item you want to set, and then the selected
item will be determined.

If you do not change the setting, right-click the button. The selected item will
close without changing the setting.

3 － 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.3.7 Menu Operation with the Trackball

Item
Selected item
Press numeric keys
corresponding to the desired
item number to display the
Present state
selected item.

Press numeric keys

corresponding to the
desired item number to
Cursor
select a set value.

Software button When the [ > ] mark appears

at the right end of a menu
item, press numeric keys
Press the [0] key to
corresponding to the selected
move to the higher level.
item number to move to a
lower level.

3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and

Character Input menu

When a numeric value must be entered while operating this radar system, the
numeric value input screen will appear. In that case, enter a numeric value
according to the following operation method.

3 － 18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.4.1 Numeric value input screen

Entered value

Numeric button

- button + button
3
Clear button Enter button

3.3.4.2 Directly entering a numeric value

Procedures
1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software number keys located on the radar screen, and enter a
desired numeric value.
For example, when entering 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 for a bearing value, sequentially left-
click the software number keys as shown below.

2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the
ENT button.

The set value is reflected to the operating state.

3) To stop entering a value, right-click the [ENT] button.

Alternatively, left-click the CLR button.
The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating
state.

3 － 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.4.3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value

Procedures
1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software button ＋ or － located on the radar screen, and
enter a desired numeric value.
For example, when adjusting 123.0° to 123.4° for a bearing value, sequentially left-click the
software number keys as shown below.

＋ → ＋ → ＋ → ＋

2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the
ENT button.

The set value is reflected to the operating state.

3) To stop entering a value, right-click the ENT button.

Alternatively, left-click the CLR button.
The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating
state.

3.3.4.4 Latitude/longitude input screen

Entered latitude /
longitude

Numeric button

- button (south latitude / + button (north latitude /

west longitude) east longitude )

CLR button ENT button

3 － 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.4.5 Entering latitude/longitude

Procedures
1) On the latitude/longitude input screen, sequentially click numeric
buttons to enter latitude (XX°XX．XXX').
For example, to enter 12°34.567', sequentially click numeric buttons as follows.
1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7

2) To make change between north latitude and south latitude, use

3
＋ and － .
North latitude:Left-click the ＋ button.

South latitude:Left-click the － button.

3) Left-click the ENT button.

The manually entered latitude value is determined. Then, enter the longitude value.

4) Sequentially click numeric buttons to enter longitude (XXX°XX．

XXX').

5) To make change between east longitude and west longitude, use

＋ and － .
East longitude: Left-click the ＋ button.

West longitude: Left-click the － button.

6) Left-click the ENT button.

The manually entered longitude value is determined.

7) To cancel input, put the cursor on CLR and then left-click the
button.
The latitude/longitude input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating
state.

3 － 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.4.6 Character input screen

Character/Number button Entered character

Enter button
Delete button

Back Space button

Exit button

3.3.4.7 Entering a character

Procedures
1) On the character input screen, use trackball to select alphabet
from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, or symbols (only comments for
mark/line), and then left-click the ENT button to enter one
character of the name to be inputted.
For example, JRC for a name, click button as follows:

J → R → C

2) Make sure that the entered character is correct, left-click the

ENT button.

The character has been entered.

3) To cancel input, left-click the Exit button.

The character input screen will be closed without entering the character.

3 － 22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES

3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure

The menu structure of this radar system consists of eight frequently used function
menus, one main menu, and one service man menu used for the installation
settings.

Software buttons for opening those menus are displayed in the menu area located
at the bottom ten of the display.

For each menu item and structure, see the menu list in the appendix.

To prevent incorrect use, enter the special code to open the service man menu. For
3
operating the service man menu, see Section 7.1.1 "How to Open the Serviceman
Menu（Service Man Menu）"

Frequently used functions

TT Used for operating and setting the target tracking function.
Track Used for operating and setting the other ship trails function.
AIS Used for operating and setting the AIS display function.
Route Used for operating and setting the route function.
PI Used for operating and setting the parallel-index-line function.
AZ Used for operating and setting the automatic acquisition /
activate function.
U.MAP Used for operating and setting the user map function.

Main menu
Main Used for operating and setting the functions.

Serviceman menu
This menu is used for operation and settings when a system is
installed.

It is not used during normal operation.The special code must be

entered to open the service man menu.

3 － 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR)

Interference by other radars is rejected.

Procedures
1) Left-click the IR button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The interference rejection modes are switched.

IR Off → IR Low → IR Meddle → IR High → IR Off

Rejection levels of the interference rejector

IR Off : Interference rejector off/ Stagger trigger off

IR Low : Interference rejection level - low/ Stagger trigger off

IR Middle : Interference rejection level - moderate/ Stagger trigger on

IR High : Interference rejection level - high/ Stagger trigger on

When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar’s ability of

detecting small targets such as buoys and small boats lowers.

In general, IR Low should be selected.

Interference rejector switch link with stagger trigger switch automatically.

i When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar’s ability of detecting small
targets such as buoys and small boats lowers.
In general, IR Low should be selected.

3 － 24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]

Procedures
1) Press [GAIN] dial
Values of the transmitter pulse width are switched.

MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2

3
Effects of transmitter pulse width

With SP selected: The transmitter pulse becomes shorter, and the

range resolution improves. The effect of
suppressing sea clutter returns and rain/snow
clutter returns heightens.

Recommended condition for selection: In bays/harbors where targets are densely

crowded. Rough sea state due to torrential rain or
stormy weather.

With MP selected: The normal transmitter pulse length is set. Both

range resolution and gain are appropriately set.

Recommended condition for selection: General navigation

With LP selected: The transmitter pulse becomes longer, and gain

improves. Small targets are zoomed and are easy
to observe. When the sea state is bad, detection
performance decreases.

Recommended condition for selection: Detection of small targets in good weather

conditions.

Usable transmitter pulse width differs according to the type of antenna being used
and the observation range being used. For usable pulse width, see Section 11.2
“SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532)”

3 － 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH)

The dimension of video display is enlarged to enhance a target.

Procedures
1) Left-click the ENH button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The target enlargement levels are switched.

ENH Off ⇒ ENH Level1 ⇒ ENH Level2 ⇒ ENH Level3 ⇒ ENH Off

Effect of target enlargement

ENH Off :Expansion off Select this mode particularly when

resolution is required.

ENH Level1 :Expansion small Select this mode in general. Radar echoes
are expanded by 1 scale in all directions.

ENH Level2 :Expansion medium Select this mode to easily view the radar
video. Radar echoes are expanded by 2
scales in all directions on the display.

ENH Level3 Expansion large Select this mode to detect small targets
such as buoys. The expansion near a
screen center is added to ENH Level2.

When ENH Level3 is selected, sea clutter returns and rain/

NOTE: snow clutter returns are apt to be expanded. When using this
expansion mode, operate [SEA] dial and [RAIN] dial to
suppress sea clutter returns and rain/snow clutter returns.

In general, ENH Level1 or ENH Level2 should be selected.

3 － 26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC)

This function reduces unnecessary noise to highlight targets.

Attention
• If video processing mode is set to CORREL , it may
be difficult to detect high speed target.

3
Procedures
1) Left-click the PROC button located at the lower left of the
display.
The video processing modes are switched.

PROC Off → 3Scan CORREL → 4Scan CORREL

Peak Hold ← Remain ← 5Scan CORREL

Video process modes

PROC Off : Select this mode in general.

3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter
returns.
5Scan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter
returns.
Remain : Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection
probability is low.

3 － 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE)

Select the bearing for the radar video to be displayed on the radar display.

Procedures
1) Left-click the AZI Mode button located at the lower left of the
display.
The bearing display modes are switched.

H Up → N Up → C Up

True Bearing Mode [North Up]

The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0° on range rings) points to the due
north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing
of a target can easily be read out.

Relative Bearing Mode [Head Up]

The video is displayed so that the ship’s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI (0° on
range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the ship’s heading
line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea.
This mode is suitable for watching over other ships.

Course-up Bearing Mode [Course Up]

By setting the course-up mode, own ship's course is fixed so that it is located on the zenith of
the radar display (0° on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets
do not flicker, and are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading line
varies by the same shift of own ship’s course. To change the course, press the [AZI
MODE] key several times again to select the course-up mode so as to set a new course.
North HL HL
North
HL

North-up mode Head-up mode Course-up mode

3 － 28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM)

3.4.6.1 Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button located at the upper left of the
radar display.
RM(T) 　→　 TM

The true motion mode will be selected. In the true motion mode, the own ship’
the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the
s position on 3
current. Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar display and only actually moving
targets move on the radar display. When the true motion mode is selected, the own ship’s
position is set to about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course
allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed
and course and the influence of the current. Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the
position of about 66% of the display radius, it is automatically reset to its initial position at
about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
influence of the current.

HL
Fixed on the radar display

Moving depending on
own ship’s speed

True Motion Display

3.4.6.2 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button for 2 seconds.
Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is
changed to the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.

3.4.6.3 Switching True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button.
RM(T) 　→　 TM

The relative motion mode will be selected. Own ship returns to the center of the radar
display.

3 － 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.7 Move Own Ship’s Display Position (Off Center)

The own ship’s position can be moved from the display center to any position
within 66% of the display radius. This function is convenient for observing a wide
coverage in any direction.

If Off Center functions set to scanner position is outside of the PPI range, when
function switching display with reference to scanner position.
This function is not available on the 96 NM range.
i

Procedures
1) Left-click the Off Center button located at the upper left of the
display.
The cross cursor mark will appear at the own ship’s position on the radar display.

2) Move the cross cursor mark (own ship’s display position) to a

desired position by using the trackball.

While the cross cursor mark is moving, the own ship’s display position moves following
the cross cursor mark.

When it moves to a position outside 66% of the display radius, the center position is limited
to a position within 66% of the display radius.

3) Press the trackball button on the left key.

The own ship’s display position will be fixed to the cross cursor mark.
HL
HL

Press the [ENT] key

Move the cursor mark to
The own ship’s display
a desired position
position will be fixed.

3.4.7.1 Returning Own Ship's Position to the Center

Procedures
1) Left-click the Off Center button for 2 seconds.
The own ship position is returned to the center of the display.

3 － 30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails)

Other ship's movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and
directions of their trails, serving for collision avoidance. The trail length varies
according to setting.

3.4.8.1 Changing the length of the trail

Procedures
1) Left-click the Radar trails display time button located at the

3
upper left of the display.

RADAR trails display time

Values of the length of the radar trails are switched.

Trails length setting: Short mode

Off → 15sec → 30sec → 1min

15min ← 10min ← 6min ← 3min

Short ： 15sec, 30sec, 1min, 3min, 6min, 10min and 15min

Middle ： 30sec, 1min, 3min, 6min, 10min, 15min and 30min

Long ： 1min, 3min, 6min, 10min, 15min, 30min and 60min

Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed by using Trails button.
Even after the trails display is turned off, the past trails can be displayed traced back by
setting a desired time.

The radar system is start transmission, trails is start plot.

The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off.

If the transmit time is short, the indicated trails duration may not have achieved the specified
time. The radar trails remaining time is indicated at the right of the trails length setting.

3.4.8.2 Erasing Trails Data

Procedures
1) Hold down the Trails button for five seconds located at the
upper right of the display.
All the saved trails data will be erased. The system starts plotting trails in initial state.When
Trails button is clicked for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu will be displayed.
Furthermore, data will be erased if it continues pushing.

3 － 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.8.3 Trails Motion Mode

There are two types of trails: relative motion trails and true motion trails.

Relative motion The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to
trails: the own ship. The operator can easily judge whether the target
is approaching the own ship. While the own ship is moving, the
system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets.

True motion The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target,
trails: irrespective of the own ship’s position. The operator can easily
judge the course and speed of the target. The system does not
plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.

HL Trails HL

Land

Trails

True Motion Trails Ship Relative Motion Trails

Trails modes provided with this system vary depending on the motion mode.

With true motion (TM) Only the true motion trails mode is available.
mode:

With relative motion The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails
(RM) mode: mode isselectable.
RM(R) is indicated while the relative motion
trails mode is active.
RM(T) is indicated while the true motion trails
mode is active.

While the true motion trails mode is active, this system enables the continuous use of true
motion trails even if any of the following operations is performed:
• Motion display mode change (TM/RM)
• TM reset
• Bearing display mode change
• Center move (Off Center)
• MAP display on/off (Map)

Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary

i for using the true motion trails mode.

3 － 32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.8.4 Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails Mode)

Procedures
1) Click the Trails Mode located at the upper right of the radar
display.

RADAR trails true/relative

3
The trails motion modes are switched.

T ⇔ R 　

3 － 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.9 Zoom (x2)

This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position.

NOTE: If the range is 0.125 NM , this function is not available.

Procedures
1) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display.
The zoom mode is selected.

2) Subsequently, put the cross cursor mark on a location you want

to zoom into, and press the left key of the trackball.
The zoom is set.

Using the cross cursor mark as reference, the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video
with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ship’s position being set to the center
of radar display.

HL
HL

Cursor mark

Own ship’s Center of

position radar display

Own Ship’s Position before Own Ship’s Position after

Zooming position Zooming position

Cancel
1) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the
display.
The zoom mode is cancelled.

3 － 34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF]

Procedures
HL
1) Press the [HL OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
button located at the lower right of the display.
The ship's heading line (HL) is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down.

The ship's heading line that indicates the course of own ship is always shown on the radar
display. The heading line is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down, so the targets on
the heading line can be easily observed.
3
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF]

Various graphics information such as target tracking TT/AIS symbols, NAV lines,
and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this radar system, and may
make it difficult to view the radar video. In that case, use this function to
temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information.

Procedures
Data
1) Press the [DATA OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
button located at the lower right of the display.
While the key is pressed, graphics data other than VRM, EBL, HL, cross cursor mark, and
range rings on the radar display is temporarily hidden.

3 － 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT]

Several combinations of the display color and brilliance according to the ambient
lighting conditions are provided. The display color setting is easily changed.

Procedures
1) Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Alternatively, left-click the Day/Night
button located at the lower right of the radar display.
The DAY/NIGHT modes are switched.

Day1 → Day2 → Day3 → Dusk

　　 Day2 ← Day3 ← Dusk ← Night

The current mode is displayed at the lower right of the radar display.

For how to set the display color and brilliance for each mode, see Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar
Display (Display Setting)"

3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL]

Adjust brilliance of the operation panel according to the ambient lighting

conditions.

Procedures Panel
1) Press the [PANEL] key. Alternatively, left-click the ○
button located at the lower right of the radar display.
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read
the characters on the operation panel but does not glare.

The [PANEL] key lamp lights up irrespective of panel brilliance adjustment.

3 － 36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

3.4.14 Set True Bearing

When the GYRO I/F is used to enter a gyro signal, there is a rare case in which a
true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing
value indicated by this radar system.

In that case, adjust the true bearing value of this system so that it matches the
value indicated by the master gyro.

Procedures
1) Open the numeric value input screen to enter a true bearing
3
value by performing the menu operation below.
Main

→　 6.NAV Equipment Setting

→　 1. Gyro Setting

2) Enter a value indicated by the master gyro on the numeric value

input screen.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input
menu".

3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed

3.4.15.1 Switch the own ship speed device

Procedures
1) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship
Information area located at the upper right of the display.

The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked.

MAN (Manual) → LOG (Single-axis water log) → 2AXW (Dual-axis water log)

　 GPS (GPS) ← 2AXG (Dual-axis ground log)

3 － 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

NOTE: •If the single axis water log display can present the speed of
the ship in other than the forward direction, the direction of
movement should be indicated unambiguously. Therefore
single axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway.
•If you selected the 2AXW, the value of forward-backward
direction is indicated.
•If ships in shallow water, when the accuracy of the dual-axis
log may be decreased. If ships in deep sea area, when the
accuracy of the dual-axis log error may be occurred.
•The accuracy of GPS's COG is ± 3° when own ships speed
no fewer than 1kn, no more than 17kn. The accuracy of
GPS's COG is ± 1° when own ships speed over 17kn.

3.4.15.2 Input the own ship speed (Manual Speed)

If the ship-speed system, such as LOG, etc., connected to this radar system
malfunctions, it is possible to manually enter own ship speed by the method
described below to use the target tracking (TT) and true motion display functions.

Procedures
1) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship
Information area located at the upper right of the display, and
select the manual mode MAN .

2) Left-click the value of the speed.

The numeric value input screen will open to enter the own ship speed.

3) Enter the value for the own ship speed on the numeric value
input screen.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting)

Set the correction value, when the radar receive HDM sentence from magnet
compass or the variation of HDG is NULL.

Procedures
1) Open the MAG Compass Setting menu by performing the
following menu operation.
Main

→　 6.NAV Equipment Setting

→　 2. MAG Compass Setting

3 － 38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION

2) Set whether to make corrections or not.

1. Heading Correction

Off ⇔ On

3) Input the correction value.

Press the ＋ or － button to select south and north for latitude or the east and west
for longitude.

3
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

3.4.16.1 Set Drift Correction

The direction and speed of the drift are set.

This function can be used only when MAN or LOG is selected for ship-speed
data.

Procedures
1) Open the Set/Drift Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 6.NAV Equipment Setting

→　 3. Set/Drift Setting

2) Set whether to make corrections or not.

1. Correction

Off ⇔ On

For menu operation, see Section 3.3.3 "Basic Menu Operation".

3) Enter the correction value for tidal current.

2.Set : Direction of tidal current (true bearing)

3.Drift : Speed of tidal current

For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

3 － 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

The own ship's track function saves and displays own ship's track.

If navigation equipment is connected, this radar system records latitude/longitude

data sent from the navigation equipment and displays own ship's track.

NOTE: Even when own ship's track storage interval is turned

Off , own ship's track can be displayed. However, in this
case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display
range is performed for the radar display, own ship's track
display is erased and the track will not be plotted again.

If the own ship track display is turned off when own ship
track is in storage, own ship's tracks are not shown on the
radar display, but own ship's track is still saved.

The own ship's track function is available between latitudes

of 85°N and 85°S.

3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track)

Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Color Track button located at the
lower right of the display.
Own Track Interval
Own Track Interval Unit

Own Track Color

Map On/Off

The color of the own ship's track are switched.

Off → White → Gray → Blue

Red ← Pink ← Yellow ← Green

2) Left-click the Map button located at the lower right of the

display.
The map display function is turned on Map or off Map .

When Color is selected, the own ship's track is displayed.

3 － 40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track
Color)
Own ship's track can be saved in seven different colors.

Own ship's track can be displayed or not displayed individually by color.

Procedures
1) Open the Display Own Track Setting menu by performing the
menu operation 3
Track

→　 1. DISP Own Track Color

The Display Own Track Setting menu will open.

Operations differ according to the following set modes.。

When 1. All is set to On All of own ship's tracks are displayed.

When 1. All is set to Off All of own ship's tracks are not displayed.

When 1. All is set to Individual Settings are made by color by performing the
operation below.

2) Left-click the color button for the desired display setting which is
to be changed.
Display of each item is switched between On and Off

On : Own ship's track plotted by the color is displayed.

Off : Own ship's track plotted by the color is not displayed.

3 － 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory)

To save own ship's track, storage at a specified time interval and at a specified
range interval can be selected.

The track storage interval can be selected from 10 preset time intervals and 8
preset range intervals.

Storage intervals that can be selected

Time: 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min

Range: 0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM, 3 NM, 5 NM, and 10 NM

Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Interval unit button located at the lower
right of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, the units of measure for the storage are switched.

Own Track Interval

Own Track Interval Unit

Own Track Color

Map On/Off

2) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, storage intervals are switched.

When Off is selected, the storage function is turned off.

3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory)

Storage of own ship's track can be turned off.

Cancel
1) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, interval for track storage are switched.

When Off is selected, the storage function is turned off.

3 － 42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track)

This function cancels the storing of own ship's track.

Procedures
1) Open the Clear Own Track Color menu by performing the menu
operation below.

3
Track

→　 2. Clear Own Track Color

The Clear Own Track Color menu will appear.

2) Left-click the button for the color to be deleted.

All : All tracks are deleted

White / Gray / Blue / Red / Pink / Yellow / Green :

Only track of specified color is deleted.

After the item has been selected, Clear Own Track Confirmation Window will appear.

3) Left-click the Yes button.

Own ship's track indicated by the specified color will be deleted.

3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type)

The following expanded track functions can be used for this radar system.

Water temperature track : The water temperature value at the latitude/longitude is

recorded.

Water depth track : The water depth value at the latitude/longitude is recorded.

Tidal current track : The tidal current vector at the latitude/longitude is recorded.

Only one type of expanded own ship's track can be used at a time. Multiple types
of expanded tracks cannot be used at the same time.

Specify the type of the expanded own ship's tracks to be used by performing the
operation below.

3 － 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

Procedures
1) Left-click the Track button located at the lower right of the
display.

Track menu

The Own Track Menu will appear.

2) Left-click the item button of 3. Track Type .

The numeric value of the navigation data can be shown by the color of own ship's track.

Normal : The expanded own ship's track function is not used.

Depth : The color of the tracks is changed according to the water

depth value

Temperature :The color of the tracks is changed according to the water

temperature value.

3) Select the function to be used.

4) Left-click the item button of 4. Num Vector Display

Numeric value or vector of navigation data can be added to own ship's track.

Off : Numeric value and vector are not added.

Depth : Water depth value is added.

Temperature : Water temperature value is added.

Current :current vector is added.

5) Select the function to be used.

NOTE: To use the expanded own ship's track function, the track
must be entered from the special navigation equipment
into this radar system.

3 － 44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track)

Set the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own
ship's track by performing the operation below.

Procedures
1) Open the Water Depth Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
3
→　 6. Water Depth Setting

The Water Depth Setting menu will appear.

Enter a value of the boundary water depth for each item according to the table below to set
up the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship's track.

Water depth Color of track

value

White

1. xxxx m Min

Gray

2. xxxx m

Blue

3. xxxx m

Green

4. xxxx m

Yellow

5. xxxx m

Pink

6. xxxx m Max

Red

For example, if 10m is entered for 1. , 30m is entered for 2. , and 50m is entered for 3. , the
area with a water depth of less than 10 meters is indicated by white tracks, the area with a
water depth of 10 to 30 meters is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a water depth of
30 to 50 meters is indicated by blue tracks.

3 － 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track)

Set the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of
own ship's track by performing the operation below.

Procedures
1) Open the Water TEMP. Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below
Track

→　 7. Water TEMP. Setting

The Water TEMP. Setting menu will appear.

Enter a value of the boundary water temperature for each item according to the table below
to set up the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of own
ship's track.

Water temperature Color of track

value

White

1. xx.x ℃ Min
Gray

2. xx.x ℃
Blue

3. xx.x ℃
Green

4. xx.x ℃
Yellow

5. xx.x ℃
Pink

6. xx.x ℃ Max
Red

For example, if 10.0℃ is entered for 1. , 13.0℃ is entered for 2. , and 15.0℃ is entered for
3. , the area with a water temperature of less than 10.0 ℃ is indicated by white tracks, the
area with a water depth of 10.0 ℃ to 13.0 ℃ is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a
water depth of 13.0 ℃ to 15.0 ℃ is indicated by blue tracks.

3 － 46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK

3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track)

Set the conditions for adding tidal current vectors to own ship's track by
performing the operation below.

Procedures

3
1) Open the Current Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track

→　 8. Current Setting

The Current Setting menu will appear.

Set the tidal current vector display conditions.

[1]Length of the tidal current vector (Current Size)

• Set the length of the tidal current vector.
• The unit of measure is kn/cm.
• If 1.0kn/cm is set, a tidal current of 1.0kn is shown as a one-centimeter line
on the radar display.

[2]Color of the vector for tidal current layer A (Layer A)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer A.
• Choose one of the following colors
White、Gray、Blue、Green、Yellow、Pink、Red

[3]Color of the vector for tidal current layer B (Layer B)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer B.
• Choose one of the following colors
White、Gray、Blue、Green、Yellow、Pink、Red

[4]Color of the vector for tidal current layer C (Layer C)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer C.
• Choose one of the following colors
White、Gray、Blue、Green、Yellow、Pink、Red

3 － 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

Up to 20,000 items of NAV lines, coastlines, depth contours, and NAV marks can
be created, displayed, loaded, and saved. (This function is available only when
navigation equipment is connected to this radar system.)

Marks that can be used : 29 types

Lines that can be used : 3 types (solid, broken, and dashed-dotted line)

Color of mark and lines : 7 colors

that can be used

If radar video is poor visibility caused by user map function,

i press the [DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off.

NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of 85°N and 85°S.

3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line)

In this system, when the radar is in the transmission state, the user map is
displayed all the time. However, valid latitude/longitude data and true bearing
data must be entered into the system.

The user map can be created and edited by performing the following operation.

3.6.1.1 Plotting a mark

Procedures
1) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right
of the display to set the Mark mode.
Mark font / line pattern Mark color / line color
Cursor mode switching switching switching

The mark font to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button.

3 － 48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

2) Left-click the mark font □ button to select a font for the

mark.
The mark fonts are switched.

3) Left-click the C button located to the right of the mark font to

3
select a color for the mark.
The color for the mark font located to the right of the Cursor button will
change.

4) Left-click at a desired location on the radar display.

The specified mark will be displayed in the specified color.

To create another mark, repeat the above procedures.

3.6.1.2 Plotting a line

Procedures
1) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right
of the display to select the line mode.
The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button.

2) Left-click the - - - - - - - button located at the upper right of the

display to select the line pattern.
The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button.

3) Left-click the C button located to the right of the line pattern to

select a color for the line.
The color for the line pattern located to the right of the Cursor button will
change.

4) Left-click at a desired location on the radar display.

Line colors are switched.

3 － 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

5) Move the cursor to a desired location on the radar display and

left-click.
A line is plotted between the previous point and the end point. Repeat this procedure so that
sequential lines can be plotted.

6) When you want to finish plotting the line, left-click at the

previous point.
Line plotting will be terminated. To plot another line, repeat procedures 3.

3.6.1.3 Plotting a mark / line make with latitude and longitude

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

→　 2. Make with L/L

2) Left-click the 9. New Mark Input button.

The Mark Input menu and the Line Input menu are switched.

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Type to select the type of

mark font or line pattern to be created.
The desired mark font or line pattern is selected.

To add a line, select midpoint --O-- .

4) Left-click the item button of 2. Color to select the color of

mark or line to be created.
The desired mark or line color is selected.

3 － 50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

5) Left-click the 3. L/L button to input the latitude /

longitude.
For the input method on the latitude / longitude input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering
latitude/longitude"

6) Left-click the button to input the comment.

3
4. Comment

For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"

The window will not be open when the system is in the transmission state.

7) Left-click the 5. Enter button.

Mark / Line plotting will be terminated.

To create another mark or line, repeat procedures 4 to 7.

3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting)

The user map can be individually displayed (On) or hidden (Off).

Setting by type: Setting can be made by mark font and line pattern.

Setting by color: Setting can be made by color of mark or line.

The mark font display size can be selected.

Normal: The mark is displayed in normal size.

Small: The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual.

3.6.2.1 Setting display by type

Procedures
1) Open the Display Mark Type menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map

→　 5. Mark Display Setting

→　 1. Display Mark Type

3 － 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

The Display Mark Type menu will open.

2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each type of

mark and line.
When 1. All is selected, the setting will reflect to all types of marks and lines.

Off : All types are not displayed.

Individual : All types are displayed.

On : Setting by type is activated.

3.6.2.2 Setting display by color

Procedures
1) Open the Display Mark Color Type menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map

→　 5. Mark Display Setting

→　 2. Display Mark Color

The Display Mark Color Type menu will open.

2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each color type
of mark and line.
When 1. All is selected, the setting will reflect to all color types of marks and
lines.

Off : All color types are not displayed.

Individual : Setting by color type is activated.

On : All color types are displayed.

3.6.2.3 Setting the mark font size

Procedures
1) Open the Mark Size menu by performing the menu operation
below.
U.Map

→　 5. Mark Display Setting

→　 3. Select Mark Size

The Mark Size menu will appear.

3 － 52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

2) Specify the mark font size.

Normal : The mark is displayed in normal size.

Small : The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual.

3.6.2.4 Setting the character size for comments

Procedures
1) Open the Comment Font Size menu by performing the menu
operation below.
3
U.Map

→　 5. Mark Display Setting

→　 4. Comment Font Size

The Comment Font Size menu will appear.

2) Specify the comment font size.

Normal : The characters for comments are displayed in normal size.

Small : The characters for comments are displayed in a size smaller

than usual.

3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map)

3.6.3.1 Manually entering the own ship position (Own Ship Position)
Use this function when editing navigation data for a location different from the own ship
position.

Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship Position menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map

→　 1. Own Ship Position

The number key screen for entering the latitude/longitude of the Own Ship Position will
appear.

3 － 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

2) Use the number buttons 0 to 9 to enter a value of latitude

(xx°xxx.xxx').

3) To make changes between north latitude and south latitude, use

the ＋ and － buttons.

North latitude : Left-click the ＋ button.

South latitude : Left-click the － button.

4) Left-click the ENT button.

The manually entered latitude will be determined. Then, enter the value of longitude.

5) Use the number buttons 0 to 9 to enter a value of longitude

(xx°xxx.xxx').

6) To make changes between east longitude and west longitude,

use the ＋ and － buttons.

East longitude: Left-click the ＋ button.

West longitude: Left-click the － button.

7) Left-click the ENT button.

The manually entered longitude will be determined.

NOTE: The own ship's position manually entered by using the

function above is valid only in the navigation data setting
menu. After exiting from the menu, the manually entered
position data is invalidated.

3.6.3.2 Moving a mark or line (Move)

With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is moved individually.

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

The Edit User Map menu will appear.

2) Left-click the 3. Move button.

3 － 54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

The user map move mode is selected.

Move Map is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.

3) Put the cursor on a mark or line, and left-click.

When a mark or line to be moved is selected, the cursor mark will appear.

4) Move the cursor mark to the destination, and left-click.

The selected mark or line is moved to the destination.
3
To move another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the

0.Exit button.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map move
mode.

(Example)

3 － 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

3.6.3.3 Deleting a mark or line (Delete)

With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is deleted individually.

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

The Edit User Map menu will appear.

2) Left-click the 4. Delete button.

The user map delete mode is selected.
Delete is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.

3) Put the cursor on a mark or line, and left-click.

The entire selected mark or line is deleted.

To delete another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

4) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the

0.Exit button.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.

3 － 56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

3.6.3.4 Inserting a vertex into a line (Insert/Move Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a vertex is inserted into a line.

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

The Edit User Map menu will appear.

3
2) Left-click the 5. Insert/Move Vertex button.
The user map insert/correction mode is selected.
Insert/Move is displayed in the cursor mode located the upper right of the display.

3) Put the cursor to a side line into which a vertex will be inserted,
and left-click.
A vertex is inserted into the selected line, and the cursor mark will be displayed.

4) Move the cursor mark to the newly inserted vertex, and left-
click.
To insert another vertex, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the

0.Exit button.

The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map insertion/
correction mode.

3 － 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

(Example)
The side line into which
a vertex is inserted

Inserted vertex

3.6.3.5 Correcting the mark or vertex of a line (Insert/Move Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is corrected.

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

The Edit User Map menu will appear.

2) Left-click the 5. Insert/Move Vertex button.

The user map insertion/correction mode is selected.
Insert/Move is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.

3) Put the cursor on the mark or vertex of a line, and left-click.

When the mark or vertex of a line to be corrected is selected, the cursor mark will
appear.

4) Move the cursor mark to the destination, and left-click.

The selected mark or vertex of the line is moved to the destination.

To correct another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the

0.Exit button.

3 － 58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map
insertion/correction mode.

(Example)
Original vertex

3
New vertex

3.6.3.6 Deleting a mark or vertex from a line (Delete Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a vertex is deleted individually from a mark or line.

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

The Edit User Map menu will appear.

2) Left-click the 6. Delete Vertex button.

The user map delete mode is selected.
Delete is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the radar display.

3) Put the cursor on the vertex of a mark or line, and left-click.

The selected mark or vertex of the line is deleted.

All of the lines drawn by joining two points are deleted.

To delete another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedure 3.

4) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the

0.Exit button.

3 － 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.

(Example)

The vertex to be deleted

3.6.3.7 Batch clearing marks or lines (Clear)

With regard to the created user map, marks or lines are batch cleared by type or by color.

Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 2. Edit User Map

The Edit User Map menu will appear.

2)-1 Left-click the item button of 7. Delete by Type

Select the type of marks or lines to be deleted.

To select all types, select All .

For example, to delete "red ○ " marks, select ○ .

2)-2 Left-click the item button of 7. Delete

Select the color of marks or lines to be deleted.

To select all colors, select All .

For example, to clear "red ○ " marks, select Red .

After the items have been selected, Confirmation Window will appear.

3 － 60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

3) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The selected mark will be deleted.

NOTE: If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option), the data
is not be reloaded.

3.6.4

3.6.4.1
Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map)

Correcting the display position on the user map (Shift)

3
If the display position on the user map is different from an actual position, it can be changed
to the correct position in manual mode.

Procedures
1) Open the [Shift] menu by performing the menu operation below.
U.Map

　　 →　 3. Shift

Shift is displayed for the Cursor mode, indicating that the user map shift mode is
selected.

2) Put the pointer on a mark or end of a line, coastline, or depth

contour line, and left-click.

3) Move the cross cursor mark to the location to be corrected, and

left-click.
Positions of all marks and lines currently displayed will be corrected.

At this time, Map Shift is displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the
display), indicating that the position is being corrected.

Map Shift : Heading correction is conducted

Map Shift : Heading correction is not conducted

3 － 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

3.6.4.2 Restoring the corrected user map to its original state (Shift Clear)

Procedures
1) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following
menu operation.
U.Map

→　 4. Shift Clear

Only the most recently corrected data (for a single input) will be cleared, and the data will be
displayed at its original position.

At this time, Map Shift is not displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the
display).

Map Shift : Heading correction is conducted

Map Shift : Heading correction is not conducted

3.6.5 Save User Map

3.6.5.1 Loading navigation data (Load User Map)

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.
U.Map

→　 7. File Operation

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.

4) Left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode and select

Add / Overwrite .
Add and Overwrite of the Load Mode items are switched.

When [Add] is selected, new data is added to the savedd data. When [Overwrite] is selected,
the saved data is overwritten.

3 － 62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

5) Left-click the 3. Load button.

The list of navigation data saved in the system will be displayed.

6) Left-click the button for the file to be loaded.

Confirmation Window will appear.

7) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The selected navigation data will be loaded and displayed on the radar display.
3
3.6.5.2 Discarding navigation data (Unload User Map)

Procedures
1) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following
menu operation.
U.Map

→　 7. File Operation

2) Left-click the 4. Unload button.

Unload Confirmation Window will appear.

3) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The saved navigation data will be discarded.

3.6.5.3 Storing navigation data (Save User Map)

Navigation data can be saved when navigation equipment is connected, or the own ship
position on the user map is entered in the manual mode.

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

3 － 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.
U.Map

→　 7. File Operation

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.

4) Left-click the 5. Save button.

The Input File Name screen will appear.

5) Enter the file name to be saved.

Up to 10 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".

After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.

6) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

Navigation data currently being displayed is saved.

3.6.5.4 Clearing the saved navigation data (Erase User Map)

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.。
U.Map

→　 7. File Operation

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.

3 － 64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

4) Left-click the 6. Erase button.

The Erace screen will appear.

The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed.

5) Click numeric buttons corresponding to the number for the file to

be deleted.
Confirmation Window will appear.

6) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The selected navigation data is deleted and the name of the file is deleted from the list.
3
3.6.5.5 Displaying saved navigation data (Card Mark Display)

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.
U.Map

→　 7. File Operation

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.

4) Left-click the 7. Card Mark Display button.

The Card Mark Display screen will appear.

The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed.

5) Left-click the button corresponding to the number for the file to

be displayed.
Confirmation Window will appear.

6) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The selected navigation data will be displayed.

3 － 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic)

To create navigation information, set the geodetic system that is used with the
connected navigation equipment. When navigation information is loaded, the
geodetic system used when the navigation information was saved, is displayed.
Make sure that the displayed geodetic system is identical to the one used with the
navigation equipment. If the two geodetic systems are different, the positions of
navigation information on the radar display will be shifted. Therefore, it is
important to set the geodetic system of the navigation equipment.

[1] Setting the geodetic system for navigation data to be saved (Geodetic)

Procedures
1) Open the Geodetic menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map

→　 6. Geodetic

The numeric value input screen for Geodetic will appear.

2) Enter the desired geodetic system number.

The geodetic system is determined.

For how to input numeric datas on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

[2] Displaying the geodetic system of the navigation data being displayed (Geodetic)

Procedures
1) Load navigation data by referring to Section 3.6.5.1 "Loading
navigation data (Load User Map)".

2) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.
U.Map

The geodetic system will be displayed in the 6. Geodetic field.

3 － 66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP

Table3-1： Geodetic System List

# NAME
0 WGS-84
1 WGS-72
2 Japan
3 North American 1927(U.S)
4 North American 1927(Canada & Alaska)
5 European 1950 (Europe)
6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)
7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)

3
8 NAD-83
9 - (No Use)
10 - (No Use)
11 ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)
12 ARC 1950 (Botswana)
13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)
14 BERMUDA 1957 (Bermuda islands)
15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Colombia)
16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine)
17 CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Islands)
18 CHUA ASTRO (Paraguay)
19 CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil)
20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA) (Sumatra)
21 EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe)
22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand)
23 GUAM 1963 (Guam)
24 HAYFORD 1910 (Finland)
25 HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland)
26 INDIAN (India & Nepal)
27 IRELAND1965 (Ireland)
28 KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)
29 L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Brac Island)
30 LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia)
31 LUZON (Philippines)
32 MERCHICH (Morocco)
33 MINNA (Nigeria)
34 NAHRWAN (Oman)
35 NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad & Tobago)
36 OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt)
37 OLD HAWAIIAN (Hawaii)
38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES (Canary Islands)
39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America)
40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile)
41 PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands)
42 QORNOQ (South Greenland)
43 RT90 (Sweden)
44 SANTA BRAZ (San Miguel island & Santa Maria islands)
45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America)
46 SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial & Sao Jorge & Pico & Graciosa & Terceira island)
47 TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei & East Malaysia)
48 - (No Use)
49 - (No Use)

3 － 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

In this radar system, a destination mark set by navigation equipment can be

displayed, and a simple route can be created, displayed, loaded and saved. (To use
this function, navigation equipment must be connected to this system)
If radar video is poor visibility caused by route function, click the
i Map button to turn off the Map function. Otherwise, press the
[DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off.

NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of 85°N and 85°S.

3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)

In this radar system, the following route and destination marks can be displayed.

Route : Route created in the radar system, ECDIS and GPS are displayed.

Destination mark : Destination marks sent from outside navigation equipment are
displayed.

Procedures
1) Left-click the Route button located at the lower right of the
radar display.
The Route Menu will appear.

2) Set the 1. Select Route item.

The following route/destination mark display modes can be selected.

Off : Route and destination marks are not displayed.

Internal : Route saved in the system are displayed.

NMEA : Destination marks are displayed by using WPT data

sent from outside navigation equipment.i

ECDIS /GPS : Route created in the ECDIS and GPS are displayed.ii

i. To display the ○WP mark on the radar display, NMEA select. The
destination mark is displayed only when the Waypoint data is received from
outside by using the NMEA sentence (RMB,BWC,BWR).
ii. When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS, following items
are not displayed.
• XTL
• Arrival Radius
• ROT
• Turn Radius
• Time Zone
• Sail

3 － 68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.1.1 Displaying route created by the radar system (Internal)

In this radar system, route created by the radar system are displayed as shown below.
Planned Course

001 Route alarm line 074T 004

Waypoint
070T 12.5kn
Waypoint bearing vector 003 OPQRS
000 2.50kn
ABCDE 135T Comments
062T
5.00kn
10.0kn Waypoint number
Planned Speed
Route

Route alarm line

To Waypoint
002 FGJK
Waypoint alarm circle
3
The following rout data is displayed.

Waypoint : Up to 512 points (number: 000 to 511), comments can be entered.

To Waypoint : Next Waypoint is displayed in a light blue circle.

Route : A route line that connects Waypoints.

Planned Courese : Scheduled route between Waypoints (automatically calculated).

Planned Speed : Scheduled sailing speed between Waypoints (entered by user).

Waypoint alarm circle : The circle that shows the distance to judge arrival in Waypoint.

Route alarm line : The line that shows the distance width to judge route alarm.

Waypoint bearing vector : A vector line that shows next destination from own ship's CCRP.

3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence)

In this radar system, it is possible to easily create and correct route by performing
operation on the radar display.

3.7.2.1 Initializing route data (New Monitor Route)

Route data saved in the radar system is initialized.

Once route data is initialized, route data saved in the

NOTE: radar system's storage section is deleted. If there is
necessary route data, save the route data on the flash
memory card before initializing it.

3 － 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 3. Set Route Sequence

2) Left-click the 7. New Monitor Route button.

Confirmation Window will appear.

3) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The saved route data will be deleted.

3.7.2.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add Waypoint)

New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system.

Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 3. Set Route Sequence

2) Left-click the 2. Add button.

The Waypoint adding mode is selected.

The rubber band from the last Waypoint to the cursor position will be displayed on the radar
display.

3) Left-click the location at which you want to add a Waypoint.

A Waypoint will be added.

When a Waypoint is added, the value of the Planned Speed in the section up to the menu is
used for the Planned Speed value up to the added Waypoint.

3 － 70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

4) To add another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3.

5) To finish adding a Waypoint, left-click twice at the last Waypoint.

The Waypoint adding mode is cancelled.

(Example)

3
023

062T
12.0kn

Rubber band
024
Last Waypoint

3.7.2.3 Correcting coordinates of a Waypoint (Correct Position)

The coordinates of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected.

Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 3. Set Route Sequence

2) Left-click the 3. Correct Position button.

The Waypoint correcting mode is selected.

3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the Waypoint that is to

have its coordinates corrected, and left-click.
The Waypoint to be corrected is specified.

The cursor display becomes a cursor mark, and a rubber band is displayed.

3 － 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

4) Move the cursor to new coordinates, and left-click.

The coordinates of the Waypoint are corrected, and then the Waypoint correcting mode is
cancelled.

(Example)

025 025
108T 108T
064T 064T
8.00kn 8.00kn
12.0kn 026 12.0kn 026
024 024 Rubber band

Waypoint that is to have its

position corrected
Cross cursor mark

025 Planned Course

108T
064T
8.00kn
12.0kn 026 026
024 024 060T
106T
12.0kn 8.00kn
025
Click at this position

3.7.2.4 Correcting Planned Speed (Correct Planned Speed)

Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system is corrected.

Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 3. Set Route Sequence

2) Left-click the 4. Correct Planned Speed button.

The Planned Speed correcting mode is selected.

3) Left-click the 1. Planned Speed button.

The Planned Speed input screen will appear.

Enter a numeric value of new Planned Speed.

3 － 72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the line extending

between Waypoints that is to have its Planned Speed corrected.
The section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected is specified, and the new Planned
Speed is applied to the section.

5) To correct the Planned Speed of another section, repeat

procedures 3 and 4.

6) To finish correcting Planned Speed, left-click the

3
4. Correct Planned Speed button.
The Planned Speed correcting mode will be cancelled.

(Example)
Planned speed: 10.00kn

000 002 004

113T 064T 113T 064T
113T
8.00kn 9.00kn 10.0kn 11.0kn 12.0kn
001 003 005

Section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected

3.7.2.5 Deleting a Waypoint (Delete Waypoint)

The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system is deleted.

Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 3. Set Route Sequence

2) Left-click the 5. Delete button.

The Waypoint deleting mode is selected.

3 － 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3) On the radar display, put the cursor on a Waypoint to be deleted,

and left-click.
The specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then
connected by a line.

4) To delete another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3.

5) To finish deleting a Waypoint, left-click the 5. Delete

button.
The Waypoint deleting mode will be cancelled.

(Example)
Waypoint to be deleted

000 002 004

113T 064T 113T 064T
113T
8.00kn 9.00kn 10.0kn 11.0kn
12.0kn
001 003 005

Left-click Planned speed

000 003
113T 064T
113T
8.00kn 11.0kn
090T 12.0kn
001 002 004
10.0kn

Calculated again Waypoints are re-numbered.

3.7.2.6 Inserting a Waypoint (Insert Waypoint)

A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system.

Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 3. Set Route Sequence

3 － 74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

2) Left-click the 6. Insert button.

The Waypoint inserting mode is selected.

3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the section line into
which a Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The section is specified, the cursor becomes a cross cursor mark, and the cross cursor mark is
connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a rubber band. 3
4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the location at which a
Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The coordinates of the new Waypoint are specified, and the new Waypoint is connected to
the previous and following Waypoints by a line.

5) To insert another Waypoint, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

6) To finish inserting a Waypoint, left-click the 6. Insert

button.
The Waypoint inserting mode will be cancelled.

(Example)
Rubber band

090T 090T
001 001
10.0kn 10.0kn

Waypoint is inserted into this section. Waypoint is inserted into this section.

3 － 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint

Input)
In this radar system, it is possible to create and correct route by performing
operation on the Waipoint Input menu.
Waypoint
Waypoint Number Waypoint Scroll Latitude/Longitude Planned Speed Waypoint Comment

Waypoint Scroll Exit Waypoint Waypoint Waypoint Input Character

Insert Addition Delete

3.7.3.1 Open the Waipoint Input Menu

Procedures
1) Open the Waypoint Input menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 6. Waypoint Input

When transmitting, it can not be open.

3 － 76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.3.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add)

New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system.

Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.

2) Left-click the ADD button.

3)
The new latitude of waypoint is reversed.

Enter a latitude / longitude and a planned speed.

3
A Waypoint will be added.

For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude" and Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".

3.7.3.3 Adding a Comment (Comment)

New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system.

Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.

2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button.

Left-click to show the desired comment.

3) Left-click the Comment button to be added.

The comment of waypoint is reversed.

4) Enter a comment.
A comment will be added.

For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a
character".

3 － 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.3.4 Correcting latitude / longitude of a Waypoint (LAT/LON)

The latitude / longitude of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are
corrected.

Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.

2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button.

Left-click to show the desired latitude / longitude.

3) Left-click the Latitude / Longitude button to be corrected.

The latitude of waypoint is reversed.

4) Enter a latitude / longitude.

A Waypoint will be corrected.

For the input method on the latitude / longitude input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering
latitude/longitude".

3.7.3.5 Correcting Planned Speed (Planned Speed)

Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system is corrected.

Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.

2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button.

Left-click to show the desired planned speed.

3) Left-click the Planned Speed button to be corrected.

The planned speed of waypoint is reversed.

4) Enter a planned speed.

A Planned Speed will be corrected.

For the input method on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on
Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

3 － 78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.3.6 Deleting a Waypoint (DEL)

The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system is deleted.

Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.

2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button.

3)
Left-click to show the desired waypoint.

Left-click the DEL button to be corrected.

3
Confirmation Window will appear.

4) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then
connected by a line.

3.7.3.7 Inserting a Waypoint (INS)

A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system.

Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.

2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button.

Left-click to show the desired waypoint.

3) Left-click the INS button to be corrected.

The new latitude of waypoint is reversed.

4) Enter a latitude / longitude and a planned speed.

A Waypoint will be inserted.

For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

3 － 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm)

This radar system can monitor the movement of own ship with regard to its route
and activate a variety of alarms.

Destination alarm When own ship arrives at next Waypoint, an alarm will
(Waypoint Alarm): be activated.

Route alarm: When own ship deviates from the specified route, an
alarm will be activated.

3.7.4.1 Destination alarm (Waypoint Alarm)

The destination alarm is activated when own ship has reached next Waypoint or own ship
has deviated from the scheduled route.

A Waypoint alarm circle with a specified radius distance is displayed.

Waypoint alarm circle

Own ship position

To Waypoint

Waypoint Alarm has the following two types of alarms:

Arrival: An alarm is activated when own ship has entered the circle from outside.

Break Off: An alarm is activated when own ship has left the circle to the outside.

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

2) Left-click the set value of the

1. Waypoint Alarm
1. Waypoint Alarm item, and select
Arrival 0.00nm
an operation mode.
Radius of the
Operation mode
Waypoint alarm
circle

3 － 80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

Arrival / Break Off : Set the operation mode.

0.00nm : Set the radius of the Waypoint alarm circle. If

0.00nm is set, alarm operation will be turned off.

3.7.4.2 Route Alarm

The route alarm is activated when own ship deviates from the specified width of the route.

The route alarm lines are displayed with a specified width provided.
Route alarm line
3
Break Off alarm is activated
when own ship is outside the
specified range.
To Waypoint

Own ship Route alarm line

position

Route Alarm has the following two types of operations:

Approach： An alarm is activated when own ship enters the route range from
outside.

XTE(Cross An alarm is activated when own ship leaves the route range.
Track Error)：

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

2) Left-click the set value of the

2. Route Alarm
2. Route Alarm item, and select an
Approach 0.00nm
operation mode.
Width of the route
Operation mode
(one side)

Approach / XTE : Set the operation mode.

0.00nm : Set the width of the route (one side). If
0.00nm is set, an alarm operation will be
turned off.

3 － 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.5 Method of Using Route

The method of using the route will be described.

Displaying the route The internal route is displayed according to the procedures in
(Route Alarm Color): Section 3.7.1 "Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)".

Selecting the forward or Whether to use Waypoints forward or backward is selected.

backward of the route
(Route Sequence):

Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after next Waypoint is set as the next
(Waypoint Skip): Waypoint.

Skipping back of the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
(Waypoint Back Skip):

3.7.5.1 Selecting the forward or backward of the route (Route Sequence)

Select whether Waypoints in route data are used in the forward direction or
backward direction.
007
: Forward
006
: Backward

000

005
003
001
002 004

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 3. WPT/Route Operations

２　Left-click the set value of the 1. Route Sequence item, and select an
operation mode.

Forward :Waypoints are used in the forward direction (ascending order).

Reverse :Waypoints are used in the reverse direction (descending order).

3 － 82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.5.2 Skipping/Back-skipping of the route (Waypoint Skip/ Waypoint Back

Skip)
Next Waypoint of the route can be changed by user manually.
007

006
: Forward

000 ：Backward

ki p W ay
ac k S poin
oint B t Ski
p
Wayp 005
003

3
001
002 k ip
Wayp
o in t Ba c
004
nt S k S kip
y poi
Wa

Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the
(Waypoint Skip): next Waypoint.

Skipping back the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
(Waypoint Back Skip):

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 3. WPT/Route Operations

2) To execute Waypoint Skip, left-click the 3. Waypoint Skip

button.
The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.

3) To execute Waypoint Back Skip, left-click the

4. Waypoint Back Skip Skip button.
The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.

3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings

Make detailed settings of the route.

Color for the route alarm line Set the display color for the route alarm line.
(SEL NUM/Comment Size)

3 － 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

Display character size :Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on
(SEL NUM/Comment Size) the radar display.

Waypoint bearing vector :Set the method to display line between next Waypoint and own
(Waypoint Vector) ship.

Display of bearing distance to the :Select the start point to be used for the bearing/distance display in
destination(Status of Origin/DEST) the Waypoint data display area.

ON/OFF of Waypoint number display :Set whether or not to display Waypoint number next to the
(WPT Number Display) Waypoint mark.

Waypoint update :Set how to update Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been
(Waypoint Switch Mode) reached.

3.7.6.1 Color for the route alarm line (Cross-Track Limit Line)
Route alarm lines are displayed on both sides of the center line of the route.

For this item, set which color is used to display each line.
Route alarm line Route alarm line

Traveling direction Traveling direction

Route Alarm Color: Area A Route Alarm Color: Area B

Area A (IALA-A)： The port-side is red and the bow-side is green

along the traveling direction.

Area B (IALA-B)： The port-side is green and the bow-side is red

along the traveling direction.

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

2) Left-click the set value of the 8. Off-Track Limit Line item, and
select an operation mode.

IALA-A : Area A

IALA-B : Area B

3 － 84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.6.2 Display character size (SEL NUM/Comment Size)

Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on the radar display.

Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

3
→　 9. Next

2) Left-click the set value of the 1. SEL NUM/Comment Size item, and
select an operation mode.

Normal :Numbers and characters are displayed in normal size.

Small :Numbers and characters are displayed in a size smaller than

usual.

3.7.6.3 Waypoint bearing vector (Waypoint Vector)

Set how to display a line between next Waypoint and own ship.

Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 9. Next

2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Waypoint Vector item, and select
an operation mode.

Off : The Waypoint bearing vector is not displayed.

From Origin : A line is displayed from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint.
Waypoint bearing vector

To Waypoint

From CURR : A line is displayed from own ship to next Waypoint.

Waypoint bearing vector

To Waypoint

3 － 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.6.4 Displaying bearing distance to the Waypoint (Status of Origin/DEST)

Select a start point used to display bearing/distance in the Waypoint data display area.

Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 9. Next

2) Left-click the set value of the 3. Status of Origin/DEST item, and

select an operation mode.

From CURR POSN :The bearing distance from the own ship position
to next Waypoint is displayed.

Fix :The bearing distance from the previous Waypoint

to next Waypoint is displayed.

3.7.6.5 ON/OFF of Waypoint number display (WPT Number Display)

Set whether to display a Waypoint number next to the Waypoint mark.

Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 9. Next

2) Left-click the set value of the 4. WPT Number Display item, and
select an operation mode.

Off : The Waypoint number is not displayed.

On : The Waypoint number is displayed.

3 － 86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.6.6 Route Information Display

Display the planned couse and the planned speed onto the route.

Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route

→　

→　
2. WPT/Route Setting

9. Next
3
Left-click the set value of the 6. Route Information Display item, and
select an operation mode.

Off : The Planned Course and the Planned Speed are

not displayed.

On : The Planned Course and the Planned Speed are

displayed.

3.7.6.7 Map Draw AZI Mode

Set the azimuth direction of the route and user map.

Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route

→　 2. WPT/Route Setting

→　 9. Next

Left-click the set value of the 7. Map Draw AZI Mode item, and select
an operation mode.

N Up : The azimuth direction is set North Up mode.

C Up : The azimuth direction is set Couse Up mode.

3.7.6.8 Updating Waypoint data (Waypoint Switch Mode)

Set how to update the Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been reached.

3 － 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

　　 →　 3. WPT/Route Operations

2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Waypoint Switch Mode item, and
select an operation mode.

Manual : When next Waypoint has been reached, user updates the
following Waypoint.

AUTO : When next Waypoint has been reached, the following

Waypoint is automatically updated.

3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data)

This function clears waypoint/route data from memory.

Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route

→　 3. WPT/Route Operations

2) Left-click the 6. Clear WPT/Route Data button.

Confirmation Window will appear.

3) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

A route data will be cleared.

If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option),

NOTE: the data is not be reloaded.

3 － 88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3.7.8 Operate Route Data File

Route data saved in the radar system can be saved onto a flash memory card, and
data can be loaded from a flash memory card into the radar system.

With regard to this item, only route data can be saved and loaded. To save or load
own ship's track, target track data, and mark/line data, see Section 3.11 "USING
CARD".
Selecting a card slot Specify the card slot to be used for operating a
(Select Card Slot): route data file.
Saving route data (Save): Route data saved in the radar system is saved
3
onto a flash memory card.
Loading route data (Load): Route data saved on a flash memory card is
loaded into the radar system.
Erasing route data file A route data file saved in a flash memory card
(Erase): is erased.

3.7.8.1 Selecting a card slot (Select Card Slot)

Specify the card slot to be used for accessing a route data file

Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu

operation below.
Route

→　 4. File Operation

3) Left-click the set value of the 1. Select Card Slot item, and
select a card slot.
Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.

3.7.8.2 Saving route data (Save)

Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card.

Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

3 － 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu

operation below.
Route

→　 4. File Operation

3) Left-click the 3. Save button.

The file name input screen will appear.

For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a
character".

4) After having entered a file name, left-click the ENT button.

The entry of the file name will be finished.

Confirmation Window will appear.

5) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The route data will be saved with the specified file name.

3.7.8.3 Loading route data (Load)

Route data is loaded into the radar system from a flash memory card.

Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

Once route data has been loaded into the radar system from a
NOTE: flash memory card, the route data that has been saved in the
radar system is overwritten and erased. Route data that has
been erased cannot be resaved. Note that important route data
should be saved in a flash memory card.

3 － 90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu

operation below.
Route

→　 4. File Operation

3
3) Left-click the 2. Load button.
Contents of the specified memory card (file list) will be displayed.

4) Left-click the button for the desired file name.

Confirmation Window will appear.

5) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The route data with the specified file name will be loaded.

3.7.8.4 Erasing route data (Erase)

An unnecessary route data file saved on a flash memory card is erased.

Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

Once route data files that have been saved on a flash

NOTE: memory card is erased, the erased data cannot be
resaved. Note that important files should not be erased.

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu

operation below.
Route

→　 4. File Operation

3 － 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION

3) Left-click the 4. Erase button.

Contents of the specified memory card (file list) will be displayed.

4) Left-click the button for the desired file name.

Confirmation Window will appear.

5) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

A route data file with the specified file name will be erased.

3 － 92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about radar signal
processing.

Procedures
3
1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 3. RADAR Menu

→　 1. Process Setting

The Process Setting menu will appear.

Detail information about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings of the
menu items.

After the settings for radar signal processing are

NOTE: changed, small targets may not be displayed or
unwanted waves may not be suppressed. Thus, do not
make a significant change in the settings.

3.8.1.1 Video Latitude

• Select the dynamic range in which receiving signals are to be shown on the
radar display.
• Select Normal in standard, and Wide in rainy weather.
• Narrow clearly displays short-range videos when STC is used in manual
mode.

Narrow : Narrows the dynamic range at short range.

Normal : Standard setting
The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range:
Short distance: wide Long distance: narrow
Wide : Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted
waves.The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when
Normal is selected.
Super Wide : Use this mode when rain cloud remain at Wide mode.

3 － 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.1.2 Video Noise Rejection

• This function rejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos.
• Select Off to display radar videos like analog signals.
• Select Level1 or Level2 to suppress noise and clutter.

Off ： Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all
signals. Targets are popped up from noise and displayed
like analog signals.

Level1 ： Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and

clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not
definite, the signals are displayed.

Level2 ： Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and

clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not
definite, the signals are rejected. Only when detection of
targets is definite, the signals are displayed.

3.8.1.3 Auto Dynamic Range

• When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and the automatic rain/snow
clutter suppression mode are in use, the dynamic range is automatically
controlled.
• When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is in use, this function
improves gain by widening the dynamic range of only areas where sea clutter
is strong and narrowing the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter is not
detected.
• When the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use, this function
improves gain by widening the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter and
rain/snow clutter are strong and narrowing the dynamic range of the other
areas.
• Land videos become obscure when the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression
mode is in use.

Off ： Does not control the dynamic range automatically.

(Standard setting) The dynamic range is set in the same
manner as when the manual sea clutter suppression mode
or the manual rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use.

On ： Automatically controls the dynamic range.

3 － 94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.1.4 Process Switch

• This function sets a specific area and switches the video process mode between
the inside and outside of the area.
• In Section 3.8.1.5 "2nd Process Mode" 2nd Process Mode, set the second video
process mode for the area outside the boundary.
• In [2] PROCESS of Main Menu , set the first video process mode for the area
inside the boundary.
• Gain at a distance can be improved by suppressing near sea clutter through the
correlative process.
• There are two methods for setting an area:

Off ： Disables the Process Switching function. (Standard

3
setting)

Range Fix ： Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center. Set
the boundary range in Section 3.8.1.6 "Process Switch
Range". The specific area turns out to be a circle with the
own ship’s position as the center.

AUTO ： Automatically sets a specific area. The area subject to

many clutter returns is inside the boundary, and the area
less subject to clutter returns is outside the boundary.

3.8.1.5 2nd Process Mode

• Set the second video process mode for the outside of a specific area.
• This function is enabled when Range Fix or AUTO is selected in Section
3.8.1.4 "Process Switch".

Video process modes

PROC Off : Select this mode in general.

3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.

4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.

5Scan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.

Remain : Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.

Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.

3.8.1.6 Process Switch Range

• Set the boundary range of a specific area.
• This function is enabled when Range Fix is selected in Section 3.8.1.4
"Process Switch".
• The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship’s position as the
center.
• The boundary range can be set in units of 0.1 nm, ranging 0.1 to 25.5 nm.

3 － 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.1.7 Fast Target Detection

• This function displays fast moving targets that are suppressed in scan-
correlative process mode.
• This function is enabled when 3Scan CORREL , 4Scan CORREL , or
5Scan CORREL is selected as the video process mode.
• If unwanted waves remain on the radar display, suppress them by using the
[SEA], [RAIN], or [GAIN] dial, or adjusting the interference rejection mode.

Off : Disables the Fast Target Detection function.

On : Enables the Fast Target Detection function.

3 － 96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trails
processing.

Procedures

3
1) Open the RADAR Trails Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 3. RADAR Menu

→　 2. RADAR Trails Setting

The RADAR Trails Setting menu will appear.

Detail data about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of each menu
item.

After the settings for radar trails processing are changed,

NOTE: targets’trails may not be displayed or trails may be plotted with
unwanted waves. Thus, do not make a significant change in the
settings.

3.8.2.1 Trails Mode

• Set the radar trail display mode.
• For details on the trail mode, see Section 3.4.8 "Display Radar Trails (Trails)"

3.8.2.2 Trails Reference Level

• Select a radar video level required for plotting radar trails.
• The radar video threshold level increases in order of Level1 → Level2
→ Level3 → Level4 .
• To plot radar trails with unwanted waves, change to a higher level.
• To thin radar trails, change to a higher level.
• If radar trails are plotted in snatches, change to a lower level.

3 － 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.2.3 Trails Reduction

• Make a setting for thinning radar trails.
• The effect of thinning increases in order of Level1 → Level2 →
Level3 .
• Radar videos do not become obscure because of the thinning of radar trails.

Off : Disables the Trails Reduction function.

Level1 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Low)

Level2 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Modest)

Level3 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: High)

3.8.2.4 Trails Process

• Determine whether to use the video process with radar signals for plotting
radar trails.
• When Trails Process is On , radar trails are never plotted with unwanted
waves, but the radar trails of moving targets may not be plotted.
• When Trails Process is Off , radar trails may be plotted with unwanted
waves, but the radar trails of moving targets are always plotted.

Off : Disables the Trails Process function.

On : Enables the Trails Process function.

3.8.2.5 MAX Interval

• Select the maximum time for displaying radar trails.
• Select Short when short radar trails are often used in bays and the likes.
• Select Long when long radar trails are necessary for ocean navigation.

Short : Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.

Middle : Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.

Long : Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.

3 － 98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about an antenna.

Procedures
1) Open the TXRX Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.

3
Main

→　 3. RADAR Menu

→　 3. TXRX Setting

The TXRX Setting menu will appear.

Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu
items.

3.8.3.1 PRF Fine Tuning

• Fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter in the range
90 to 100%.
• If radar’s interference patterns are concentrically displayed, increment or
decrement the set value by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference
rejection.
• One of 32 levels 0-31 can be set.

3.8.3.2 PRF
• Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the
transmitter.

Normal :Standard mode Appropriategain expectancy is maintained.

High Power :High gain mode Gain improves when“SP1/MP1/MP2”pulses
are used.

When "High　Power" is selected, the target acquisition

NOTE: and tracking function becomes 24nm or less from 32nm
or less.

3.8.3.3 Ice Class Standby Mode

• In this mode, the antenna is rotated when transmission is in the standby state.
• This mode is effective to prevent the antenna's rotating shaft from freezing.

Off :The ice class standby mode is not used. When transmission is
in the standby state, the antenna also stops rotating.
On :The ice class standby mode is used. When transmission is in
the standby state, the antenna rotates.

3 － 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and
display.

Procedures
1) Open the Cursor Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　 9. EBL/Cursor Setting

→ 3. Cursor Setting

The Cursor Setting menu will appear.

Detail information about cursor operation and display can be set by changing the settings of
the menu items.

3.8.4.1 EBL/VRM Control Cursor

• The EBL/VRM Control Cursor is switched between Valid and Invalid.
• The trackball is provided as a standard device. If the trackball malfunctions, the
cursor can be moved by using the [EBL] dial and [VRM] dial.
• The cursor moves horizontally when [EBL] is operated, and moves vertically
when [VRM] is operated.
• To switch between EBL/VRM operation and cursor operation while ON is
selected, hold down the [EBL] dial for 2 seconds.

On : Cursor is operated using a [EBL] [VRM] dial.

Off : Cursor is operated using a trackball.

3.8.4.2 Cursor Length

• Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar display.

Short Cuts the cross cursor mark in length.

Long : Makes the cross cursor mark twice as long as when

Short is selected.

3 －100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.4.3 Cursor Pattern

• The type of the cross cursor mark displayed of the display is selected.

: Type 1 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display.

: Type 2 is selected for the cross cursor mark 2 displayed in the radar display.

: Type 3 is selected for the cross cursor mark 3 displayed in the radar display.

: Type 4 is selected for the cross cursor mark 4 displayed in the radar display.

3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) 3

This system can save combinations of display color and brilliance in accordance
with ambient lighting conditions and the radar display can be easily switched.

Follow the procedures below to set display color and brilliance to be saved before
hand.

3.8.5.1 Setting display color (Display Color Setting)

Procedures
1) Open the Color Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　 1. Display Color Setting

Display Color Setting menu will appear.

3.8.5.2 Day/Night
• Specify the mode to be changed.
• The following modes are available:

Day1 : Day mode 1 : Used under bright lighting conditions.

Day2 : Day mode 2 : Used under bright lighting conditions.

Day3 : Day mode 3 : Used under bright lighting conditions.

Dusk : Dusk mode : Used under dim lighting conditions.

3 －101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

Night : Night mode : Used under dark lighting conditions.

Setting color of each element

• Specify the color for the element.

• The color for the following elements can be specified.

Outer PPI : The color of the background outside radar video PPI is
selected.
Inner PPI : The color of the background inside radar video PPI is
selected.
Character : The color of the character and bearing scale is selected.
RADAR Video : The color of the radar video is selected.
RADAR Trails(Time) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
RADAR Trails(All) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
Target Symbol : The color of the target symbol is selected.
Cursor : The color of the cursor is selected.
Range Rings : The color of the range rings is selected.
EBL/VRM/PI : The color of the EBL / VRM / PI is selected.

Own Symbol /HL/Vector : The color of the own ship symbol, heading line, own
ship vector is selected.

Those selected color can be saved for each Day/Night mode.

i

3.8.5.3 Setting display brilliance (Brilliance Setting)

For each Day/Night mode, background color outside the bearing scale,
background color inside the bearing scale, and color for characters, radar echo and
radar trails can be selected.

Procedures
1) Open the Brilliance Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　 2. Brilliance Setting

3 －102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

Display Brilliance Setting menu will appear.

Setting brilliance of each element

• Specify the brilliance for the element.

• Level4 indicates maximum brilliance and Level1 indicates minimum brilliance.
• The brilliance for the following elements can be specified.

RADAR Video : The brilliance of the radar video is selected.

RADAR Trails

Target Symbol
: The brilliance of the radar trails is selected.

: The brilliance of the target symbol is selected.i

3
Range Rings : The brilliance of the range rings is selected.
EBL/VRM/PI : The brilliance of the EBL / VRM / PI is selected.
Character : The brilliance of the character and bearing scale is
selected.
Own Symbol /HL/Vector : The brilliance of the own ship symbol, heading line, and
own ship vector is selected.
Keyboard : The brilliance of the operation panel is selected.i

i. Minimum level is Level0.(it means OFF)

Those selected brilliance can be saved for each Day/Night mode.

i

3.8.5.4 Setting radar video brilliance (VID)

The brilliance of the video on the radar display is adjusted.

Procedures VID
○
1) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the radar video so as to
get the best view of the video display.
The brilliance of the radar video can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
Brilliance Setting menu.

Adjust the radar display to obtain the best-to-view video.

3.8.5.5 Setting target symbol brilliance (TT)

The brilliance of the target symbol on the radar display is adjusted.

Procedures TT
○
1) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the target symbol so as
to get the best view of the video display.

3 －103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

The brilliance of the target symbol can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
Brilliance Setting menu.

Adjust the radar display to obtain the best-to-view video.

3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)

When an alarm is activated, the operation panel issues an alarm audible to inform
user of the change of the condition.

The alarm sound can be adjusted by performing the following procedures.

Procedures
1) Open the Buzzer Volume menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　5. Buzzer Volume

Display Buzzer Volume menu will appear.

The volume of the alarm sound can be specified for each cause for alarm.
Level4 indicates maximum volume and Off indicates minimum volume.

Key ACK : The operation key acknowledgement is set.

OPE Miss : The incorrect operation alarm is set.

CPA/TCPA Alarm : The dangerous ship alarm is set.

New Target Alarm : The automatic acquisition target alarm is set.

Lost Alarm : The target lost alarm is set.

Navigation Alarm : The navigation data abnormality alarm is set.

System Alarm : The system abnormality alarm is set.

Inter Switch : The inter switch switching alarm is set.

3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2]

Users can freely make settings with [OPTION 1] key and [OPTION 2] key.

By using the keys, users can open a frequently used menu by only single
operation, or assign special functions, to the user key switches.

3 －104
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

3.8.7.1 Initial Setting (Option Key Setting)

Set functions that can be performed with the option key switches.

Procedures
1) Open the Option Key Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu 3
→　 4. Option Key Setting

The Option Key Setting menu will appear.

This system provides two user keys: [OPTION 1] and [OPTION 2]. Different functions can
be allocated to each key.

Functions that can be allocated to each key are as follows:

Menu : A specific menu is directly displayed.

Zoom : The zoom display function is switched between on and off.

DEST : Set/Cancel Waypoint menu key

->○ : Start-point, Pass-point key in simple route operating

○-> : End-point key in simple route operating

Capture Screen : Screen capture key (This function is enabled only when the
card (optional) is connected.)

3.8.7.2 Using Option Keys (Directly displaying a specified Menu )

Preset the Menu that is to be displayed with the option key switch.

Procedures
1) Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that
is to be directly displayed with Option Key.

2) While the menu is open, hold down [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2]

key for 2 seconds.

3 －105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

The menu currently being displayed is saved for the pressed option key.

The menu set for the pressed option key will open.
i Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed.

3.8.7.3 How to use the Optin key ( Zoom Display)

Preset whether to execute the Zoom display by operating the user key.

Procedures
1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is activated.

2) Put the cursor on a location that is to be zoomed, and left-click.

Zoom is set.

Cancel
1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is cancelled and a normal display will appear.

3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting)

By performing the following operation, it is possible to display navigation data of

the wind direction / velocity, water depth and the like, as a graph on the radar
display.

Procedures
1) Open the Multi Window Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

3 －106
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

→　 4. Multi Window Setting

The Multi Window Setting menu will appear.

Detailed settings of the display are possible by changing the settings of each item.

3.8.8.1 DIR/DIST EXP Display

3
• Determine whether to expand the value display of cursor, EBL, and VRM.
• The value display is expanded in digital information area 2.
• When the cursor mark moves on the PPI, the display of cursor information is
expanded.
• When an EBL or VRM is operated, the value display of each marker is
expanded.
• While the menu is open, any display is not expanded.

Off : Does not expand any display.

On : Expands the display in digital information area 2. The

expanded display remains for 5 seconds after the
operation of each marker, and then it will disappear.
Always On : Expands the display in digital information area 2.

3.8.8.2 Numeric NAV INFO

• Determine whether to display the numeric values of received navigation
information.
• One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
• When navigation data is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/AIS
numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Navigation information of the water depth, water temperature, tidal current,
wind direction/velocity, and destination is displayed with numeric values.
• Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
navigation data display function is switched between On and Off.

Off : Does not display the numeric values of navigation information.

Area1 : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 1.

Area2 : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 2.

3.8.8.3 Depth Graph Setting

• The Depth Graph Setting menu will appear.

3 －107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

[1] Depth Graph Display

• Determine whether to display received water depth information with a graph.

• One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
• When the water-depth graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
water-depth graph display function is switched between On and Off.

Off : Does not display a water depth graph.

Area1 : Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 1.

Area2 : Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 2.

[2] Depth Range

• Select the depth range on the water depth graph.

50m : Sets 50 m as the depth range.

100m : Sets 100 m as the depth range.

250m : Sets 250 m as the depth range.

AUTO : Uses the depth range in the DPT sentence included in

received data.

[3] Time Range

• Select the time range on the water depth graph.

10min : Sets 10 minutes as the time range.

15min : Sets 15 minutes as the time range.

30min : Sets 30 minutes as the time range.

60min : Sets 60 minutes as the time range.

12hour : Sets 12 hours as the time range.

[4] Depth Unit

• Set the unit of water depth for the water-depth graph.

Feet : The foot is used as the unit of water depth.

3 －108
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

Fathom : The fathom is used as the unit of water depth.

Meters : The meter is used as the unit of water depth.

3.8.8.4 Wind Graph Setting

• The Wind Graph Setting menu will appear.

[1] Wind Graph Display

• Determine whether to display received wind direction/velocity information

with a graph. 3
• One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
• When the wind direction / speed graph is displayed, the sizes of the target
tracking (TT) / AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
wind direction / speed graph display function is switched between On and Off.

Off : Does not display the wind direction / speed graph.

Area1 : Displays the wind direction / speed graph in digital information area 1.

Area2 : Displays the wind direction / speed graph in digital information area 2.

[2] Wind Speed Unit

• Set the unit of wind velocity for the wind direction / speed graph.

m/s : Meters per second are used as the unit of wind speed.

km/h : Kirometers per hour are used as the unit of wind speed.

kn : Knots are used as the unit of wind speed.

3.8.8.5 TEMP Graph Setting

• The TEMP Graph Setting menu will appear.

[1] TEMP Graph Display

• Determine whether to display the graph of the water-temperature data that has
been received on the radar display.
• One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
• When the water-temperature graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking
(TT)/AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.

3 －109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

• Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
water-temperature graph display function is switched between On and Off.

Off : The water-temperature graph is not displayed.

Area1 : The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 1.

Area2 : The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 2.

[2] TEMP Graph Color

• Set the color for the water-temperature graph.

• There are eight selection items:
White , Gray , Blue , Green , Yellow , Pink , Red

[3] TEMP Range

• When Color is selected for the display color for the water-temperature graph,
set the temperature range of each color.

[4] Time Range

• Set the time range for the water-temperature graph.

10min : The time range is set at 10 minutes.

15min : The time range is set at 15 minutes.

30min : The time range is set at 30 minutes.

60min : The time range is set at 60 minutes.

12hour : The time range is set at 12 hours.

3.8.8.6 Course Bar Setting

• The Course Bar Setting menu will appear.

[1] Course Bar Display

• Determine whether to display the bar graph for the course data that has been
received on the radar display.
• One of two digital information areas is used to display data.

3 － 110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

• When the course-bar graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Left-click the Target button located at the lower righit of the display. The
course bar display function is switched between On and Off.

Off : The course bar graph is not displayed.

Area1 : The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 1.

Area2 : The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 2.

[2] Autopilot Course

3
• Determine which field of the APB sentence that has been received is used to
display AP course.

Course to Steer ：Heading to Steer to Destination

From Origin ：Bearing Origin to Destination

From CURR POSN ：Bearing, Present Postion to Destination

[3] ROT Scale

• Set the maximum scale for the TURN Rate graph.

30-0-30 : The scale is set at ±30°/min.

60-0-60 : The scale is set at ±60°/min.
90-0-90 : The scale is set at ±90°/min.
120-0-120 : The scale is set at ±120°/min.
150-0-150 : The scale is set at ±150°/min.
300-0-300 : The scale is set at ±300°/min.

3.8.9 AUTO Backup

Data can be automatically backed up when the power supply is turned on.

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

3－ 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS

Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the Plot Setting menu by performing the following menu

operation.
Main

→　 8. Plot Setting

3) Left-click the item button of 5. AUTO Backup Backup button.

The AUTO Backup menu will appear.

4) Select the number for the card slot to back up data.

Off : The automatic backup function is turned off.

Slot1 : Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash

memory card inserted into slot 1.

Slot2 : Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash

memory card inserted into slot 2.

Data that can be backed up includes own ship's track (Own Track), other ships' trails data
(Target Track), mark/line data (Mark/Line), destination data (WPT), and route data (Route).

The file name to be saved is either 9998 or 9999. Every time the power supply is turned on,
those numbers are alternately displayed.

3 － 112
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

"Radar Function Setting" is provided for easily obtaining the best radar video by
storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and
calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function.

Functions are factory-set for general use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by
operating the menu.

Four function modes are available, and they are factory-set as follows:
3
Function 1: Coast Useful for observing short-range videos.

Function 2: Deep Sea Suitable for general ocean navigation.

Function 3: Storm Useful for observing videos in stormy weather.

Function 4: Rain Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but
rain / snow clutter is strong.

3.9.1 Operation Procedures

3.9.1.1 Calling a Function

Procedures
1) Press the [USER] key.
Each time the [USER] key is pressed, the selection changes cyclically as follows:

Function Off→ Function1→ Function2 → Function3 → Function4→ Function Off

The name of the current function
mode is displayed at the lower left
of the display. Function
(FUNC) mode
Alternatively, left-clicking the
function button located at the
lower left of the radar display will
enable the same operation.

3.9.1.2 Changing Function Setting (temporary change)

When radar signal processing setting is changed by using the menu or button on the radar
display while function 1 to 4 is called, the change is temporarily reflected to the operating
state.

Since this method does not change the memory contents, the new setting is discarded as soon
as another function is called.

When the previous function is called again, operation is performed according to the memory
contents.

3 － 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

3.9.1.3 Changing Function Setting (memory contents change)

To change the memory contents of functions 1 to 4, use the function setting menu.

For how to operate the function setting menu, see Section 3.9.3 "Overview of Function
Operations (User Function Setting)".

3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items

The function setting menu has the items below.
page 1 Option
1. Mode Name of the mode to be used Coast/Deepsea/....
2. IR Radar interference rejection Off/Low/Middle/High
3. Process Video process PROC Off/3Scan CORREL/....
4. Target Enhance Target expansion Off/Level1/Level2/Level3
5. AUTO Sea/Rain Automatic clutter suppression Off / AUTO Sea / AUTO Sea/Rain
6. Save Present State Saving the present state

page 2 Option
1. Pulse Length 0.75NM Standard pulse length for 0.75nm range SP1/MP1
2. Pulse Length 1.5NM Standard pulse length for 1.5nm range SP1/MP1/MP2/
3. Pulse Length 3/4NM Standard pulse length for 3nm range SP1/MP1/MP2//LP1/LP2
4. Pulse Length 6/8NM Standard pulse length for 6nm range MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
5. Pulse Length 12NM Standard pulse length for 12nm range MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
6. Pulse Length 16NM Standard pulse length for 16nm range LP1/LP2

page 3 Option
1. Video Latitude Dynamic range of radar video Narrow/ Normal /Wide/Super Wide
2. Video Noise Rejection Radar video noise rejection Off/Level1/Level2
3. AUTO Dynamic Range Automatic dynamic range control Off/On
4. Process Switch Radar video process switching Off/Range FIX/AUTO
5. 2nd Process Mode 2nd video process mode PROC Off/3Scan CORREL/....
6. Process Switch Range Video process switching range Range Setting
7. Fast Target Detection Off/On

page 4 Option
1. Trails Interval Radar trails length Off/15sec/....
2. Trails Mode True/Relative
3. Trails Reference Level Radar trails plotting threshold Level1-4
4. Trails Reduction Thinning of radar trails Off/Level1-3
6. Trails Process Superimpose-display of time radar trails and Off/On
continuous radar trails.
7. Max Interval Maximum time for radar trails display Short/Middle/Long

page 5 Option
1. Gain Offset Gain correction
2. PRF Transmitting repetition frequency Normal/Economy/High Power
3. Small Buoy Detection Small target detection mode Off/On
4. Fishnet Detection Fishnet detection mode Off/On
5. Antenna Height Default/-5m/5-10m/10-20m/20m
8. Set Mode Default
9. Initialize

3 － 114
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting)

The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function
setting menu:

Procedures
1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
3
→　 3. RADAR Menu

→　 1. Process Setting

→　 8. User Function Setting

The User Function Setting menu will appear.

Specify the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed.

The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item.

page 1-[1] Mode

• Selects the function name to be indicated at the lower left of the radar display
when the function is selected.
• When the setting is changed back to the factory setting, the initial value of the
selected mode is called.
• The following 11 modes are provided:
Coast : Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays
and coasts where many boats and ships are running. (Importance is
attached to resolution.)
Deep Sea : Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open
sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
Fish Net : Use this mode to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul
netters hidden by sea clutter returns. (Importance is attached to sea
clutter suppression, and gain to moving targets lowers.)
Storm : Use this mode when many rain / snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is attached to rain /
snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
Calm : Use this mode when only a few rain / snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns are detected.
Rain : Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain / snow clutter is
strong. (Importance is attached to rain / snow clutter suppression, and
gain slightly lowers.)
Bird : Use this mode to detect flocks of sea birds.
Long : Use this mode to monitor utmost distances in the broad ocean.
Buoy : Use this mode to detect small targets like radio buoys in areas outside
the sea clutter area. (This mode displays targets of which detection
probability is low.)
User1 : General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.
User2 : General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.

3 － 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

page 1-[2] IR (Radar interference rejection)

• Same function as IR Setting described in Section 3.4.1 "Interference Rejection
(IR)".

page 1-[3] Process (Video process)

• Same function as PROCESS Setting described in Section 3.4.4 "Use Video
Processing (PROC)"

page 1-[4] Target Enhance

• Same function as TARGET ENHANCE Setting described in Section 3.4.3
"Target Enhance (ENH)".

page 1-[5] Auto STC/FTC (Auto Sea/Rain)

• Detects unwanted waves such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and
automatically suppresses them.
• When the sea state or weather changes, this function automatically performs
suppression processing in accordance with the situation.
• Suppression processing is not full automatic, and requires the operator to adjust
the afterimages of unwanted waves.
• To adjust the afterimage of sea clutter, use the [SEA] dial.
• To adjust the afterimage of rain/snow clutter, use the [RAIN] dial.
• In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low, unwanted waves may
remain being judged as targets. Thus, use the automatic clutter suppression
mode together with the video process mode.
• Characteristics of the automatic clutter suppression function:
Off : Disables the automatic clutter suppression function. Select off
when rain / snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the
ship is in a bay.
AUTO Sea : Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter, and performs the
most suitable sea clutter suppression processing.

Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind
direction, AUTO Sea performs the most suitable suppression
processing. Land like islands can be displayed naturally.

Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land,
there is no effect of suppressing rain / snow clutter.
AUTO Sea/Rain : Along with AUTO Sea, AUTO Rain automatically detects the
strength of rain / snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain /
snow clutter suppression processing.

When rain clouds are scattered about, AUTO Rain performs rain /
snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain-cloud areas.

Since land is recognized as rain clouds, land videos become

obscure.

3 － 116
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

page 2-[1]~[7] PL (Pulse Length)

• Sets the standard transmitter pulse length in each range.
• When the range is called, the pulse range is used.

page 3-[1]~[7] Video setting menu (Process Setting)

• Operation is the same as that of the Process Setting menu described in Section
3.8.1 "Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)".

page 4-[1]~[7] Radar trails settings (Trails Setting)

• Same functions as in the Trails Setting of the RADAR Menu described in
3
Section 3.8.2 "Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)".

page 5-[1] Gain Offset

• Corrects gain while the function mode is called.
• Since the displayed noise level varies depending on the combination of the
video process mode and the interference rejection level, gain needs fine
adjustment for always obtaining the highest level.
• The gain correction function saves the correction value set by the gain adjust in
each function mode, so it can obtain the highest gain without the gain adjust
being operated when the function mode is changed.
• To set high gain, set a value on the “+”side.
• To set low gain, set a value on the “-”side.
• When the radar interference rejection level is increased, the noise level is
lowered. Thus, set a gain correction value to the “+”side.
• When the video process mode 3Scan CORREL , 4Scan CORREL , or
5Scan CORREL is used, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a gain correction
value to the “+”side.
• When the video process mode Remain or Peak Hold is used,
noise is hard to disappear. Thus, set a gain correction value to the “-”side.

page 5-[2] PRF

• Same function as in the TXRX Setting described in Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner
Unit (TXRX Setting)".

3 － 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

page 5-[3] Small Buoy Detection

• Reduces the loss of signal processing during detection of small targets.

Off :Activates the general signal processing mode.

On :Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss
of signal processing.

page 5-[4] FishNet Detection

• Use this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
• This function becomes more effective when the AUTO RAIN clutter
suppression function is used together.

Off :Activates the general signal processing mode.

On :Activates the fishnet detection mode.

page 5-[5] Antenna Height

• Set the height of radar antenna above sea level.
• The STC/FTC curve is changed.

Default : Set default

~5m : Set the antenna height under 5m.

5m~10m : Set the antenna height 5m to 10m.

10m~20m : Set the antenna height 10m to 20m.

20m~ : Set the antenna height over 20m.

3 － 118
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]

3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data

The overview of saved function setting data is as follows:

Factory-set data: : Saved data that general operation cannot change

Default data: : Standard data of each function mode that users can change

Data that can be : Saved data that can be called by pressing the [USER] key
called:

Procedures
1) Open the User Function Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
3
Main

→　 3. RADAR Menu

→　 1. Process Setting

→　 8. User Function Setting

FUNCTION SETTING FUNCTION SETTING FUNCTION SETTING

Factory-set data Default data Data that can be called Current data

5-[9 1-[1 FUNC1

Coast Coast
FUNC2 【 USER】 Present
Deepsea Deepsea
FUNC3
Fishnet Fishnet
FUNC4 1-[6
Storm Storm
Calm Calm
Rain Rain 5-[8
Bird Bird
Long Long
Buoy Buoy
User1 User1
User2 User2

page 1-[1] Mode

• Calls the default value of the mode, and saves it for the function number.
page 1-[6] Save Present State
• The currently operating state can be saved for the function number.
• Use this function to save the state of good setting that will be frequently used.
page 5-[8] Set Mode Default
• Saves the setting of the current function number, as the default setting of the
mode.
page 5-[9] Initialize
• Changes the memory contents of the mode, which is used with the current
function number, back to the factory setting.

3 － 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING

3.10 USE USER SETTING

The operation status of the radar is recorded. If the system is operated by more
than one operator, the operators can register operation status as suitable for them
and call the status. Operation status for up to five operations can be registered, and
a name can be assigned to each status. (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters)

Data saved by the user setting

Display Color Setting

Buzzer Volume

Option Key Setting

Date Display Style

EBL/VRM Control CURS

Cursor Length

3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting)

The system's current operating state can be saved in the system by performing the
operation below.

Procedures
1) Open the Save User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　 3. User Setting

→　 2. Save User Setting

The Save User Setting menu will appear.

2) Left-click the button for the file to be saved.

The file name input screen will appear.

3) Enter a file name to be saved.

The Input File Name menu will appear.

On the numeric value input screen, enter a file name.

After the file name has been entered, the operating conditions will be saved.

3 －120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING

3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting)

The operating state saved in the system can be loaded by performing the operation
below.

When the operating state is loaded, the previous operating state data is discarded.
Therefore, if you do not want to discard the operating state data, save the
operating state by performing the operation described in Section 3.10.1 "Save
Operating State (Save User Setting)".

Procedures
1) Open the Load User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
3
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　 3. User Setting

→　 1. Load User Setting

The Load User Setting menu will appear.

2) Left-click the button for the file to be loaded.

Confirmation Window will appear.

To load the file, left-click the 1. Yes button.

3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting)

The operating state saved in the system can be deleted by performing the
operation below.

Use this function to delete unnecessary operating state data.

Procedures
1) Open the Delete User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

→　 7. Sub Menu

→　 3. User Setting

→　 1. Load User Setting

The Delete User Setting menu will appear.

2) Left-click the button for the file to be deleted.

Confirmation Window will appear.

To delete the file, left-click the 1. Yes button.

3 －121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

3.11 USING CARD

This radar has two card slots. Inserting a flash memory card (option) into a card
slot, you can save the following contents, saved in the processor, in the card or can
load data from the card to the processor.

Trails of own ship: 7000 points maximum

Track of other ship: 20 target X 500 points

Mark/Line: 20000 points maximum

WPT: 512 points maximum

Route: 1 route maximum

These pieces of information can be saved in a flash memory card as a file. The
internal capacity is as large as only a file. An internally created file can be saved
until the flash memory card is full.

3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager)

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Set the radar in the standby state.

While the radar is in the transmission state, the File Manager screen cannot be opened.

3) Open the File Manager window by performing the menu

operation below.
Main

→　 2. File Manager

3 －122
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

The File Manager window will appear.

Copy file from
Device 1 selected device 1 to device 2 Device 2 format Device 2
Type of file selected
displayed

Device 1 Device 2
device type device type

Device 1 format
Device 2 file list
Device 1 saved
information
scroll
3
Device 1
Device 1 saved
select and
information
cancel all files

Device 1 erase Device 2 erase

selected file selected file

Device 2
Processor saved
select and
information
cancel all files
Exit Device 1 file list Copy file from Message
scroll device 2 to device 1

Information saved in the processor is displayed in the Memory Content.

Own Track : Number of data points for own ship's track (7000 points maximum)

Remain : Number of remaining data points of own ship's track that can be saved

Target Track : The number of other ships' trails (up to 20 targets)

Remain : The remaining number of other ships' trails to be saved

Mark/Line : Number of mark and line points made with user map (up to 20000 items)

Remain : Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved

WPT : Number of data points of created waypoints (512 points maximum)

Remain : Remaining waypoints that can be saved

Route : Number of data points of created routes (1 route maximum)

Remain : Remaining routes that can be saved

Internal Total : Total number of data points

• The file name and data saved in the selected device will be displayed.
• Pressing the arrows located at the upper right and lower right of the file name
list will scroll the list.

3 －123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

3.11.1.1 Copy Internal Information to Card (Copy Internal -> Card)

Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 will be displayed.

2) Left-click the 1. Internal button among the selection items.

Internal is selected.

3) Left-click the device 2 selection button.

Selected items for Device2 will be displayed.

4) Left-click button corresponding to the device to which data is to

be copied.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed.

5) Put the cursor on the data to be copied, and Left-click button.

Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection.

6) Left-click the COPY button.

The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear.

7) Enter the file name to be saved.

Up to 10 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".

After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.

8) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The entered name is written into the selected device as a file name.

Up to the maximum number of items, described on the previous page, can be saved in the
device. With regard to the capacity for saving data, data can be saved on a flash memory card
as a file, and those files can be saved until the flash memory card is full.

3 －124
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

3.11.1.2 Load Information from Card to Internal Portion (Copy Card ->
Internal)
Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 will be displayed.

2) Left-click the
Internal is selected.
1. Internal button among the selection items.
3
3) Left-click the device 2 selection button.
Selected items for Device2 will be displayed.

4) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be

loaded is saved.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed.

5) Select the desired data.

Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection.

6) Left-click the COPY button.

Confirmation Window will appear.

7) Left-click the 1. Overwrite button to overwrite data, or Left-click

the 2. Add button to add new data.
When Overwrite is selected, internally saved data is deleted and new data is loaded. When
Add is selected, new data is added to the saved data.

8) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The selected file is loaded into the system from the card.

When adding data saved on the card to the data saved in the system, data can be copied from
multiple files. However, when the maximum number of units of data is reached, additional
data cannot be loaded. Even in the ADD mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten.

3 －125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

3.11.1.3 Copy Information (Copy)

Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 will be displayed.

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the device from which data

is to be copied.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed.

3) Left-click the device 2 selection button.

Selected items for Device2 will be displayed.

4) Left-click button corresponding to the device to which data is to

be copied.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed.

5) Put the cursor on the data to be copied, and Left-click button.

Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection.

6) Left-click the COPY button.

The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear.If there is a file having
the same name, the file selection window will appear.

7) When deleting saved data and copying new data, left-click

1. Overwrite to select Overwrite. When adding data to a
destination file, left-click 2. Add to select Add. Even in the Add
mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten. When selection
has been made, Confirmation Window will appear.

8) Enter the file name to be saved.

Up to 10 characters can be entered. For the input method on the character input screen, see
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"

After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.

9) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The entered name is written into the selected device as a file name.

3 －126
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

3.11.1.4 Erase File (Erase)

Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 will be displayed.

2) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be

erased is saved.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. 3
3) Select data to be erased.
Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection.

4) Left-click Erase button.

Confirmation Window will appear.

5) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

The selected file will be erased.

3.11.1.5 Initializing a card (Format)

Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button or the device 2 selection button.
Selection items for Device1 or Device2 will appear.

2) Left-click the button which corresponds to the system (device)

where data to be displayed is saved.
The File Manager window will appear.

3) Put the cursor on Format for the device to be initialized, and

Left-click button.
Confirmation Window will appear.

4) Left-click the 1. Yes button.

Initialization will be executed.

3 －127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD

3.11.1.6 Showing data saved on the card (Show Card)

Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device1 or Device2 will be displayed.

2) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be

displayed is saved.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed.

Exit
1) Left-click the 1. Exit button.
The File Manager menu will close.

3 －128
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING

3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING

The system can receive data from other system via the JRC-LAN. The purpose of
JRC-LAN is interoperation with other JRC systems. The JRC systems are
synchronized with datum in JRC-LAN network.

NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
•Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
•Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.
3
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port)
Select ports for receiving signals from sensors.
There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or using
the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.

Procedures
1) Open the RX Port Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main

　　 →　 6. NAV Equipment Setting

　　 →　 6. RX Port 　　
2) Set a port for each sensor.

Settable sensor signals

Heading, Speed, AIS, GPS, DLOG, Alarm, Depth, Temperature, Wind, Current, ROT, RSA, Time
Zone, Date/Time

Selectable ports
When the automatic recognition AUTO
function is used:

When ports are specified: Own LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ship’s Clock)

Behavior pattern of selectable ports

AUTO : Data from JRC-LAN is prior

Own : The system use data from sensor connected to the system directly.

LAN : The system uses data from JRC-LAN.

LAN (GPS) : The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected).

LAN (Ship’s Clock) : The system uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)

Setting of Section 7.2.10.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" is prior. If you want to set this
i menu, Section 7.2.10.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" menu set to User Setting .

3 －129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING

3 －130
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING

MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) ....4-14
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-20
4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range
Marker [EBL] [VRM] .....................................................................4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points .....................................4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

The system is equipped with the navigation tools below.

Cursor: Specifies an arbitrary point, and measures the range and bearing
from the own ship.

Range Rings: Displays concentric circles with own ship's position as the center at
specified intervals, and the rings are used as rough guides for range
measurement.

Electronic Bearing Line Displays a straight line for specifying an arbitrary bearing, and
(EBL1/2): measures the bearing from the own ship.The process unit is
equipped with two electronic bearing lines.

Variable Range Marker Displays a circle for specifying an arbitrary range, and measures the
(VRM1/2): range from the own ship.The process unit is equipped with two
4
variable range markers.

Parallel Index Line (PI): Displays straight lines at even intervals, and the lines are used as
rough guides for complex measurement or ship courses.

EBL Maneuver: Displays the course by steering the own ship, and it is used as a
rough guide for ship maneuvering.

Marker: Stores the latitude and longitude where the own ship was at the
point of storing the markers, and shows an anchor symbol on the
radar display. When the own ship has moved, the system displays
the range and bearing to the position.

EBL/VRM/PI Operation with Operates EBL, VRM, or PI on the radar display by using the cursor.
Cursor (Cursor AUTO):

Cursor bearing Cursor mode Cursor latitude

numeric value indication
true / relative Cursor bearing Cursor longitude

Cursor range EBL1 bearing

EBL1 EBL1 starting point mode

numeric value indication
true / relative VRM1 range

EBL1 On / Off EBL2 bearing

VRM1 On / Off EBL2 starting point mode

EBL2 On / Off VRM2 range

VRM2 On / Off
Parallel index line
starting point mode
EBL2
numeric value indication Parallel index line Consistent Common
true / relative On / Off Reference Point (CCRP)

4－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor)

Procedures
1) Move the cursor onto the PPI display by moving the trackball.
When the cursor is moved onto the PPI display, the arrow cursor turns into a cross cursor.

4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings)

Range rings display

Range rings interval

Procedures
1) Left-click the Rings button on upper left area on the display.

The range ring display switches disappear and appear between display and non-display each
time the Rings button is clicked. The range ring interval is shown in the Rings

button.

The range between the target and own ship can be determined by visually measuring the
target's position that lies between two range rings.

For change of the brilliance of range rings, refer to Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar Display (Display
Setting)".

4－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2)

Electronic bearing lines (EBL) are indispensable to the measurement of bearings.

Operators must be familiar with the operation of EBL beforehand.

The system is equipped with two EBL. The bearing and starting point of an EBL
can be operated separately from the other EBL.

An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the EBL and VRM
of the same number.

Intersection markers shown on EBL:

○ : EBL1, VRM1

● : EBL2, VRM2
4

EBL2

VRM2
EBL1

VRM1

EBL Bearing Display

The bearing value of the current EBL1 or EBL2 on the PPI display is shown in the
upper right of the display.

The currently operable EBL1 or EBL2 is highlighted in the upper right of the display.

Starting Point of EBL

The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be switched from the center of the
radar display to any offset position . The offset position of the EBL starting point can be
fixed on the radar display or at the latitude and longitude. (The setting of the navigator is
necessary for fixing the offset position at the latitude and longitude.)

4－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.3.1 Operating EBL (EBL)

Procedures
1) Press the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key.
The EBL button (located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and the
selected EBL becomes operable.

2) Turn the [EBL] dial.

To turn the [EBL] dial to the right, turn the EBL control clockwise; to turn the [EBL] dial to
the left, turn the EBL control counterclockwise.

Cancel
1) Press the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key again.
The selected EBL display will disappear.

4.1.3.2 Moving the Starting Point of EBL

The system provides three types of EBL starting points. Select one of them in
accordance with purpose.

_ : The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship's position.

C : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display.

D : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and
longitude. (The navigator needs to be connected.)

[1] To move the starting point of EBL

Procedures
1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.

2) Press the [EBL] dial to set C or D for the EBL1 / EBL2

starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the
display.
The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is
pressed.

_ ⇒ C ⇒ D ⇒ _

3) Put the cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-
click.
The selected EBL starting point will be determined.

4－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

[2] To return the EBL starting point to own ship's position

Procedures
1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.

2) Press the [EBL] dial to set _ for the EBL1 / EBL2 starting point
mode switching located at the upper right of the display.
The selected EBL starting point will be set as the own ship's position.

4.1.3.3 Setting EBL Operation Mode 4

[1] To set the numeric value display mode of EBL (EBL Bearing REF)

Determine whether to display EBL in true bearing mode or relative bearing mode.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the EBL1/2 numeric value indication true /
relative switching (located at the upper right of the display), and
left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time the left button is clicked.

T ⇒ R ⇒ T

T :EBL bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.

R :EBL bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.

[2] To set a mode for fixing EBL display (EBL Bearing Fix)

When this function is set to Angle , an EBL is fixed to the preset bearing. For
example, if a true bearing of 020° is preset, the EBL is fixed to the true bearing
020° even when the own ship turns.

When the function is set to Screen , the EBL is fixed on the radar display. In this
case, the EBL is always fixed to the same bearing on the display when the own
ship turns.

4－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

Procedures
1) Open the EBL/Cursor Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
Main

　　 →　 7. Sub Menu

　　 →　 9. EBL/Cursor Setting

2) Left-click at the item button

of 1. EBL1 Bearing FIX or 2. EBL2 Bearing FIX .

Angle :EBL bearing is fixed to the preset value.

Screen :EBL bearing is fixed on the radar display.

Course data is necessary for turning on this

i function.

Variable range markers (VRM) are indispensable to the measurement of ranges.

Operators must be familiar with the operation of VRM beforehand.

The system is equipped with two VRM. The VRM can be operated separately
from each other.

An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the VRM and EBL
of the same number.

When the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of the VRM is defined as
the offset EBL starting point.

Intersection markers shown on VRM:

○ : EBL1, VRM1

● : EBL2, VRM2

4－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

EBL2

VRM2
EBL1

VRM1

VRM Operation
4
The range value of the current VRM1 or VRM2 on the PPI display is shown in the
VRM1/2 range located at the upper right of the display. The currently operable VRM1 or
VRM2 is highlighted in the VRM1 VRM2 button located at the upper right of the
display.

4.1.3.4 To operate VRM (VRM)

Procedures
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.
The VRM1 and VRM2 buttons (located at the upper right of the display) will be
highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable.

2) Turn the [VRM] dial.

To turn the [VRM] dial to the right, the VRM control wide, to turn the [VRM] dial to the
left, the VRM control narrow.

Cancel
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.
The selected EBL display will disappear.

4－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu)

Parallel index lines can be displayed.

4.1.4.1 Operating Parallel Index Lines (PI)

Procedures
1) Press the [VRM] dial.
Parallel index lines and the PI Menu will appear.

To change the bearing of parallel index lines, turn the [EBL] dial, to change the line interval,
turn the [VRM] dial.

The bearing and interval of parallel index lines are displayed in the PI Menu.

2) Press the [VRM] dial again.

The parallel index lines will be fixed.

Parallel index lines are operable only while the PI Menu is

i displayed. When the menu is closed, the parallel index line
display remains, but the settings of the bearing and interval
cannot be adjusted any more. To adjust the bearing and
interval after closing the menu, press the [VRM] dial twice to
open the PI Menu.

Cancel
1) Press the [VRM] dial again.
The parallel index line display will disappear.

4.1.4.2 Operation of Parallel Index Lines

• Parallel index lines rotate in the same direction as you turn the [EBL] dial.(1,
2)
• The intervals of parallel index lines narrow when you turn the [VRM] dial
counterclockwise (3), and widen when you turn the [VRM] dial clockwise
(4).
• When the [VRM] dial is pressed, the PI Menu closes and the parallel index
lines are fixed.

4－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

HL

EBL1 EBL2 VRM 1 VRM 2

4
① ② ③ ④

During the operation of parallel index lines, pressing the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key
disables operation for rotation directions. Pressing the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key
disables operation for parallel index line intervals.

4.1.4.3 Settings in PI Menu (PI Menu)

The operation of parallel index lines can be set in the PI Menu.

Procedures
1) Left-click the PI button to open the PI menu.

[1] Display for All Lines

Sets the parallel index line display to on or off.

On :Parallel index lines are displayed.

Off :Parallel index lines are not displayed.

4－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

[2] Operation Mode

Sets an operation mode for parallel index lines.

PI PI

All Individual

PI
PI

Track Equiangular

All :All the parallel lines are operated at the same time.
Individual :The bearing of each line is operated individually.

Track :Equally spaced lateral lines are displayed on both sides.

Equiangular :Two lines intersecting at the center of a circle are displayed.

a. Operation if Individual is selected

• A line perpendicular to the own ship and the intersection marker "----○" are
displayed on an operable line.
• Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction.
• Pressing the [VRM] dial changes the range, end point 1, or end point 2 to be
operated.
• An operable point is displayed with "● " and can be operated by turning the
[VRM] dial.
• If Sequential is selected for [3] Control, the parallel index lines of the next
number can be displayed by pressing the [EBL] dial.
• To close the menu, left click 0.Exit software button.

b. Operation if Equiangular is selected

• Select a group of lines to be operated according to the setting of [3] Control.
• Pressing the [EBL] dial switches between the direction change mode and
elevation-angle change mode. Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction or
elevation angle.

4 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

[3] Control

Determines whether to operate all the lines at the same time. The setting items are
determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode".

a. If All is selected
The setting cannot be changed.

All :All the lines are operated at the same time.

b. If Individual is selected
Determine whether to set consecutive lines or individual lines.

Index Line1 to
Sequential

Line8
:Lines are operated sequentially.

:A specified line is operated.

4
c. If Track or Equiangular is selected
Select a group of lines to be operated.

Group1 to Group4 :A specified group is operated.

[4] Floating

Moves the center point of parallel index lines.

Off :The starting point of parallel index lines is defined as

the own ship's position.
Screen Fix :The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed on
the radar display.
L/L Fix :The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed at
the latitude and longitude. (The navigator needs to be
connected.)

[5] Heading Link

Determines whether to operate parallel index lines following the heading bearing.

On :Parallel index lines are operated following the heading

bearing.

Off :Parallel index lines are not operated following the

heading bearing.

4－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

[6] Next

Moves to the next page.

[7] Range Scale Link

Determines the operation of parallel index line intervals when the range is
changed.

On :The intervals are fixed with the actual range (nm). The
appearance of parallel index line intervals changes
when the range is changed.
Off :The intervals are fixed with the display range. The
parallel index line intervals (nm) change when the
range is changed.

[8] Reference Bearing

Sets a reference bearing for the numeric data display of parallel index lines. The
setting items are determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode"

a. If All is selected

True :Displayed with true bearing (with North as reference).

HL :Displayed with the heading line as reference.

b. If Individual is selected

True :Displayed with true bearing (with North as

reference).
HL :Displayed with the heading line as reference.
Index Line1 to Line8 :Displayed with a specified line as reference.

4 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

c. If Track is selected

True : Displayed with true bearing (with North as

reference).
HL : Displayed with the heading line as reference.
Index Line1 to Line8 : Displayed with a specified line as reference.

Line1, Line3, Line5 and

Line1 ⇔ Group1
Line7 correspond to
Group1, Group2, Group3 Line3 ⇔ Group2
and Group4, respectively. Line5 ⇔ Group3
Line7 ⇔ Group4

　
d. If Equiangular is selected
The setting cannot be changed. 4
[9] Operation Area

If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", this function sets an area for
displaying parallel index lines.

One Side :Parallel index lines are displayed only on one side.
Both Side :Parallel index lines are displayed on both sides.

[10]Display for Individual Line

Determines whether to turn on / off the parallel index line display of a selected
number.

On :The line of the selected number is displayed.

Off :The line of the selected number is not displayed.

If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", the

line near the own ship is Index Line1 .

If Track or Equiangular is selected

Line1 ⇔ Group1
for Section [2] "Operation Mode",
Line1, Line3, Line5 and Line7 Line3 ⇔ Group2
correspond to Group1, Group2, Line5 ⇔ Group3
Group3 and Group4, respectively. Line7 ⇔ Group4

4 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting)

4.1.5.1 Initial Setting (EBL Maneuver Setting)

Procedures
1) Open the EBL Maneuver Setting menu by performing the
following menu operation.
Main

　　 →　 1. EBL Maneuver Setting

2) Set the following parameters.

Reach :Set the range from when the rudder is steered to when
the ship beings to turn.
Turn Mode :Select a turn mode.

　 Radius :Turning radius (NM)

　 Rate :Rate of turn (deg/min)

Turn Set :Select the setting for turning.

If Radius is selected :Turning radius (NM)

If Rate is selected :Rate of turn (deg/min)

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

A wrong initial setting affects the maneuver curve function

i explained below.

4 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.5.2 Creation of Maneuver Curve (EBL Maneuver)

Procedures
1) Left-click the item button of 1. EBL Maneuver while the EBL
Maneuver Setting menu is open.
The EBL maneuver function will be set to on or off.

A auxiliary line for maneuver curve creation, a maneuver curve, and a WOL will appear on
the radar display.

4
2) Put the cursor on the starting point of the auxiliary line, and set
the bearing of the auxiliary line by operating the [EBL] dial.
The bearing of the auxiliary line is the final bearing in which the own ship is to move.

The WOL position varies depending on the bearing of the auxiliary line.

If the WOL is behind the CCRP, the line color of WOL will change.

3) Left-click.
The setting will be determined. However, if the WOL is behind the CCRP position at this
point, left-clicking is rejected, and the setting is not determined.

HL Scheduled route
Auxiliary line

Reach
Radius

WOL : Steering point

Reach : Range from when the rudder
Own ship’s position Maneuver curve is steered to when the ship
begins to turn
WOL Radius : Turning radius

4 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor

When the cursor mode is set to AUTO (located at the upper right of the
display), EBL, VRM, and PI can be operated simply by using the trackball.

4.1.6.1 Operating Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on EBL1 or EBL2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, EBL1 or EBL2 is shown at the upper right of the
cursor. The EBL becomes operable when left-clicking.

2) Move the cursor to the bearing to be set.

The EBL will move as the cursor moves.

3) Left-click.
The EBL will be fixed.

4.1.6.2 Operating Variable Range Marker (VRM)

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on VRM1 or VRM2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, VRM1 or VRM2 is shown at the upper right of
the cursor. The VRM becomes operable when left-clicking.

2) Move the cursor to the range to be set.

The VRM will move as the cursor moves.

3) Left-click.
The VRM will be fixed.

4 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

4.1.6.3 Operating EBL and VRM Concurrently (EBL・VRM)

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the intersection marker ( ○ or ● ), and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved to it, EBL1 VRM1 or EBL2 VRM2 is
shown at the upper right of the cursor. The EBL and VRM become operable when left-
clicking.

2) Move the cursor to the bearing / range to be set.

The EBL and VRM will move as the cursor moves. 4
3) Left-click.
The EBL and VRM will be fixed.

4.1.6.4 Operating Parallel Index Lines (PI)

[1] To change the direction of parallel index lines

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on near the center of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into and PI will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.

2) Move the cursor to the direction to be set.

The parallel index lines will change the direction as the cursor moves.

3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.

4 － 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS

[2] To change parallel index line intervals

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on near the end of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into and PI will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.

2) Move the cursor to the interval to be set.

The parallel index lines interval will change as the cursor moves.

If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the parallel index lines move.

3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.

[3] To change the end points of parallel index lines

If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the length of parallel index lines can
be changed.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the end point of parallel index lines, and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into and PI will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.

2) Move the cursor to the position to be set.

The position of the end point will change as the cursor moves.

3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.

4 － 18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING

4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND

BEARING
Target position on the RADAR screen

RADAR antenna transmits pulses of radio waves. The object returns the wave
(radar echo) to the antenna. So on the RADAR screen the leading edge of echo is
the actual target position. The length of echo is dependent on the transmitted pulse
length.

Point the cursor to the leading edge of echo to measure the target range or to make
a mark on the target.
4
Pulse of radio wave

RADAR echo

Fig 4-1: Transmitting-Receiving of RADAR

0

Pulse length

Target range

270 90

Own ship's position

Fig 4-2: Relation of echo, target range and pulse length

4 － 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING

4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor)

Procedures
1) Make sure of the target echoes on the radar display.

2) Move the cursor to the target.

The bearing and range of the target will be shown in the Cursor bearing / range located at the
upper right of the display. The range is a distance from the own ship's position.
0

45.0°

Cursor

Target 6.00NM
270 90

Own ship’s position

Bearing and range from the
own ship’s position to target in this figure :
True bearing 45.0 °
Range 6.00 NM

180

4.2.1.1 To set a cursor bearing numeric value mode

Determine whether to display a cursor bearing in true or relative bearing mode.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the Cursor bearing numeric value indication
true / relative switching (located at the upper right of the display),
and left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time left-clicking.
T ⇒ R ⇒ T

T :Cursor bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.

R :Cursor bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.

4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable

Range Marker [EBL] [VRM]

4 － 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING

Procedures
1) Press the [EBL1] key.
EBL1 numeric value indication
The EBL1 (located at the upper true / relative switching EBL1 adjustment
right of the display) will be
highlighted, and EBL1 will be
shown with a dotted line on the PPI
display.

2) Move the EBL1 to the

target by turning the [EBL]
dial. VRM1 adjustment EBL1 starting point
mode switching
The EBL1 bearing will be shown in
the EBL1 bearing (located at the
upper right of the display). The EBL1 bearing is the bearing of the target. 4
3) Press the [VRM1] key.
The VRM1 (located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and VRM1
will be shown with a dotted line on the PPI display.

4) Move the VRM1 to the target by turning the [VRM] dial.

The range of VRM1 from the own ship's position will be shown in the VRM1 range located
at the upper right of the display.
0
EBL1

45.0°

Target

5.00NM
270 90

VRM1
Own ship’s position

Bearing and range from the

own ship’s position to target in this figure :
True bearing 45.0 °
Range 5.00 NM

180

4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points

Procedures
1) Press the [EBL2] key.

4 － 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING

The EBL2 ( located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and EBL2
will be shown on the PPI display.

2) Press the [EBL] dial to select C for the EBL2 starting point mode
switching located at the upper right of the display.

3) Put the cursor on the point A of the two points between which
measurement is made, and left-click.
Refer to the figure below.

4) Move the EBL2 to the other point B by turning the [EBL] dial.

5) Press the [VRM2] key.

When VRM2 is selected, ● (intersection marker) will appear on the dotted line of EBL2.

6) Move the intersection marker on the dotted line to point B by

turning the [VRM] dial.
The range and bearing between the two points will be shown in the VRM2 range and EBL2
bearing (located at the upper right of display).

6.00NM

EBL2
90.0°

A B

Cape
270 90
Cape
Own ship’s position

Bearing and range between points

A and B in this figure:
VRM2 True bearing 90.0 °
Range 6.00 NM

180

Similarly, EBL1 can also be used for measuring the bearing and range between
two points. In this case, perform the above procedure reading EBL2 as EBL1 and
VRM2 as VRM1.

4 － 22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING
AND AIS

OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS

5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Collision Avoidance ........................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 Radar Display ..................................................................................5-9
5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor) .................................................................5-11
5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria ..............................................5-13
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ......................................................5-14
5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location ................................................5-14
5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION .....................................................5-15
5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ] ................................................................5-15
5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL] .............5-17
5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA] ..................................5-18
5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) .....................5-19
5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) .....................................5-20
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference) ......................................................5-21
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ...................................................5-22
5.3 AIS OPERATION ..................................................................................5-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.3.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................5-27
5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) ..............................5-27
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) .............................................5-28
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) .....................................5-28
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA] .....................................5-29
5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) ....................5-32
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) ...........................................5-33
5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost ..........................5-36
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ...............5-37
5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) ...................5-38
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) 5-38
5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as
Identical (Association Setting) .....................................................5-38
5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set ......................................5-39
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY .................................................................................5-40
5.5.1 CPA / TCPA Alarm .........................................................................5-41
5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
(New Target) ...................................................................................5-42
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ...............................................................5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm ..............................................................................5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-44
5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN) ...........................................................5-44
5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) ............................................5-45
5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) ..........................5-54
5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ................................5-55
5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ..........................5-56
5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function ...................................5-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1 PREPARATION

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target
tracking functions.
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target
tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent
targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to
0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM
and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or
lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the
target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or
moves very close to land.
[II] Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function 5
The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the
target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession. If a lost
target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target.
If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise
may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm
may be issued.
[III]Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking
To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately
adjust the [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] dials of the radar so that the target
to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display.
Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability　/　
accuracy of automatic tracking.

This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions, and the
initial setting for using each function.

Target Tracking Function

The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by
automatically tracking the target's move.

The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using
the automatic acquisition zone function.

The target tracking function also enables the simulation of the ship maneuvering
method to avoid collisions by using the trial maneuver function.

5－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

If the mode is ground stabilization, SOG/COG used for own ship's information in
target tracking. If the mode is sea stabilization, SPD (speed through the water) /
HDG (heading) used for own ship's information in target tracking.

AIS (Automatic Identification System) function

The AIS function shows the target’s information on the radar display, using other
ship's information sent out from the AIS unit.

5.1.1 Collision Avoidance

5.1.1.1 Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation

Marine collision avoidance is one of the problems that have been recognized from
of old. Now, it will be described briefly who the collision avoidance is positioned
among the navigational aid problems.

The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed
loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air,
water, the boundary between air and water, or space. This pattern consists of two
closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and
the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predeterminate
destination. Fig. 5-1 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR.
E.W. Anderson. The closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side
and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side.

Collision avoidance Destination Decision of cource

Fixing by radio wave ,
visual and celestial
observation
Traffic rule Course Guide loop
Vessel’s Spacing loop
Caluculati
Dead
on
reckoning
Visual and radio Cource and Compass
watch speed and log
Cllision
avoidance loop

Insrument or
Judgement Mancuver
judgement
Control
loop

Ship traveling in controlled condition

Fig 5-1: Navigation Pattern

5－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.1.2 Marine Accidents and Collisions

Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the
tonnages and speeds of ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at
sea. If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any
other vessel, then not only the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels
in the vicinity, port facilities, inhabitants in the coastal area as well as marine
resources may also suffer immeasurable damages and troubles. Collision
accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in
recent years. To cope with these problems, any effective measures are needed and
some equipment to achieve collision avoidance requirements have been developed
at rapid strides.

5.1.1.3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance

There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance.
Collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy
the same point at the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels
not to occupy the same point at the same time.

In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single

point but a closed zone. This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA
5
(Closest Point of Approach). In collision prediction, the time to be taken until a
ship reaches the CPA is defined as a TCPA (Time to CPA).

Fig. 5-2 shows a diagram caked "Collision Triangle".

Target Vessel True Vector

TCPA（Time to CPA）
Target vessel

CPA

Collision Triangle
Relative Vector

Own Ship

Own Ship True Vector

CPA ring

Fig 5-2: Collision Triangle

5－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.1.4 Relative Vector and True Vector

From two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to
obtain the relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other
ship for collision avoidance in order to grasp other ship’s aspect. The relationship
between the relative vector and true vector is shown in Fig. 5-3.

Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector
of other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all
other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance. On the other hand, the
course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector,
enabling other ship’ s aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other ships
(transverse, outsail, parallel run, reverse run, etc. ) as described in the act of
prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped. If there is a risk of collision
with other ship, the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to
operate own ship.
N

Target ship true vector

VO: Own ship's speed
N θ O: Own ship's course
VT : Other ship's true speed
VT θ T : Target ship's true course
VR : Target ship's relative speed
θT θ R : Target ship's relative course
θO θ A: Aspect
θA
θR
Vo

VR

Relative vector

Own ship true vector

CPA

Fig 5-3: Relative Vector and True vector

5.1.1.5 Radar and Collision Avoidance

Radar is still playing an important roll for collision prevention and positioning.

A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable
of plotting other positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their
movement. The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and
it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be
obtained. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target
ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure
those.

5－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols

5.1.2.1 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols

Vector/ Definition Remarks

Symbol

Initial acquisition This symbol is displayed until the vector is

12
target displayed after target acquisition.

Target acquired in The alarm sounds.

automatic
12 The alarm message (New Target) turns red and
acquisition zone
blinks.The symbol is red colored.

Tracked target
12

Dangerous target The alarm sounds.

12

Numeric
The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red and
blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges.

When the numeric data is displayed, the target

5
displayed target symbol is enclosed in a square.
12

Lost target The alarm sounds.

12 The alarm message (Lost) turns red and
blinks.The symbol turns red, and indicates with
X mark.

Past position The past positions of an AIS target are displayed

as well as the target tracking symbol.
12

Target track The track of another ship as an AIS target is

displayed as well as the target tracking symbol.
12

5－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.2.2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols

Vector/ Definition Remarks
Symbol
Sleeping target This symbol is displayed when received data is
valid.The direction of the triangle's vertex
indicates the target's bow or course.
Activated target The heading direction is displayed with a solid
line, and the course vector is displayed with a
dotted line. The line perpendicular to the
AIS12 heading direction indicates the direction to
which the course is to be changed. This line
may not be displayed.
Target acquired in The alarm sounds.
automatic
acquisition zone The alarm message (New Target) turns red
AIS12 and blinks.
Outline display The outlines of ships are displayed scaled
down.

AIS12
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed, the target
target symbol is enclosed in a square.

AIS12

Dangerous target The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red

AIS12 and blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges.
Lost target The alarm sounds.

The symbol turns red, and indicates with X

AIS12 mark.
Sleeping AIS-SART The AIS-SART symbol is colored as well as
target AIS target symbol

Activated The target number displayed beside the

symbol.
AIS12 AIS-SART target
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed, the target
AIS-SART target symbol is enclosed in a square.
AIS12

Lost AIS-SART When the data of an AIS-SART target cannot

target be received for 6 minutes, the lost target is
AIS12
displayed.

NOTE: For details about AIS-SART, refer to Section 6.5 "DISPLAY OF AIS-
SART".

AIS-SART function is available in the display software ver. 01.01.

As for method of confirming software version, refer to Section 8.3.1.6
"System Information".

5－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

• Up to 300 targets can be displayed in total of activated and sleeping AIS

targets. Up to 100 activated AIS targets can be included in the total.
• If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are displayed
in the following priority order:
1. Numeric displayed target
2. Target of which CPA / TCPA is lower than the set
value(Target as a dangerous ship for which an alarm
has occurred)
3. Target in automatic activation zone
4. Activated AIS target
5. Target inside AIS filter
6. Target outside AIS filter

• If the number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable
maximum, they are displayed in the following priority order:
1. Association target
2. Activated AIS target
3. Sleeping AIS target 5
The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over
water, depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting. The type
of the currently displayed vector can be confirmed by viewing the setting of the
stable mode.

When GND is displayed for Vector over ground

the stability mode (Upper left of
the display on page 2-3):

When Sea is displayed for Vector over water

the stability mode (Upper left of
the display on page 2-3):

When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water, the system
has converted the AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water
according to the data received from the AIS and the own ship's information.
When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not
NOTE: displayed, the following are probable causes of the trouble:

• COG/SOG is not yet input from the GPS.

• The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning.

5－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.2.3 Types and Definitions of Association Target Symbols

When a tracked target and an AIS target are decided as identical, it is displayed
with either of the following symbols:

Vector/ Definition Remarks

Symbol

Priority for tracked target

Association target

Priority for AIS target

Association target

a. Setting of Tracked Target Symbol Display

This function switches the tracking target symbol display between on and
off.Even if the tracking target symbol display is turned off, the data is retained.

Procedures
1) Left-click the button in the Target Information located at the
upper right of the display.
The tracking target symbol display will be set to on or off.

5－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

b. Setting of AIS Target Symbol Display

This function switches the AIS target symbol display between on and off.

Procedures
1) Left-click the button in the Target Information located at the
upper right of the display.
The AIS target symbol display will be set to on or off.

5.1.3 Radar Display

5.1.3.1 Vector Display

A vector to represent a target’s predicted position can be presented in the True
vector or Relative vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be freely
changed for a time interval of 1 to 60 minutes.

To switch between the true vector mode and relative vector mode, press the [T/R
VECT] key. 5
5.1.3.2 Vector Mode Selection
[1] True Vector Mode

In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of
the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.

In this mode, own ship's vector is displayed as shown Fig 5-4.

In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and
easily monitored.

However, CPA Ring cannot appear in this mode.

Own ship’s position HL

True vector

The relative vector is

not displayed

Fig 5-4: True Vector

5－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

[2] Relative Vector Mode

The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative
relation with own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed to
own ship (passing through the CPA Limit ring) will be a dangerous target. In the
Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA Limit of the
dangerous target is.

Therefore, the True / Relative mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of
observation: the True vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target, and the
Relative vector mode for grasping a target’s closest point of approach (CPA).
HL

The true vector is

not displayed

CPA ring

Relative vector

Fig 5-5: Relative Vector

5.1.3.3 Vector Length (Vector Time)

The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can
be switched in a range of 1 to 60 minutes.

The diagram below illustrates a vector length of a target for 6 minutes, and the tip
of the vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later.
HL

Future predicted position

(6 min later in this example)
Current position

Fig 5-6: Vector Length

Refer to Section 5.1.6 "Setting Vectors (Vector Time)".

5 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor)

5.1.4.1 Types and Functions of Cursor Modes

The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below. To use the function of a
cursor mode, move the cursor onto the PPI object and left-click.

Mode Function

ACQ TT Enables the target tracking function to acquire a target in manual

mode.

ACT AIS Activates AIS targets, and sets a point filter.

TGT Data Displays the numeric data of a tracking target or AIS target.

CNCL TT

DEACT AIS
Cancels a tracking target.

Deactivates AIS target. 5

Data CNCL Hides the displayed numeric data of a tracked target or AIS target.

Mark Puts a temporary mark.

Property Displays the information of tracked targets, AIS targets, and marks.

AUTO Changes operation in accordance with the object at the cursor

position.

5.1.4.2 Change of Cursor Mode

Procedures
1) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the
display. Alternatively, on the PPI, right-click and select a desired
cursor mode from the list.
The selected cursor mode will be shown at the cursor mode (Upper right of the display on
page 2-4).

If the function of a selected cursor mode is not used for one

i minute or more, the cursor mode is automatically changed to
AUTO .

5－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.4.3 Operation of AUTO Mode

As shown below, the AUTO mode performs operation in accordance with the
object at the cursor position when left-clicked.

The AUTO mode permits to access that you want by intuitive operation.

Object at Cursor Position Operation

None Acquires a target.

EBL EBL operation.

VRM VRM operation.

Intersection point of EBL Performs EBL operation and VRM operation at

and VRM the same time.

Parallel index line Operates the parallel index line.

Tracked target Displays the numeric data of the tracked target.

Tracked target with Hides the numeric data.

numeric data displayed

Sleeping AIS target Activates the AIS target.

Activated AIS target Displays the AIS target information.

AIS target with numeric Hides the AIS target information.

data displayed

Automatic acquisition / Operates the automatic acquisition / activation

activation zone zone.

AIS filter Operates the AIS filter zone.

5 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• Set the optimum values of collision decision

conditions, depending upon vessel type, water area,
weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the
relations between those conditions and alarms, refer
to Section 5.5 "ALARM DISPLAY". )

5.1.5.1 Input of CPA Limit

Procedures
1) Left-click the CPA limit setting button in the Target Information
located at the upper right of the display.
The CPA Limit value input screen will appear.

2) Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit. 5

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

5.1.5.2 Input of TCPA Limit

Procedures
1) Left-click the TCPA limit setting button in the Target Information
located at the upper right of the display.
The TCPA Limit value input screen will appear.

2) Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit.

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

5.1.5.3 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring)

While the distance of the specified CPA Limit value is used as the radius, the CPA
ring is displayed with a red circle.

Procedures
1) Left-click the CPA Ring button located at the lower right of the
display.
The CPA ring will be displayed.

The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is
NOTE: selected.

5 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION

5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time)

Vector time can be set in minutes in the range 1 to 60 min.

A true vector mode or relative vector mode can be selected.

5.1.6.1 Setting vector time on the display (Vector)

Procedures
1) Left-click the target vector time setting button in the Target
Information located at the lower right of the display.
The Vector Time value input screen will appear.

2) Enter the value to be set as vector time.

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

5.1.6.2 Setting vector mode [T/R VECT]

Procedures
1) Press the [T/R VECT] key.
The current vector mode T (true vector) or R (relative vector) will be displayed in the
target vector display true / relative switching in Target Information located at the upper right
of the display.

5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location

Set the GPS antenna location. Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and
latitudinal direction from the own ship's reference position.

For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)".

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• If offset ranges are not set correctly, AIS symbols

and radar echoes may be displayed shifted.
• When offset ranges are set, latitude and longitude
data received from the GPS is offset, and the offset
data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of
own ship’s position.

5 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

This section explains how to use the target tracking function.

The target tracking function automatically tracks a target, and displays the target's
course and speed as vectors. The target tracking function calculates CPA and
TCPA, and issues an alarm as needed.

The tracking data is erased from memory when the power is turned off or during
transmission standby.

5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ]

Target acquisition can be performed on two modes, Automatic and Manual, and
both modes can be used at the same time.

5.2.1.1 Automatic acquisition

If the number of targets being tracked has reached the
5
NOTE: allowable maximum and other targets (not being tracked) go
into the acquisition/activation zone, automatically acquired
targets are canceled in ascending order of danger.

The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth

or range in the acquisition/activation zone.

[1] Turning On / Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation (AZ Menu)

Procedures
1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations.

AZ

The AZ Menu will appear.

2) Left-click the item button of 1. AZ1 or 2. AZ2 .

The acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone 2 (AZ2) will be set
to on or off.

:The acquisition / activation zone is turned on. The mark

On
12and target ID number are put to an acquired target and
move with the target. The vectors are displayed within 1
minute. AIS targets are activated.

:The acquisition/activation zone is turned off. The

Off
acquisition/activation zone will disappear from the radar
display, but the system continues to track the acquired
target. The activated AIS targets remain activate.

5 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

[2] Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone (Make AZ)

Procedures
1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations.

AZ

The AZ Menu will appear.

3. Make AZ 1 4. Make AZ 2
2) Left-click the item button of or .
The range setting of the acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone
2 (AZ2) will be started.

3) Set the starting azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.

4) Set the ending azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.
The acquisition / activation zone will be determined.

5.2.1.2 Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]

If more targets are acquired manually in the condition that the
NOTE: maximum number of targets are under tracking, the targets
cannot acquired.

Procedures
1) Move the cursor onto the target to be acquired, and press the
[ACQ MANUAL] key.
The target will be acquired and the initial acquisition symbol will be displayed.

The vector will be displayed within one minute.

Target manually acquired .
The initial acquisition symbol is displayed .

Target that has passed for 1 min.

The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed .

To perform operation only in the manual acquisition mode without automatic acquisition/
activation, turn off the automatic acquisition/activation function.

5 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

[1] Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes

Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on.

Manually acquire the target to which particular attention should be paid, and get
the other targets automatically acquired. If a new target appears exceeding the
maximum number of targets, the manually acquired target is displayed even in the
background until it gets out of the display. However, automatically acquired
targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship.

5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL]

Unwanted tracked targets can be canceled one by one in the following cases:

• Tracking is no longer necessary for targets with which vectors/symbols are

displayed after being acquired and tracked.

5
• The number of vectors on the radar display needs to be reduced for easy
observation.
When targets are to be re-acquired from the beginning, all the current vectors can
also be canceled.

5.2.2.1 Canceling targets one by one [ACQ CANCEL]

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for canceling
target, and press the [ACQ CANCEL] key.
The vectors and symbols of the tracked targets will disappear, and only the radar video
remain.

5.2.2.2 Canceling all targets collectively [ACQ CANCEL]

Procedures
1) Press the [ACQ CANCEL] key for 5 seconds.
The vectors and symbols of all the targets will disappear, and only the radar videos remain.

When all the targets have been canceled, the system stops
NOTE: tracking them. Thus, you need to re-acquire targets in manual
or automatic acquisition mode. Do not cancel all the targets
unless otherwise required.

5 － 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]

　　　　　　　　
Attention

When a target or own ship changes its course, or

when a new target is acquired, its vector may not
reach a given level of accuracy until 3 minutes or
more has passed after such course change or target
acquisition.
Even if 3 minutes or more has passed, the vector
may include an error depending upon the tracking
conditions.

5.2.3.1 Type of Data Display (Target Information)

Target Data
Target identification (TT ID) ID number of the target
True bearing(BRG) 0.1° unit
Range 0.01NM unit
Cource 0.1° unit
Speed 0.1knot unit
Closest point of approach 0.01NM unit
(CPA)
Time to CPA (TCPA) 0.1min unit
Bow crossing range (BCR) 0.01NM unit
Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1min unit

The target for which its numeric data is displayed is marked with a symbol 12

to distinguish from other targets.

If a target's data is displayed, but without the symbol 12

, such a target exists
outside the currently displayed radar display.

5.2.3.2 Method of Displaying Numeric Data [TGT DATA]

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to
be displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key.
Then, the data of the designated target will appear, it will be marked with a symbol 12
.
The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its vector
disappears, or until another target is designated.

If a target with the mark 12 is designated, only its true bearing and range will appear until
its vector appears.

5 － 18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.3.3 Cancellation of Numeric Data Display (CNCL Data)

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target with which numeric data is
displayed, and right-click.
The cursor mode list will appear.

2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data button.

The numeric value will disappear.

5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display)

A target ID number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a
target is acquired.

A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in acquisition order. Once a

target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or the 5
target acquisition is canceled.

Procedures
1) Open the TT Menu by following menu operation.

TT

4. Target Number Display

2) Left-click the item button of
Target Number Display will appear.

3) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the display method to

be set.

On : Displays target ID numbers.

Off : Hides target ID numbers.

Target Track : Displays target ID number with target track.

If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily.

An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which

i numeric data is displayed.

5 － 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name)

The system can enter a name for each of tracking targets that have been acquired.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click.
The cursor mode list will appear.

2) Left-click 8. Property

The Property will appear.

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Name .

The setting items for ship name (Name) will be displayed.

4) Select the input method.

Data Base :Selection of one of previously input ship

names.When this method is selected, a list of ship
names that have been input by selecting Input
will be displayed.

Input :Input of a new ship name. When this method is

selected, the ship name (Name) input window will
open.

5.2.5.1 Entering a new ship name (Input)

5) Input a new ship name.

Up to 8 characters can be input as a ship name.For the input method on the character input
screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".

The input name by selecting Input is saved in Data Base .

5.2.5.2 Selecting one of previously input ship names (Data Base)

5) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the ship name to be

selected.
The selected ship name will be entered.

Data Base can contain 30 ship names.

i

5 － 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference)

The system can display the own ship's speed. To do so, it sets a reference target by
tracking a target for which ground fixed.

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• The reference target function is to be used if the own ship's

speed cannot be displayed normally due to trouble such as a
speed sensor malfunction. Do not use the reference target
function except in emergencies.
• If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new
reference target is set, the displayed speed may take 3 minutes or
more to reach the specified speed after the speed / course
change or the setting.
• Even after 3 minutes or more has passed, the speed may differ
from the specified speed depending on the tracking condition.
5
• If a large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference
target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not
be displayed correctly and may cause an accident.
• If a sailing ship is set as a reference target, the vectors of the
speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly
and may cause an accident.
• If the REF. is selected for the speed sensor, the AIS function
cannot be turned on.
• If the reference target is lost or the target tracking function is
stopped, the speed sensor is placed in manual mode MAN .
• The loss of a reference target may have a major impact on the
accuracy of the results for true speed and true course of the
target and that own speed will be degraded.
• The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true
speed.

Procedures
1) Tracking a target for which ground fixed.

2) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click.

The cursor mode list will appear.

5 － 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

3) Left-click 8. Property

The Property will appear.

4) Left-click the item button of 3. Reference

The reference target function will be set to on or off.

On :A reference target is set.

Off :The reference target is canceled.

5) Left-click the speed sensor switching button in the Own Ship

Information located at the upper right of the display, and select
REF. .

The speed of own ship calculated from the reference target will be displayed.

When a reference target is set, the symbol display is changed to .

R
Only one target can be set as a reference target.When a new reference target is set, the
previously set reference target is canceled.

5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu)

This function is provided to test if the target tracking

function is operating normally. Thus, do not use the
function except when you test the target tracking
function.
In particular, if the operation test mode is used during
navigation, pseudo targets appear on the radar display
and they are confused with actual targets.
Do not use the mode during navigation. Otherwise, an
accident may result.

The following functions are available for testing the target tracking function:

Test Video Makes an operation check on the target detection circuit.

TT Simulator Generates pseudo targets on the radar display in order to test

if the target tracking function is operating normally.

Status Displays the status of the target tracking function.

Gate Display Displays the gate size for acquiring / tracking a target.

5 － 22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.7.1 Test Video (Test Video)

Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and
tracking are inputted to and processed in the target detection circuit normally.

However, it is sufficient to check that VDH in Test Video is displayed.

Test Video may not be displayed for a target which is not yet
NOTE: acquired or tracked. Test Video may not be displayed either if
the [GAIN] dial or [SEA] dial is not properly adjusted.

Procedures
1) Open the TT test menu by following menu operation.

TT

→ 9. TT Test Menu

2) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video

The setting items for Test Video will be displayed.

.
5
3) Select the test video to be displayed.
In general, VDH is sufficient for target display checks in test video mode.

If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not

i displayed in the Test Video mode, the target detection circuit of
the Target Tracking unit may have a trouble.

Cancel
1) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video while the TT Test Menu is
displayed.
The setting items for Test Video will be displayed.

2) Left-click Off button.

The test video display will be turned off.

5 － 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.7.2 Target Tracking Simulator (Target Tracking Simulator)

Pseudo targets can be generated in certain known positions to check whether the
target tracking units are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move
depending on known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be
compared with the known value if the pseudo targets are acquired and tracked,
and displayed. Thus, it can be checked if the system is operating normally.

Procedures
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting.
The equipment will enter the transmission standby state.

2) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu

operation.

TT

→ 9. TT Test Menu

3) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator .

The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed.

4) Select the scenario to be set.

The TT Simulator display will be turned on.

5) Press the [TX/STBY] key to transmit.

When the TT simulator is active, the character " X " will display at the bottom of the radar
display.

Target tracking simulator / scenario

Scenario Target start point Target end point Pseudo-target

speed
Distance Bearing Distance Bearing

1 3.2NM 20° 1NM 90° 20kn

2 6NM 0° 0NM 0° 10kn

3 6NM 18° every 1NM 18° every 10kn

4 6NM 45° 1NM 45° 105kn

5 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kn

6 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kn

When the simulator is operating, set 0° as the heading bearing,

i and 0 kn as the speed of own ship.When the range between
own ship and the pseudo target is 0, the target will disappear.

5 － 24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

Exit
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting.
The equipment will enter the transmission standby state.

2) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator while the TT Test

Menu is displayed.
The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed.

3) Left-click Off .
The TT Simulator display will be turned off.

5
5.2.7.3 Status display (Status)
The current Target Tracking status will appear.

Procedures
1) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu
operation.

TT

→ 9. TT Test Menu

2) Left-click the item button of 3. Status .

The setting items for Status will be displayed.

*Constant : Vector response

*VID Level TD : Threshold value used for automatic acquisition

*VID Level HIGH : Threshold value used for tracking
*VID Level LOW : Unused

*Gate Size : Size of gate used for tracking

*Tracking : Number of targets currently acquired

5 － 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION

5.2.7.4 Gate Display

The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the Target Tracking function.
This radar equipment allows the gate size to change automatically according to
target range and size. User can check the gate size using the following function.

Procedures
1) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu
operation.

TT

→ 9. TT Test Menu

2) Left-click the item button of 4. Gate Display .

The gate display mode is switched.

On : Gate is displayed

Off : Gate is not displayed

3) Display the numeric value of a target according to Section 5.2.3

"Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]" .
The numeric value of the target will be displayed, and the tracked target symbol will be
enclosed in a green gate.

The Target Tracking can display the gate of two targets

i simultaneously.

Tracked Target symbol Vector

Echo Gate (displayed in green )

5 － 26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3.1 Restrictions
The following restrictions are placed on use of the AIS function.

The AIS function is unavailable in the following cases:

• MAN or REF. is selected for the speed sensor.

• The current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is set while LOG or 2AXW is selected
for the speed sensor.
• The GPS geodetic system is used except WGS-84.

LOG or 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
• The AIS function is turned on and the current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is
selected. 5
MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
• The AIS function is On.

Current offset (Set/Drift Setting) cannot be turned On in the following case:

• LOG or 2AXW is selected for the speed sensor while the AIS function is on.

5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function)

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• When the AIS function is set to Off, the AIS display

function is turned off and AIS symbols are no longer
displayed.
• Once the AIS display function is set to Off, it is not
automatically switched to On even if a dangerous
target exists.

Procedures
1) Press the [AIS/TT] key. Alternatively, left-click the AIS button
in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display.
The received AIS information will be shown on the radar display.

5 － 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS)

Activate an AIS target, and display the target’s vector and make a collision
decision.

5.3.3.1 Manual activation (ACT AIS)

Activate an AIS target in manual mode to display the vector and heading line.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS symbol to be activated, and right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.

2) Left-click 2. ACT AIS .

The selected AIS target will be activated.

5.3.3.2 Automatic activation

Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line.

When the automatic activation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when
they go into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the
automatic acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to
Section 5.2.1 "Acquiring Target [ACQ]"

The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition/
activation zone.

If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are deactivated in the low-
priority (See the Section 5.1.2 "Definitions of Symbols").

If an AIS target is activated but the vector is not displayed, refer

i to Section 5.3.6 "Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number
Display)".

5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS)

Deactivate an AIS target and clear the display of the vector and heading line.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS target to be deactivated, and right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.

2) Left-click 5. DEACT AIS

The selected AIS target will be deactivated.

This operation is available only for an activated AIS target.

i

5 － 28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA]

5.3.5.1 Types of information displayed

There are two modes (simple and detail) to display AIS target information. The
display items are determined by the selected mode.

Display Itemi Detail mode Simple mode

NAME (ship name) Up to 20 characters
Call Sign Up to 7 characters
MMSI Up to 9 characters
COG (course over ground) or CTW (course through water) 0.1° unit
SOG (speed over ground) or STW (speed through water) 0.1kn unit
ii
CPA (closest point of approach) 0.01NM unit
TCPA (time to CPA) 0.1min unit
BRG (true bearing) 0.1° unit Not
displayed
Range 0.01NM unit
HDG (heading bearing)
ROT (rate of turn)iii
0.1° unit
0.01° /min 5
POSN (latitude / longitude) 0.0001' unit
Destination (waypoint) Up to 20
characters
NAV Status Status (number)
i. The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display the
numeric data of up to two ships.
ii. If the numeric information of SOG or STW is 102.2kn, the target ship's speed is 102.2kn or over.
Then the system cannot calculate CPA and TCPA. Therefore, missing is indicated in the CPA and
TCPA information.
iii. If the numeric information of ROT is blank, the radar is receiving the AIS data which is cannot dis-
played. In this case, you can only trust the turning direction which is indicated by the turn indicator.
The turn indicator is displayed on the AIS symbol as the line perpendicular to the heading direc-
tion. (See the Section 5.1.2.2 "Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols")

The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display
the numeric data of up to two ships.

For NAV Status, one of the following statuses is displayed in accordance with
Navigation Status:

No. Status
0 Under Way Using Engine
1 at Anchor
2 Not Under Command
3 Restricted Manoeuvrability
4 Constrained by Her Draft
5 Moored
6 Aground
7 Engaged in Fishing
8 Under Way Sailing

5 － 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11-14 Reserved
15 Not Defined

5.3.5.2 Displaying AIS Target Information [TGT DATA]

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS target of which information is to be
displayed , and press the [TGT DATA] key.
The information of the selected AIS target will be displayed.

When the numeric data of a target is displayed but the mark

i is not on the radar display, the target is outside the
AIS12

display.

5.3.5.3 Canceling AIS Target Information Display (CNCL Data)

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the activated AIS target of which information
display is to be cancelled, and right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.

2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data .

The information display of the selected AIS target will be cleared.

5.3.5.4 Selecting Detail / Simple Mode for AIS Target Information Display
Procedures
1) Left-click the □ or ＿ button in the Digital Information located
at the center right of the display.
The detail or simple mode display for AIS target information will be selected.

5.3.5.5 Message
Received AIS messages can be displayed.

Up to 10 messages of addressed message and up to 10 messages of broadcast message can be

displayed.

If the number of messages exceeds 10, the oldest received messages are sequentially deleted.

[1] Displaying Message Selected from List (Message)

5 － 30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

Procedures
1) Open the Message menu by performing the following menu
operation.

AIS

→ 9. TT Test Menu

2) Left-click Addressed Message or Broadcast Message .

Addressed messages list or broadcast messages list are displayed.

Each list shows ship names and message-received time.

For an unread message, * is displayed to the left of the item number.

3) Left-click the item button to display the message.

5
The message will appear.

[2] Displaying Specified Target's Message

Procedures
1) Display AIS target information.
If there are messages from the target, a message mark will be displayed in the Digital
Information located at the center right of the display.

2) Left-click the unread message display button in the Digital

Information located at the center right of the display.
The message will appear.

[3] Deleting Message (Delete)

Procedures
1) Left-click 1. Delete while the message is displayed.
The Confirmation Window will appear.

2) Left-click 1. Yes to delete the message.

The message will be deleted, and the ship name and message-received time will disappear
from the list.

5 － 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3.5.6 Displaying Data of Lost AIS Target (Display Lost TGT Data)
The data of the last-lost AIS target can be displayed.

The data of only one target that has been lost most recently can be displayed.

Procedures
1) Open the Display Lost Target Data menu by performing the
following menu operation.

AIS

→ 8. Display Lost Target Data

The data of the last-lost AIS target will be displayed.

5.3.5.7 Displaying Own Ship's AIS Data (Own Ship's AIS Data)
The AIS data of own ship can be displayed.

Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship's AIS Data menu by performing the following
menu operation.

AIS

→ 9. Own Ship’s AIS Data

The own ship's AIS data will be displayed.

5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display)

When an AIS target is activated, a target ID number is displayed next to the AIS
target symbol.

A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in activation order. Once a

target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or
deactivated.

Procedures
1) Open the Target Number Display menu by performing the
following menu operation.

5 － 32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

AIS

→ 4. AIS Filter Setting

2) Left-click the item button corresponding to the display method to

be set.

On : Displays target ID numbers.

Off : Hides target ID numbers.

Target Track : Displays target ID number with AIS track.

Ship’s Name : Displays the ship's name.

If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily.

An ID number or ship's name is always displayed for only

i targets with which numeric value is displayed.

5
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)

5.3.7.1 About an AIS filter

By setting an AIS filter, an AIS target in the area can be displayed by priority or
only the targets in the area can be displayed. An AIS filter is initially set in a circle
having a radius of 20 [nm] from the CCRP. If 301 or more AIS targets exist in the
filter range, they are displayed in the priority order explained in Section 5.1.2
"Definitions of Symbols".

5.3.7.2 Types of AIS Filters (Filter Type)

There are the following 3 types of AIS filters:

Range : A filter is set in a circle with a set range as the radius.

Sector : A filter is set in a sector formed by two bearings with the

bow as reference.

Zone : A filter is set in a zone formed by two bearings and two

ranges with the bow as reference.

5 － 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

Procedures
1) Left-click the AIS filter mode switching in Target Information
located at the upper right of the display, and select the filter to be
set.
The AIS filter will be selected.

5.3.7.3 Creation of AIS Filter (Make AIS Filter)

Procedures
1) Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.

AIS

→ 4. AIS Filter Setting

2) Left-click 2. Make AIS Filter .

The mode to make an AIS filter will be activated.

[1] Setting Range Filter

3) Set a filter range by turning the [VRM] dial, and left-click.

[2] Setting Sector Filter

3) Set a starting bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click.

4) Set an ending bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click.

[3] Setting Zone Filter

3) Set a starting bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.

5 － 34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

4) Set an ending bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.

When the automatic activation function is enabled, the filter

i range is automatically changed for covering the automatic
activation zone. Thus, the automatic activation zone is always
within the filter range.

5.3.7.4 AIS Filter Display On/Off (Filter Display)

Procedures
1) Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.

AIS

→ 4. AIS Filter Setting

2) Left-click the item button of 3. Filter Display .

5
Filter Display will be set to on or off.

5.3.7.5 Display of Targets outside AIS Filter (Filter Mode)

Procedures
1) Open the Filter Mode menu by performing the following menu
operation.

AIS

→ 4. AIS Filter Setting

2) Left-click the item button of 6. Filter Mode .

Display : Displays only AIS targets in the AIS filter.

Priority : Displays AIS targets in the AIS filter by priority, and also
displays targets outside the AIS filter.

Activated AIS targets can be displayed even when they are

i outside the AIS filter.

5 － 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3.7.6 Point Filter

AIS targets which are not displayed because they are outside the AIS filter or at
low priority levels can be activated by giving a higher priority to them.

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the position where a point filter is to be set,
and right-click to select the filter to be set.

2) The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.Left-click 2. ACT AIS .
A point filter will be set at the cursor position.
If an AIS target is in the point filter, it will be activated.
When an AIS target is activated or an AIS target is not found within one minute, the point
filter will be cleared.

The point filter's range is 1 nm, and cannot be changed.

i

5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

About a lost target

When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target
is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted. As shown in the table below,
the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of receive data
and the target status.

Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

Target status Time until data deletion
SOLAS ship (Class A) SOLAS ship (Class B)

Vessel below 3 knots (Class A) or 2 knots 18 min 18 min

(Class B) and it is now at anchor or on the berth
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at 60 sec 18 min
anchor or on the berth
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots (Class B: 0 to 14 knots) 60 sec 180 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots 36 sec 180 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec 180 sec
SAR (Search and Rescue) 60 sec 60 sec
ATON (Aid to Navigation) 18 min 18 min
Base Station 60 sec 60 sec

When a dangerous target ship is lost, a lost alarm is issued and the symbol
i changes to a lost symbol. The lost symbol will display continuously on the
last-received position.

If the [ALARM ACK] key is pressed, the symbol is cleared.

5 － 36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION

5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting)

Conditions for issuing a Lost alarm and CPA/TCPA alarm for AIS targets can be
set.

5.3.9.1 Setting of Condition for Lost Alarm

Procedures
1) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.

AIS

→ 6. AIS Alarm Setting

2) Left-click the item button of 1. Lost Alarm .

The setting items for Lost Alarm will be displayed.

3) Left-click the item button corresponding to the condition to be

5
set.

Off : A lost alarm is not issued.i

Danger : A lost alarm is issued only for AIS targets for which a dangerous
target alarm has been issued.
ACT&Danger : A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets and AIS
targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued.
ACT&Danger&Select : A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets, data
indicated AIS targets and AIS targets for which a dangerous
target alarm has been issued.

i. A lost alarm is not issued for sleeping AIS targets.

5.3.9.2 Setting of Condition for CPA/TCPA Alarm

Procedures
1) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.

AIS

→ 6. AIS Alarm Setting

2) Left-click the item button of CPA/TCPA Alarm .

The setting items for CPA/TCPA Alarm is switched.

Off : A CPA/TCPA alarm is not issued.i

ACT : A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets.
ACT&Sleep : A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued for all AIS targets on the radar
display.
i. When the Lost Alarm menu set to Off, the CPA ring color changes to dark color.

5 － 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
(Association)

5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS

IDENTICAL (Association)

5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical

(Association)
When an AIS target and a tracking target are decided to be identical, an
association symbol is displayed for the targets regarded as identical. In this case,
the AIS target symbol is automatically activated.

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• Turn off Association in order not to make a decision

on if targets are identical, or in order to display
symbols that have disappeared.

Procedures
1) Left-click the Association in Target Information located at the
upper right of the display.
Association will be set to on or off.

5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets

as Identical (Association Setting)
Procedures
1) Open the Association Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.

AIS

→ 1. Association Setting

The Association Setting menu will appear.

2) Select and enter the item to be set.

Conditions for deciding targets as identical will be set. When the differences of all item
between AIS and tracked target are under the set conditions..

5 － 38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
(Association)

Once regard as identical, when one of the differences exceed 125% of the set condition, they
are regarded as dissidence.

The setting for this function is common to Association Setting in

i the AIS Menu.

5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set

Decision conditions

1. Association On / Off (Function to decide targets as

identical)

2. Priority AIS / TT (Symbol to be displayed)

3. Bearing 0.0 ～ 9.9°

5
4. Range 0 ～ 999m
5. Cource 0 ～ 99°
6. Speed 0 ～ 99kn
7.Applicable AIS Target ACT or ACT&Sleep (activated AIS target or
all AIS target)

If a great value is set as a condition for deciding

targets as identical, a tracking target near an AIS target
is regarded as identical to the AIS target and it may not
be displayed any more.
For example, when a pilot boat (which is a small target
not being tracked) equipped with an AIS function
approaches a cargo ship as a tracking target not
equipped with an AIS function, the tracking target
symbol of the cargo ship may not be displayed any
more.

5 － 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY

5.5 ALARM DISPLAY

Critical alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AIS functions:

Error message Description

CPA/TCPA There is a dangerous target. See also Section 5.5.1.

Alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AIS functions:

Error message Description
CPA/TCPA There is a dangerous target.
New Target A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.
Lost There is a lost target.
REF Target The accuracy of the reference target may be decreased.
95% Capacity The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking
function has reached 95% of the maximum.
MAX Target The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking
function has reached the maximum.
AIS 95% Capacity The number of displayed AIS target symbols has reached 95%
of the maximum.
AIS MAX Target The number of received data items exceeds the maximum
number of AIS target symbols that can be displayed.
AIS ACT 95% Capacity The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has
reached 95% of the maximum.
AIS ACT MAX The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has
reached the maximum.
AIS Alarm *** Alarm information issued with the ALR sentence by the AIS.
*** is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR
sentence. See below.
AIS Alarm 001 Tx malfunction
AIS Alarm 002 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit
AIS Alarm 003 Rx channel 1 malfunction
AIS Alarm 004 Rx channel 2 malfunction
AIS Alarm 005 Rx channel 70 malfunction
AIS Alarm 006 general failure
AIS Alarm 008 MKD connection lost
AIS Alarm 025 external EPFS lost
AIS Alarm 026 no sensor position in use
AIS Alarm 029 no valid SOG information
AIS Alarm 030 no valid COG information
AIS Alarm 032 Heading lost/invalid
AIS Alarm 035 no valid ROT information

Error message and alarm are displayed in the lower right of the display.

See also Section 9.1.1 "List of Alarms and other Indications".

5 － 40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY

5.5.1 CPA / TCPA Alarm

Since these alarms may include some errors

depending on the target tracking conditions, the
navigation officer himself should make the final
decision for ship operations such as collision
avoidance.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the
alarm may cause accidents such as collisions.

In the system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked / activate AIS targets
and dangerous targets.

5
The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. So the
officer can easily decide which target he should pay attention to.

It is not possible to switch off the tracked target visual alarm, unless tracking is
ceased, or the alarm condition no longer applies.

The types of target and alarm are shown below.

CPA / TCPA Alarm

Status Symbol on A l a r m A l a r m Conditions

display characters sound

Tracked target (Off) (Off) ・CPA>CPA LIMIT

12 ・0>TCPA

Activated AIS ・TCPA>TCPA LIMIT

target
The symbol is displayed
when one of the above
conditions is met.
AIS12
Dangerous CPA/TCPA Beep ・CPA ≦ CPA LIMIT
target sound
12 (pee-poh) ・0 ≦TCPA≦ TCPA LIMIT
An alarm is issued when all
Red blinking Alarm the conditions are met.
acknowle
dgeable The AIS targets that issues
alarm refer to Section 5.3.9

AIS12

Red blinking

CPA Limit and TCPA Limit: The Setting Values

5 － 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY

5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition

Zone (New Target)

In setting an automatic acquisition zone, it is

necessary to adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression
and rain / snow clutter suppression to ensure that
target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions.
No automatic acquisition zone alarms will be issued
for targets undetected

The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm
when a new target (which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone.

For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone, refer to " Acquiring Target " in
Section 5.2.1.1 "Automatic acquisition".

Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone

Status Symbol on A l a r m Alarm sound Conditions

display characters

New target in New Target Beep sound The alarm is issued

automatic (pipi-pipi)
when a new target is
acquisition acquired in the
12 Alarm
zone automatic acquisition
acknowledge zone.
Red Blinking
able

When an already acquired target goes into automatic

i acquisition zone, the alarm message is not displayed and the
buzzer does not sound either.

5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost)

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• If the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter

suppression are not adjusted adequately, the lost
target alarm may be easily generated. So such
adjustments should be mad carefully.

5 － 42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY

When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the
data of AIS target cannot received for a specified time, the Lost Alarm
will be generated. The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below, but
not limited to the following:

• The target echo is very weak.

• The target is shadowed by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not received.
• The target echo is blurred by sea clutter returns.
If a target under tracking goes out of a range of 32 nm and can no longer be
tracked, it is canceled without a lost target alarm.

Lost Target Alarm

Status Symbol on Alarm Alarm Conditions

display characters sound

Lost Target Lost Beep sound The alarm will sound

Red Blinking
12
(pee)

Alarm
acknowledge
once when a lost
target symbol
displayed.
is 5
able

AIS12

Red Blinking

5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm

The GYRO I/F in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the power is
turned off, the system will follow up the gyro. However, the system stops the
follow-up operation when the power of the master gyro is turned off or when any
trouble occurs to the line. When the power of the master gyro is recovered, the
Set Gyro alarm will be generated.

If this alarm occurs, set the gyro.

Gyro Set Alarm

A l a r m Alarm sound Conditions

characters

Set Gyro Beep sound (pipi-pipi) The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the
gyro is recovered.

5 － 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN)

Procedures
1) Left-click the past position display interval unit switching button
in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display,
and set a desired unit.
The past position display interval unit will be set to min or NM .

2) Left-click the past position display interval switching button in

the Target Information located at the upper right of the display,
and set a desired track display interval.
The past position will be set.

Off : Tracks are not displayed.

Numeric : Tracks are displayed at intervals of a specified value.

The past position function

Past position Past position
Past position can display up to ten past
true / relative display interval display interval unit
positions of a target under
tracking. The past position
display interval can be set to
specified time intervals of
0.5, 1, 2, or 4 minutes, or
specified range intervals of
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1 nm.

The specified interval is displayed in the past position display interval switching
in Target Information located at the upper right of the display. When Off is
displayed, the track display function is turned off.

The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode, and a true or
relative track is displayed. In relative vector mode, the relative tracks of the target
are displayed. In true vector mode, true tracks that are calculated from the relative
bearing, range, own ship's course, and speed are displayed.

The target is acquisition, past position of traced target is start plot. The AIS target
is displayed, past position of AIS target is start plot.

If the past position plotted time is short, the indicated past position duration may
not have achieved the specified time or range.

5 － 44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track)

This function makes settings for the tracks of tracked targets and AIS targets.

The system can display the tracks of up to 20 target ships.

5.6.2.1 Track Color Setting (Target Track Color)

Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target or activated AIS target, and
right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.

2) Left-click Property .
The Property will appear.

3) Left-click the item button of 2. Track Color

The setting items for Track Color will be displayed.

.
5
4) Left-click the button corresponding to the track color to be set.
Colors set by performing the procedure in Section 5.6.2.3 "Setting of Target Ship's Track
Colors (Target Track Color)" can be selected.

Individual colors can be set for up to 10 ships. The same color is set for 11 to 20 ships.

5.6.2.2 Target Ship's Track Function On/Off (Target Track Function)

Procedures
1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

2) Left-click the item button of 1. Target Track Function .

The Target Track Function will be set to on or off.

On : Target Track Function is turned on.

Off : Target Track Function is turned off.

Note that when this function is turned off, all the other ship's
i track functions are turned off. In this case, the track data of
other ships is not saved, so they cannot be traced later.

5 － 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

5.6.2.3 Setting of Target Ship's Track Colors (Target Track Color)

You can set either one track color for all targets under tracking, or individual
colors for the ships of track numbers 1 to 10. The tracks of ships 11 to 20 are
displayed in the same color.
If the other ship's track function (Target Track Function) is
i turned off, the track data of other ships is not saved.

Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 2. Target Track Color

→ 1. All

The setting items for All will be displayed.

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the track display to be set.

Individual : Track color is set individually for ships.

color name : One color is set for all ships.

Individual setting

3) Left-click the button corresponding to the track number to be set.

The setting items for the selected track number will be displayed.

4) Left-click the button corresponding to the track color to be set.

The track color of the selected track number will be set.

When Individual is selected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 to No.10 and
the individual setting for Other are valid. Select a color for each target.

The color list is displayed by left-clicking the button corresponding to the item
number to be set. Select a desired color. There are 8 color choices: Off ,
White , Gray , Blue , Green , Yellow , Pink , and Red .

Target Track No.1 ～ No.10 : Setting for 1 to 10 ships

Other : Setting for 11 to 20 ships

Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual

i is selected.

5 － 46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

5.6.2.4 Setting of Target Ship's Track Display (Target Track Display)

The target track display function can be turned on / off. Choices for track display
are displaying / hiding the tracks of all ships and Individual (displaying the tracks
of individual ships).

Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Display menu by performing the following
menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 3. Target Track Display

→ 1. All

The setting items for All will be displayed.

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the track display to be set.

Individual : Track display is set for individual ships.

5
Off : The tracks of all ships are hidden.

On : The tracks of all ships are displayed.

Even when Target Track Display is turned off, the track data of
i other ships is saved if Track Memory Interval is set.

Individual setting

3) Left-click the button corresponding to the track number to be set.

The selected track number display will be set to on or off.

On :The track number display is turned on.

Off :The track number display is turned off.

When Individual is selected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 to No.10 and
the individual setting for Other are valid. Select on / off for each target.

Target Track No.1 ～ No.10 : Setting for 1 to 10 ships

Other : Setting for 11 to 20 ships

Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual

i is selected.

5 － 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

5.6.2.5 Setting of Target Ship's Track Saving Interval (Track Memory Interval)
An interval for saving target ship's track data can be set.
This function is not available when the Target Track Function is
i turned off.

Procedures
1) Open the Track Memory Interval menu by performing the
following menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 4. Track Memory Interval

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the interval to be set.

Select an interval from the following:

Off/

3sec/5sec/10sec/30sec/

1min/3min/5min/10min/30min/60min/

1NM/3NM/5NM/10NM

5.6.2.6 Clear of Target Ship's Track (Clear Track)

The target ship's track can be cleared by setting a color or a track number.
If Card T.TRK Display is used, target ship's tracks displayed
i through the card cannot be cleared.

[1] Clear of Tracks by Setting Color (Clear Track Color)

Procedures
1) Open the Clear Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 5. Clear Track Color

The setting items for Clear Track Color will be displayed.

5 － 48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the color of the target

tracks to be cleared.
The Confirmation Window will appear.

3) Left-click 1. Yes to clear the track line.

All the tracks of the selected color will be cleared.
[2] Clear of Tracks by Setting Track Number (Clear Track Number)

Procedures
1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 6. Clear Track Number

The setting items for Clear Track Number will be displayed. 5

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the number of the tracks
to be cleared.
The Confirmation Window will appear.

3) Left-click 1. Yes to clear the track line.

The tracks of the selected number will be cleared.

5.6.2.7 Operation of Target Ship's Track Data Saved on Card (File

Operations)
Target ship's track data can be saved on a flash memory card and read from the
card.
Data can be saved to a flash memory card until the card
i becomes full, but the number of files that can be read and
displayed is limited to 64 in alphanumeric order. When the
number of files has reached 64, delete unnecessary files.

5 － 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

[1] Loading File (Load)

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 7. File Operations

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2.

4) Left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode to select Add or

Overwrite.

The setting item for Load Mode is switched between Add and
Overwrite .

When Add is selected, new data is added to the current data on the
card. When Overwrite is selected, new data is saved over the current data
on the card.

5) Left-click 3. Load .
Currently saved target ship's track data will be listed.

6) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded.

The Confirmation Window will appear.

7) Left-click 1. Yes to load the file.

The selected target track data will be loaded and shown on the radar display.

5 － 50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

[2] Saving File (Save)

Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 7. File Operations

3) Left-click the item button of

slot.
1. Select Card Slot to select a card
5
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2.

4) Left-click 4. Save .
The Input File Name menu will appear.

5) Input the file name to be saved.

Up to ten characters can be input as a file name.

For inputs to the characters input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". After
the input, the Confirmation Window will appear.

6) Left-click 1. Yes to save the file.

The currently displayed target track data will be saved.

5 － 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

[3] Erasing File (Erase)

Procedures
1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 7. File Operations

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card

slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2.

4) Left-click 5. Erase .
The Erase menu will appear.

Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed.

5) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be erased.

The Confirmation Window will appear.

6) Left-click 1. Yes to erase the file.

The selected target track data will be erased and the file name will disappear from the list.

5 － 52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION

[4] Displaying File (Card Target Track Display)

Procedures
1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.

2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.

TT

→ 2. Target Track Setting

→ 7. File Operations

3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card

slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2.
5
4) Left-click 6. Card T.TRK Display .
The Card T.TRK Display menu will appear.

Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed.

5) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be displayed.

The Confirmation Window will appear.

6) Left-click 1. Yes to display the T.TRK line.

The selected file will be highlighted, and the currently saved target track data will be
displayed.

Cancel
1) Open the Card T.TRK Display window.
The displayed file is highlighted.

2) Left-click the button corresponding to the displayed file.

The file will be deselected and returned to normal display.

5 － 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)

5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING

(Trial Maneuver)

　　　　　　　　
Attention

• Trial maneuvering is to simulate own ship’s course

and speed in the conditions that the course and
speed of a target ship are unchanged as they are.
As the situation is different from any actual ship
maneuvering, set values with large margins to CPA
Limit and TCPA Limit.

The trial maneuvering is the function of simulating own ship’s course and speed
for collision avoidance when a dangerous target appears. When the own ship's
course and speed are entered in manual mode, the trial maneuvering function
checks if pre-acquired or pre-activated targets are dangerous.

The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually:

Course: 360° (in 0.1° intervals) ............................................... [EBL] dial

Speed: 0 to 100kn (in 0.1kn step）........................................ [VRM] dial

5 － 54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)

5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode

In the True Vector mode, calculations are performed according to the values set
by Trial Speed, Trial Course and other features, and the result is displayed as a
bold-line that represents the change of own ship's vector as shown in the Fig 5-7
below (an example of the course changed to the right).

In this Fig 5-7, the dangerous target forward left becomes safe as a result of
simulation.

The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values
regardless of the result of simulation.

NORMAL
HL

5
Own ship’s vector

Dangerous target

TRIAL
HL

Route

Change of symbol
as a result of
T trial maneuver

Fig 5-7: True Vector Mode

5 － 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)

5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode

The result of Trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a
change in target vector. In the Fig 5-8 below (in the same conditions as in the True
Vector mode in the previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a
dangerous one because its vector is crossing the CPA RING.

NORMAL
HL

Dangerous target

CPA Ring

TRIAL
HL

Change of symbol
as a result of
trial maneuver

T
CPA Ring

Fig 5-8: Relative Vector Mode

The above Fig 5-8 shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as
shown in the figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the
symbol color is changed into “White”, a safe target.

Irrespective of the simulation results, the current CPA and TCPA values are shown
in the tracked target information just like when the true vector mode is active.

The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted-line.

Better information is provided by using relative motion and sea stabilization.

5 － 56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)

5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function

Procedures
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu
operation.

TT

→ 3. Trial Maneuver

2) Left-click the item button of 1. Trial Function .

The Trial Function will be set to on or off.

On : The trial maneuvering function is turned on.

Off : The trial maneuvering function is turned off.

When the Trial Function is active, the character " T " will display at the bottom of the radar
display.

3) Set values for Course by turning the [EBL] dial, and for Speed by
turning the [VRM] dial.
5
4) Set other characteristics.

Vector Time : Vector time (1 to 60 min)

Time to Maneuver : Time until trial maneuvering is started (0 to 30 min)

Own Ship Dynamic Trait : Dynamic trait of the own ship

→ Reach : Range from when steered to when the ship

beings to turn (0 to 2000 m)

→ Turn Radius : Turning radius (0.10 to 2.00 nm)

→ Acceleration : Acceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min)

→ Decceleration : Deceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min)

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.2 "Directly entering a numeric
value".

Dangerous target symbols are displayed in red and safe target symbols in white.

Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to on. If it is off, the vector time
i before trial maneuvering is displayed.

Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down immediately after the input.
The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship
between the current speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering.

If 0.0 kn/min is set for Acceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster
than the current speed, or for Deceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is
slower than the current speed, the system performs simulation on the assumption
that the speed is changed immediately after the time set for Time to Maneuver .

5 － 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)

Cancel
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following
menu operation.

TT

→ 3. Trial Maneuver

2) Left-click the item button of 1. Trial Function .

The Trial Function will be set to on or off.

Off ： The Trial Function will be set to off.

5 － 58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ...................................................6-1
6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET ...........................6-3
6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER ..............................6-5
6.4 FALSE ECHOES ....................................................................................6-9
6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART .......................................................................6-12
6.5.1 Display ...........................................................................................6-12
6.5.2 Numeric Display ............................................................................6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON

The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best
aid in maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the
radar displays after fully understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the
radar has. For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more
experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the
target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display.

The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in
open seas, to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to
measure own ship’s position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and
ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the position and
movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.

Various types of radar display will be explained below.

6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON

Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved
surface of the earth. The propagation varies with the property of the air layer
through which the radar beam propagates. In the normal propagation, the distance
(D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10% longer than the
distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following
6
formula:

D = 2.23 ( h 1 + h 2 ) [NM]

h1 : Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level

h2 : Height (m) of a target above sea level

Fig 6-2 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that
is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.

Earth

h2
h1 Radar Targets

Fig 6-1: RADAR wave with the horizon

6－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON

D[NM]

Height of Target
Height of RADAR Scanner Detective Range

Fig 6-2: Maximum detection range of a target

When the height of own ship’s scanner is 10 m for instance,

i. A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display
is required to have a height of 660 m or more.
ii. If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm.
However, the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the
radar display depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions,
that is, the radar range may increase or decrease depending upon those
conditions.

6－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE
TARGET

6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM

THE TARGET

The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size
of the target but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher
and larger target is not always higher in general.

In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of
the coast. If the coast has a very gentle slop, the echo from a mountain of the
inland appears on the radar display.(Fig 6-3) Therefore, the distance to the coast
line should be measured carefully.

Mountain displayed
on the radar display HL

Sea shore line not displayed

Fig 6-3: Sea shore line which is not displayed

Table 6-1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection
distance and the radar reflection cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type
and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good, the sea
state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by this table,
even on the same sea shore line, detection distance greatly differs depending on
the height of the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the
target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the
target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, weather, and radio
wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting distance of target.

6－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE
TARGET

Table 6-1： Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS
Type of target Height from Detection distance RCS [ m 2 ]
sea surface (NM)
(m)
X band S band X band S band

Sea shore line 60 20 20 50,000 50,000

Sea shore line 6 8 8 5000 5000

Sea shore line 3 6 6 2500 2500

SOLAS target ship (>5000GT) 10 11 11 50,000 30,000

SOLAS target ship (>500GT) 5 8 8 1800 1000

Small boat with IMO standard 4 5.0 3.7 7,5 0,5

compatible radar reflector

Marine buoy with corner 3,5 4.9 3.6 10 1

reflector

Standard marine buoy 3,5 4.6 3.0 5 0,5

10-meter small boat without 2 3.4 3.0 2,5 1,4

radar reflector

Waterway location beacon 1 2.0 1.0 1 0,1

Detection distance shown in the above table may greatly

i decrease depending on the shape of the target, sea state,
weather and radio wave propagation conditions.

6－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER

6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW

CLUTTER

In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land, radar video image
also includes unnecessary echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface
and reflection from rain and snow. Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea
clutter," and reflection from rain and snow is called "rain and snow clutter," and
those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function.

a. Sea clutter
Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar
display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as
waves become larger, image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter
far away is also displayed. When waves are large and the sea clutter level is high,
it is difficult to distinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity
is weak. Accordingly, it is necessary to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection
function. Table 6-2 shows the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size
of waves generated by wind and the radar's detection probability.
6
Table 6-2： Sea state and probability of target detection
S band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.4 NM)

RCS SS1 ～ 2 SS2 ～ 3 SS3 ～ 4 SS4 ～ 5

0.1m2 Vi V-Mii M-NViii

0.5 m2 V V V-M M-NV

1 m2 V V V V-M

X band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.7 NM)

RCS SS1 ～ 2 SS2 ～ 3 SS3 ～ 4 SS4 ～ 5

1m2 V-M M-NV

5 m2 V V-M M-NV

10 m2 V V V V-M

i. V: Detection probability of 80%

ii. M: Detection probability of 50%
iii. NV: Detection probability of less than 50%

6－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER

As shown in Table 6-2, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes
high and the waves become large. Table 6.2 reveals that detection probability
decreases from V (80 %) to NV (less than 50 %) as the number of SS increases.
Therefore, even if the sea state is calm and a target clearly appears on the radar
display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection probability decreases
resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar.
Table 6-3： Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant
wave height
Sea state Average wind Significant wave
speed (kn) height (m)i

0 <4 <0,2

1 5-7 0,6

2 7-11 0,9

3 12-16 1,2

4 17-19 2,0

5 20-25 3,0

6 26-33 4,0

i. Significant wave height: an average of top N/3 higher waves when

the number of waves detected within a constant time duration is N

For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5 m2
as shown in Table 6-1. When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in
which significant wave height exceeds 1.2 meters, detection probability is M-NV,
as shown in Table 6-2, which indicates 50 % or less.

b. Rain and snow clutter

Rain and snow clutter is a video image that appears in a location where rain or
snow is falling. The image changes according to the amount of rain (or the
amount of snowfall). As precipitation increases, the image of rain and snow
clutter becomes intensified on the radar display, and in the case of localized heavy
rain, an image similar to the image indicating land is displayed in some cases.
Furthermore, because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow, the
ability to detect a target in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and
snow clutter may decrease. The amount of attenuation depends on the
transmission frequency, antenna beam width, and the pulse length. Fig 6-4 and
Fig 6-5 show examples in which detection distance is reduced due to the influence
of precipitation. Because of this, a target, which clearly appeared up to 10 NM by
an X band radar (pulse width of 0.8μs) when it was not raining, may become
dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of rain becomes 4 millimeters per
hour. Furthermore, when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar,
target detection distance decreases less when the S band radar is used, which
means it is influenced less by precipitation.

6－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER

16

Precipitation
16mm/hr of 16 mm/hr Pulse
の降雨時 パルス幅 width 0.05us
0.05us
14 4mm/hr の降雨時
Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse
パルス幅 0.05us
width 0.05us

Precipitation
16mm/hr of 16 mm/hr Pulse
の降雨時 パルス幅 width 0.8us
0.8us
Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0.8us
4mm/hr の降雨時 パルス幅 0.8us

Detection distance while it is raining [NM] 12

降
雨 10
時
の
検 8
出
距
離 6

(NM)
4

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Detection distance while it is not rainning[NM]

雨の降っていないときの検出距離(NM)

Fig 6-4: Decreased target detection distance by S band radar due to

precipitation

16
6
Precipitation
16mm/hrofの降雨時16 mm /hr Pulse
パルス幅 width0.0.05us
05us

14 4mm/hrofの降雨時
Precipitation 4 mm /hr Pulse
パルス幅 0.05us
width 0. 05us

Precipitation
16mm/hrofの降雨時16 mm /hr Pulse
パルス幅 width0.0.8us
8us

Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0. 8us

4mm/hr の降雨時 パルス幅 0.8us
Detection distance while it is raining [NM]

12

降
雨 10
時
の
検 8
出
距
離 6

(NM)

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Detection distance while it is not rainning[NM]

雨の降っていないときの検出距離(NM)

Fig 6-5: Decreased target detection distance by X band radar due to

precipitation

6－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
CLUTTER

c. Coping with sea clutter and rain and snow clutter

When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough, the use of the S band radar is
effective because the radar is not influenced by sea clutter so much and
attenuation due to rain drops is small. When an X band radar is used, reducing the
pulse width will reduce the influence by spurious waves, and also the spurious
wave rejection function effectively works; therefore, the use of short pulse is
effective when the weather is bad. By using image processing functions PROCl 1
to 3, it is expected that spurious waves are further suppressed. Since optimal
settings for those items can be automatically made by using the function mode, it
is recommended that STORM or RAIN be used by selecting the function mode
when the weather is bad. For details of the function mode, see Section 3.9 "USE
FUNCTION KEY [USER]".

However, these functions may make some targets invisible, particularly targets
with higher speeds.

6－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES

6.4 FALSE ECHOES

The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist
actually. These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:

a. Shadow
When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that
exists in the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display
because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some
false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns, in
which there may be a part of weak or no returns.

Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should
have in mind in radar operation.

6
b. Side Lobe Effect
A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the
radar beam on the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be
discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. (see Fig 6-6)

HL

Fig 6-6: False echo

6－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES

c. False Echo by Secondary Reflection

When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear
on the radar display.

One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction
as shown in Fig 6-7.
Direct microwave
HL
Actual target

Radar
scanner

Secondary reflection
Funnel of microwave
False echo from funnel

Fig 6-7: False echo by secondary reflection

d. False Echo by Multiple Reflection
When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship
as shown in Fig 6-8, multiple refection returns may appear on the radar display.
These echoes appear in the same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true
echo of the target.
HL

Fig 6-8: False echo by multiple reflection

e. Second Time Echoes

The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and
the height of a target as described in the Section 6.1 "RADAR WAVE WITH THE
HORIZON". If a so-called “duct”occurs on the sea surface due to a certain
weather condition, however, the radar beam may propagate to a abnormally long
distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.

6 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES

For instance, assuming that the pulse length is MP2 (on the repetition frequency
of 2280 Hz), the first pulse is reflected from a target at about 35.5 NM or more
and received during the next pulse repetition time. In this case, a false echo
(second time echo) appears at a position that is about 35.5 NM shorter than the
actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true
distance of the target is 5+35.5=40.5 NM. On the pulse length is LP1 (on the
repetition frequency of 1280 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is
about 63 NM shorter than the actual distance.

This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the
repetition frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.

If second time echo is appeared, the use of Economy mode in PRF menu is
effective. Otherwise, Stagger Trigger menu set to on. (See Section 3.8.3 "Set
Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)").

f. Radar Interference
When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship
is near own ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display.
This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which appear in various
forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that
they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig 6-9)
HL HL
6

Fig 6-9: Radar interference

If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same
model, their transmitting repetition frequency is nearly the same. As a result,
interference patterns may be displayed concentrically.

In this case, the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the
interference reflector function, so ine-tune the transmitting repetition
frequency.(See Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)")

An interference suppressing effect can be heightened by applying a different

transmitting repetition frequency to the interference pattern source radar and this
radar.

6－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART

6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART

AAIS-SART is an equipment to display the position of distress ship on the AIS

indicator in ship station or coast station when the distress occurs.

It is usable as an alternate equipment of SART(Search And Rescue Transponder).

When connecting AIS indicator to RADAR, it is possible to display AIS-SART

symbol on the RADAR screen.

6.5.1 Display
When receiving AIS-SART signal, AIS-SART symbol is displayed on the
RADAR screen.

Land Area

AIS-SART
Symbol
Other
Ship

Fig 6-10: Example of AIS-SART Symbol display

For details of AIS-SART Symbol, refer to Section 5.1.2.2 "Types and Definitions
of AIS Target Symbols".

6 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART

6.5.2 Numeric Display

When the sleeping AIS-SART symbol is clicked once, the symbol changes into
activated AIS-SART symbol. And then activated AIS-SART symbol is clicked
once more, the symbol changes into numeric displayed AIS-SART symbol and
their information is displayed.

Fig 6-11: Example of numeric information display of AIS-SART

Depending on operation condition, NAV Status is displayed as follows.

Normal operation: SART ACTIVE(14)

Test operation: SART TEST(15)

Notice: AIS-SART function is available in the display software ver. 01.01.

As for method of confirming software version, refer to Section 8.3.1.6

"System Information".

6 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART

6 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 7
SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION

SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................7-1
7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu（Service Man Menu）.........7-1
7.1.2 GYRO I/F Setting .............................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) .............................................................7-5
7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................7-5
7.1.5 Range Adjustment ...........................................................................7-5
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-6
7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................7-7
7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) .....................................7-7
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) ....................................................7-8
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-11
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) .......................7-11
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................7-15
7.2.3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ...7-16
7.2.4 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) ..............................................7-16
7.2.5 Language Setting (Language) ......................................................7-17
7.2.6 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7.2.7 Input Installation Information .......................................................7-19
7.2.8 Setting the Alarm System .............................................................7-19
7.2.9 Network Setting (Network) ...........................................................7-24
7.2.10 LAN Port Setting) ..........................................................................7-27
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................7-30
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................7-30
7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................7-31
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) .....................7-33
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (SSR MON) .......................7-35
7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................7-38
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) .......................................7-38
7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) ...................................7-39
7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) .....................................7-40
7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) ......7-41
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by

service engineers during system installation.

The bearing adjustment value is saved to non-volatile memory in the scanner.

Other settings are saviedto non-volatile memory in the radar process unit.

• Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment

except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is
carried out, this may cause unstable operation.
• Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.
Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,
resulting in an accident or trouble.

7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu（Service Man Menu）

Procedures
1) Hold down the Main button at the
lower right of the display together
with the left key.
7
The Code Input menu will appear.

2) Left-click the 0 button.

3) Left-click the ENT button.

The Serviceman Menu will appear.

Fig 7-1: Code Input

7－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

7.1.2 GYRO I/F Setting

a. Gyro Settings (STEP or SYNC)

The GYRO I/F circuit of the system is designed to be compatible with most types
of gyro compasses by simply setting the switches.

Step motor type: DC24V to DC100V

Synchro-motor type: Primary excitation voltage 50 to 115 VAC

Before power-on operation can be performed, the switches S1, S2, S5, S6, S7 and
jumper TB105 on the gyro interface circuit (PC4201) must be set in accordance
with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below.

The switches are factory-set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type.
Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before
starting the procedure below.

Procedures
1) Set S5 to "OFF".
The gyro compass and GYRO I/F are cut off.

2) Set S6 and S7 in accordance with the type of your gyro compass.

There are two types of gyro compasses: one type outputs a step signal, and the other type
outputs a synchro signal. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own
ship before setting the switches S6 and S7.

Synchro signal: Set the switches to [SYNC].

Step signal: Set the switches to [STEP].

3) Set the DIP switch S1 in accordance with the type of the

compass.

The items to be set are listed below. For the settings, refer to Table 7-1： Gyro and Log
Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch).

S1-1: Type of gyro signal (step/synchro)

S1-2/3: Gyration ratio of gyro compass

S1-4: Gyration direction of gyro compass

S1-5: Type of log signal (pulse/synchro)

S1-7/8: Ratio of log signal

7－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

4) Set the DIP switch S2.

The items to be set are listed below. For the setting, refer to Table 7-2：Gyro and Log Select
Switches (S2 DIP Switch).

１ ２ ３ ４ ５ ６ ７ ８
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

5) Confirm the settings of the DIP switch S10.

The DIP switch must be set as shown below. Do not change any of the settings.

１ ２ ３ ４ ５ ６ ７ ８
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

6) Set the jumper TB105.

The TB105 is set for using a low-voltage step signal.

1-2 connected: Setting for normal use

2-3 connected: Setting for a step signal of 22 V or less

7) Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal
block.
7
8) Set S5 to "ON".
The gyro compass and GYRO I/F are connected.

9) After power-on operation, make sure of the radar video and the
operation with the true bearing value.
See the Section 7.1.7 "Setting of True Bearing Value".

10) If the true bearing value of the radar equipment is reversed,

change the setting of the switch S1-4.

7－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

Table 7-1： Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEP ON
SYNC OFF
GYRO SIG 360X OFF OFF
180X ON OFF
90X OFF ON
36X ON ON
DIRECTION REV ON
NOR OFF
TYPE SYNC ON
PULSE OFF
PULSE/ Don't care OFF
LOG SIG

NM
100P ／ 30X ON ON
200P ／ 90X OFF ON
400P ／ 180X ON OFF
800P ／ 360X OFF OFF

Table 7-2： Gyro and Log Select Switches (S2 DIP Switch)

S2 SETTING TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOG ALARM ON 　
OFF
GYRO SIMULATOR ON
OFF
LOG SIMULATOR ON
OFF
OTHER SETTING

N.A. Don't care　 any

GYRO ALARM TIME 5s ON
0.2s OFF
HEADING SENSOR SOURCE NMEA(HDT/THS) ON
GYRO SIGNAL OFF
NMEA BAUDRATE SETTING 4800 OFF OFF
9600 ON OFF
19200 OFF ON
38400 ON ON

7－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

7.1.3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment)

JMA-9172-SA radar is fully automatic. There is no necessary for a tuning
function.

7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment

Make adjustment so that the bearing of the target measured with the ship’s
compass matches the bearing of the target echo on the radar display.

Procedures
1) Select H Up for the bearing presentation. Set video processing
(PROC) to PROC Off .

2) Measure the bearing of an adequate target (e.g., a ship at anchor,

a breakwater, or a buoy) relative to own ship's heading.

3) Open the Serviceman Menu.

4) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Bearing

Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu

　　 →　
7
2. Bearing Adjustment

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".

Make adjustment by the 0.1°.

5) Adjust the bearing adjustment value by operating the ＋ /

－ button so that the target measured in step 2) is adjusted to
the correct bearing.

6) Left-click the ENT button to determine the value.

7.1.5 Range Adjustment

Make adjustment so that the range of a target on the radar display is shown
correctly.

Procedures
1) Search the radar display for a target of which range is already
known.

7－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

2) Open the Serviceman Menu.

3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Range

Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu

　　 →　 3. Range Adjustment

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".

4) Adjust the range adjustment value by operating the ＋ / －

button so that the target measured in step 1) falls in the correct
range.

5) Left-click the ENT button to determine the value.

7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device)

Determine whether to connect navigators to the radar equipment.

Only the navigators set to ON here can be used.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Device

Installation menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 9. Next

　　 →　 3. Device Installation

3) Select On for navigators connected to the radar equipment,

and Off for navigators not connected.

Gyro： Gyro (via GYRO I/F)

Compass： Compass (Compliant with IEC61162)

GPS Compass： GPS Compass (JRC)

LOG： Log (via GYRO I/F)

2AXW： 2-axis log (Speed over water: Compliant with IEC61162)

2AXG： 2-axis log (Speed over ground: Compliant with IEC61162)

7－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

GPS： GPS (Compliant with IEC61162)

7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value

If GYRO I/F is used to input a gyro signal, the true bearing value indicated by the
master gyro does not match the value indicated by the radar equipment only in a
rare case. In this case, perform the following procedure to adjust the true bearing
value of the radar equipment to the value of the master gyro.

Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the true
bearing value setting menu.
Main

　　 →　 6. NAV Equipment Setting

　　 →　 1. Gyro Setting

2) Input the master gyro value to the value input screen.

For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".

7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height)

Set the height of radar antenna above sea level. Do not change this setting
7
carelessly.

Procedures
1) Measure the height of radar antenna above sea level in advance.

2) Open the Serviceman Menu.

3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Antenna

Height setting menu.
1. Adjust Menu

　　 →　 4. TXRX Adjustment

　　 →　 1. Antenna Height

The Antenna Height menu will open.

7－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

4) Select the setting that matches the antenna height measured in

step 1).

7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)

Set the own ship's CCRP location, radar antenna installation location, and GPS
installation location.

CCRP： Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Radar antenna: Up to eight radar antennas can be input. (Automatically selected in
response to ISW operation)

GPS： Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)

Procedures
1) Measure the CCRP location, radar antenna location, and GPS
antenna location in advance.

2) Open the Serviceman Menu.

3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the CCRP

Setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 4. CCRP Setting

4) Specify the ship length for Length at the upper right of the CCRP
Setting Menu, and the ship width for Beam.

5) Move the cursor onto the CCRP1 X, Y value, and left-click to

input the CCRP1 location.
When X > 0, the CCRP is on the starboard side of the ship.

When X < 0, it is on the port side.

6) To input the second CCRP, click the CCRP2 button to display the
CCRP2 X,Y value, and input the value in the same manner for
step 5).
Similarly, input the third and subsequent CCRPs.

7) Repeat the above steps to input the GPS location(s) and radar
antenna location(s).

7－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

8) If multiple CCRP locations and GPS locations are input, select

the CCRP location and GPS location to be used by pressing the
buttons at the upper left of the menu.

9) Click the 0.Exit to close the CCRP Setting menu.

7－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

5m
Example:

RADAR Antenna2
X 5m, Y 250m

Length 300m
GPS1
250 m X -10m, Y 30m CCRP1
X 0m, Y 25m

30m
25m
15m

10m RADAR Antenna1

X 0m, Y 15m
Beam 30m

7 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2 SETTINGS

This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by

service engineers during system installation.

• Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment

except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is
carried out, this may cause unstable operation.
• Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.
Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,
resulting in an accident or trouble.

7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting)

External sensor signals are input to the radar equipment through a communication
port. The radar equipment has ten communication ports. For signals to be input
from sensors or to be output to the sensors, communication ports need to be set in
accordance with the sensors. 7
7.2.1.1 Baud Rate Setting (Baud Rate)
Set the baud rate of the signal to be input to the COM port.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Baud

Rate setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 5. COM Port Setting

　　 →　 1. Baud Rate

7－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

3) Set the baud rate of the port to be set.

1. COMPASSi： 4800(NMEA)/9600(NSK)/38400(fast NMEA)ii bps

2. MAINTENANCE/LOG： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

3. NAV1： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

4. NAV2： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

5. ALARM： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

6. JARPAiii： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

7. AIS： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

8. ARPAiv： 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps

9. COMv： 1200/4800/9600/38400/115200 bps

i. The compass port is a receive-only port that is dedicated to COMPASS signals.

ii. The bold values are factory-set.
iii. The JARPA port is a transmit-only port that is dedicated to JRC ARPA signals.
iv. The ARPA port is a transmit-only port.
v. The COM port connector is D-sub 9pin.

7.2.1.2 Reception Port Setting(RX Port)

Set the numbers of ports for receiving signals from sensors.

There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or
using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port

setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 5. COM Port Setting

　　 →　 2. RX Port

3) Set a port for each sensor.

Settable sensor GPS、DLOG、Alarm、Depth、Temperature、Wind、Current、

signals ROT、RSA

Selectable ports When the automatic recognition AUTO

function is used:

When ports are specified: L O G 、N A V 1 、N A V 2 、

ALARM、COM

7 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.1.3 Reception Sentence Setting (RX Sentence)

Set signal sentences to be received from sensors.

The system is factory-set for using all sentences. To receive only specified
sentences, select No Use for sentences which are not necessary.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX

Sentence setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 5. COM Port Setting

　　 →　 3. RX Sentence

3) Select the sentences to be used by the sensors to be set.

Selection value: Use or No Use can be set for each sentence.

1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG)： GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/GLL/VTG

2. GPS(WPT/Time)： GGA/RMC/RMB/BWC/BWR/ZDA

3. Depth： DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS

7
4. Wind： MWV/MWD

5. Current：

→ Data Set Number： 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
Set Number. (Initial value 0)

→ Layer A： Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A

by Layer Number. (Initial value 3)

→ Layer B： Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B

by Layer Number. (Initial value 4)

→ Layer C： Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer C

by Layer Number. (Initial value 5)

6. Autopilot： APB

7 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.1.4 Transmission Port Setting (TX Port)

For each sentence, set a communication port through which signals are
transmitted to sensors.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TX Port

setting menu
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 5. COM Port Setting

　　 →　 4. TX Port

3) Select the communication port through which the sentence to be

set is output.

Settable sentences TTM(TT)、TLL(TT)、TTD(TT)、TLB(TT)、OSD、RSD、ALR、

ACK、TTM(AIS)、TLL(AIS)、TTD(AIS)、TLB(AIS)、
RemoteMaintenance、JRC-ARPA、APB、BOD、GGA、GLL、
RMC、RMB、VTG、XTE、BWC、HDT、THS
Selectable ports MAINTENANCE、NAV1、NAV2、ALARM、JARPA、ARPA、
COM

4) Select the output format, talker, and transmission interval.

Signals for which the above items can be set:

Item Name Option

NMEA0183 APB, BOD, GGA, V1.5
Output Format GLL, RMC, RMB,
V2.0
VTG, XTE,　BWC,
HDT V2.3i
NMEA0183 APB, BOD,RMB, STANDARD：The talker is RA .
Talkerii XTE, BWC, HDT, GP：The talker is GP.
THS
NMEA0183 TX APB, BOD, GGA, Set an interval in the range 1 to 9 seconds.
Interval GLL, RMC, RMB,
VTG, XTE, BWC,
HDT, THS
i. The bold values are factory-set.
ii. For TTM, TLL, OSD, RSD, and ALR, the talker is always RA .
For GGA, GLL, RMC, and VTG, the talker is always GP.

7 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)

In order not to display radar echoes, set a sector range and stop transmission in the
bearing range. Three types of sectors can be created.

The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the
benchmark.

7.2.2.1 Sector Blank Function On/Off (Sector1,2 and 3)

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector

Blank setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 3. Sector Blank

3) Set the sector blank number Sector 1 , Sector 2 , or Sector 3 with

which the sector blank function operates.
The system allows the use of up to three sector blank areas.

Set each sector blank area to on or off.

On

Off
: The sector blank function of the number is operated.

: The sector blank function of the number is stopped.

7
7.2.2.2 Sector Blank Area Creation (Make Sector 1,2,3)
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector

Blank setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

　　 →　 3. Sector Blank

3) Select the sector blank number ( Make Sector 1 to Make Sector 3 ) for
sector creation, and click the Make Sector button in the menu.
The selected sector blank will be made.

7 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

4) Set the starting azimuth of the sector blank by operating the

[EBL] dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The start angle of the sector blank will be set.

5) Set the ending azimuth of the sector blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The end angle of the sector blank will be set.

7.2.3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse)

Set the output value of bearing pulses from the scanner unit. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pulses. This setting is enabled only when the scanner unit of
25 or 30 kW is used.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Output

Pulse setting menu.
1. Adjust Menu

　　 →　 4. TXRX Adjustment

　　 →　 6. Output Pulse

3) Set the number of pulses to be output by the scanner unit.

i :2048 pulses per antenna rotation (Recommended value)
2048

4096 :4096 pulses per antenna rotation

i. If a 10 kW antenna or S-band Solid State antenna is used, 2048 is

always set.

7.2.4 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave)

Place the system in the Slave mode when it is to be operated as the sub-display
that displays radar echoes by using radar signals from other radar equipment.

The input value of externally input bearing pulses can be set. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pulses.

7 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.4.1 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave)

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the

installation setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

3) Select Slave for the item 2. Master Slave in the menu.

Master :The system operates as radar equipment while the own

antenna is connected.

Slave :The system operates as a sub-display while the signal

cable of other radar equipment is connected.

7.2.4.2 Setting of Input Bearing Pulse (Input BP Pulse)

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the second

page of the installation setting menu.

→
2. Installation Menu

9. Next
7
3) Set the number of pulses for the item 1. Input BP Count in the
menu.

2048 ： 2048 pulses per antenna rotation

4096 ： 4096 pulses per antenna rotation

7.2.5 Language Setting (Language)

The system is designed to switch between display languages, Japanese and
English.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

7 － 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the

language setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 8. Language

3) Select the language to be used.

1. English

2. Japanese
i
3. Other

i. Other is an option to display character strings created by our overseas agents.

Ask the overseas agent or our sales department if your language is supported. To
determine the selected language, turn the power off, and then turn it on.

7.2.6 Date Time Setting

To display time, the local time, local date, and time-zone difference must be set.

However, if the "ZDA" sentence of NMEA0183 is received, time can be

automatically displayed.

Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Date
Time setting menu.
Main
→ 7. Sub Menu
→ 6. Date Time Setting
The Date Time Setting menu will open.

2) Set information about date and time

2)-1. UTC/LMT (Time display system)

UTC : Universal Time Coordinate

UTC (S) : UTC (System Time)
LMT : Local Mean Time
LMT (S) : LMT (System Time)

2)-2. LMT Date

Input the date in local time.
2)-3. LMT Time
Input the date in local time.
2)-4. Time Zone
Input the time-zone difference between the universal time and local time.

7 － 18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

2)-5. Display Style

Set one of the following date display formats.

YYYY-MM-DD ex) 2007-12-31

MMM DD, YYYY ex) DEC 31, 2007

DD MMM , YYYY ex) 31 DEC, 2007

2)-6. Synchronize with GPS

A ZDA sentence sent by the GPS is used, thereby displaying time

synchronized with the GPS time.
i
On ： Time synchronized with the GPS time

Off ： Time not synchronized with the GPS time

i. If On is selected for this item but a ZDA sentence is not input, the system
internal clock function is used to display the date and time.

7.2.7 Input Installation Information

The system can input installation information.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the

7
Installation Information setting menu.
Main

→ 1. Installation Information

3) Input the installation information.

For the input method on the numeric value and character input screens, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

Date Input the date of installed system.

Name Input the name of installation personel.

Company Input the name of radar installer.

7.2.8 Setting the Alarm System

7.2.8.1 Setting the reset interval (Reset Interval)

This function enables the control of WMRST terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).The reset signal is turned on when operation in a set period of time.

7 － 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Reset

Interval menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 6. Alarm System

→ 1. Watch Alarm

→ 1. Reset Interval

3) Input the value to be set.

For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

7.2.8.2 Setting the Trackball Threshold

This function enables the control of WMRST terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).

The reset signal is turned off when trackball is moved, that caused by vibration.If
trackball move distance go over the threshold (dot unit) when reset signal is
turned on.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the

Trackball Threshold menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 6. Alarm System

→ 1. Watch Alarm

→ 2. Trackball Threshold

3) Input the value to be set.

For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

7.2.8.3 Setting the relay output (Relay Output)

This function enables the control of ARPAALM terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

7 － 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Relay

Output menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 6. Alarm System

→ 2. Relay Output

3) Left-click the 1. Relay Output Mode button in the menu.

The Relay Output mode is switched.

Continuous : The output is continuously controlled.

Intermittent : The output is intermittenly controlled.

4) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed.

The item can be turned on / off.

On : The relay output is turned on when alarm have issued.

Off : The relay output is not turned on when alarm have issued.

2. TT CPA/TCPA : There is a dangerous target. (tracked target)

3. AIS CPA/TCPA : There is a dangerous target. (AIS target)

7
4. New Target : A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.

5. Lost : There is a lost target. (Target Tracking / AIS).

7.2.8.4 Setting the ALR output (ALR Output)

This function enables the control of ALR port (See Section 7.2.1 "Communication
Port Setting (COM Port Setting)").

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the ALR

Output menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 6. Alarm System

→ 2. Relay Output

7 － 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

3) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed.

The item is turned on / off.

On : The ALR sentence is output when alarm have issued.

Off : The ALR sentence is not output when alarm have issued.

1. System Alarm : The internal alarm.

2. TT/AIS Alarm : Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms.

7.2.8.5 Setting the External Acknowledgement (External ACK Setting)

This function enables the control of system when ACK sentence have received.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External

ACK Setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 6. Alarm System

→ 5. External ACK Setting

3) Click the item button corresponding to the menu to be changed.

Critical Alarm ：CPA/TCPA alarm.

Normal Alarm ：Exept Critical Alarm.

7 － 22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

4) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed.

The item is switched.

Audio : Setting of alarm sound.

→ On : The alarm sound is not stopped when

acknowridgement have received.

→ Off : The alarm sound is stopped when

acknowridgement have received.

Indication : Setting of alarm indication.

→ Lightning : The alarm indication brinking is stopped when

acknowridgement have received.

→ Brinking : The alarm indication brinking is not stopped

when acknowridgement have received.。

Acknowledge State : Setting of ALR sentence.

→ A;ACK : Add acknowridgement to ALR sentence.

→ V;UNACK : Add no acknowridgement (unrecognized) to ALR

sentence.

7.2.8.6 Setting the Alarm Buzzer (Sound Output Mode)

This function enables the control of alarm buzzer.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

7
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External
ACK Setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 6. Alarm System

→ 4. Sound Output Mode

3) Select the function to be used.

On , Off1 and Off2

Setting and Ararm Function

Alarm Setting Operation Operation CPA/　 New 　 Lost NAV System ISW
Miss TCPA Target
On ①
Off1 ① ②
Off2 ① ③ ① ② ①

① : Followed by Buzzer Volume menu setting.

② : Alarm Buzzer is turned off.
③ : If Relay Output menu is turned on when Alam Buzzer is turned off. If Relay Output menu is turned off when Alam
Buzzer is turned on.
　　For how to setting Buzzer Volume menu, see Section 3.8.6 "Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)".

7 － 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.9 Network Setting (Network)

The system can receive data from other system via the JRC LAN. The purpose of
JRC-LAN is interoperation with other JRC systems. The JRC systems are
synchronized with datum in JRC-LAN network.
To connect JRC-LAN, LAN cable and HUB (option) is
i necessary. For details, contact the JRC offices.

NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
•Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
•Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.

• Accepted Devices
RADAR : JMA-7100/9100/5300MK2 Series
ECDIS : JMA-901B/701B
Chart RADAR : JMA-900B Series
Conning Display : JMA-901B-CON/701B-CON
Route planning system : JAN-1186
Navigation workstation : NDC-1186
GPS/DGPS : JLR-7500/7800

• Receivable Data
[1] Route Data
The system can display the route created by other JRC navigation equipements. Refer to
Section 3.7 "USE ROUTE FUNCTION".

When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS,
i following items are not displayed.

• XTL
• Arrival Radius
• ROT
• Turn Radius
• Time Zone
• Sail

[2] Sensor Data

The system can receive sensor data (Heading, Speed etc...) from other system (ECDIS,
Chart RADAR etc...).
[3] AIS Data
The system can receive AIS data from AIS.
[4] Selected GPS number
Selected GPS number can be synchronized.
[5] Day/Night mode, operation panel brilliance.
Day/Night mode and operation panel brilliance can be synchronized.

7 － 24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.9.1 Network Function Setting (Network Function)

Turning on/off the network function.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Network

Function setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 9. Next

→ 4. Network

3) Select the item 1. Network Function in the menu, and turn on or off
the Network Function.

On : The Network Function is operated.

Off : The Network Function is stopped.

7.2.9.2 Sensor Priority Setting

The system can receive data from 2 sensors. If the same sentences are received
from 2 sensors, the system use primary system's data.

Procedures
1)

2)
Open the Serviceman Menu.

Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Sensor

7
Priority setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 9. Next
→ 4. Network

→ 3. Sensor Priority

3) Select the data source sensor for each priority.

1. Primary : High priority sensor (Factory-set: No.1 ECDIS )

2. Secondary : Low priority sensor (Factory-set: No.2 ECDIS )

Settable sensors
No.1 ECDIS No.1 FFD Conning Display No.2 Data Server No.3 Remote GPS
No.2 ECDIS No.2 FFD No.1 Converter Unit Console Conning Nonei
No.3 ECDIS No.3 FFD No.2 Converter Unit NAV W/S
No.4 ECDIS No.4 FFD No.1 Alart I/F No.1 GPS
No.1 MFD No.1 Chart RADAR No.2 Alart I/F No.2 GPS
No.2 MFD No.2 Chart RADAR Port Conning No.3 GPS
No.3 MFD No.3 Chart RADAR STAB Conning No.1 Remote GPS
No.4 MFD No.4 Chart RADAR No.1 Data Server No.2 Remote GPS

i. if you selected "None", the system does not receive data.

7 － 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.9.3 Synchronization Setting

Day/Night mode and operation panel brilliance can be synchronized.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the

Synchronization setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 9. Next
→ 4. Network

→ 4. Synchronization

3) Select the 1. Day/Night or 2. Keyboard to be synchronized.

On : Day/Night and operation panel brilliance are sinchronized.

Off : Day/Night and operation panel brilliance are not sinchronized.

7 － 26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.10 LAN Port Setting)

The system can receive data from other system via the JRC LAN. The purpose of
JRC-LAN is interoperation with other JRC systems. The JRC systems are
synchronized with datum in JRC-LAN network
To connect JRC-LAN, LAN cable and HUB (option) is
i necessary. For details, contact the JRC offices.

NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
•Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
•Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.

7.2.10.1 Transmission Setting (TX Setting)

For each sentence, turn on/off transmission.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the TX

Setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→
7
9. Next
→ 5. LAN Port Setting

→ 1. TX Setting

3) Set on/off for each sensor.

On : The sentence is transmitted.

Off : The sentence is not transmitted.

These sentences can be turned on/off.

Settable sentences
TTM(TT), TLL(TT), TTD(TT), TLB(TT), OSD, RSD, ALR, ACK, TTM(AIS), TLL(AIS),
TTD(AIS), TLB(AIS)

7 － 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.10.2 Reception Port Setting (RX Port)

Set the numbers of ports for receiving signals from sensors.

There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or
using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port

setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 9. Next
→ 5. LAN Port Setting

→ 2. RX Port

3) Set a port for each sensor.

Settable sensor signals

Heading, Speed, AIS, GPS, DLOG, Alarm, Depth, Temperature, Wind, Current, ROT, RSA,
Time Zone, Date/Time

Selectable ports
When the automatic AUTO
recognition function is used:

When the ports are specified: Own LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ship’s Clock)

Behavior pattern of selectable ports

AUTO : Data from JRC-LAN is prior

User Setting : The system use the port selected by Section 3.12.1 "Receive
Port Setting (RX Port)". The system use data from JRC-LAN
or sensor connected directly.i

Own : The system use data from sensor connected to the system
directly.

LAN : The system uses data from JRC-LAN.

ii
LAN (GPS) : The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected).

LAN (Ship’s Clock) : The system

ii
uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)

i. In order to set Section 3.12.1 "Receive Port Setting (RX Port)", select User Setting in
advance.

ii. LAN (GPS) and LAN (Ship’s Clock) are selectable signals for Time Zone and Date/Time.

7 － 28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS

7.2.10.3 Reception Sentence Setting (RX Sentence)

Set signal sentences to be received from sensors.

The system is factory-set for using all sentences. To receive only specified
sentences, select No Use for sentences which are not necessary.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Rx

Sentence setting menu.
2. Installation Menu

→ 9. Next
→ 5. LAN Port Setting

→ 3. RX Sentence

3) Select the sentences to be used by the sensors to be set.

Selection value: Use or No Use can be set for each sentence.

1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG)： GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/GLL/VTG
2. GPS(WPT/Time)： GGA/RMC/RMB/BWC/BWR/ZDA
3. Depth： DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS
4. Wind： MWV/MWD
5. Current：
→ Data Set Number： 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
Set Number. (Initial value 0)
7
→ Layer A： Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A
by Layer Number. (Initial value 3)
→ Layer B： Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B
by Layer Number. (Initial value 4)
→ Layer C： Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer C
by Layer Number. (Initial value 5)
6. Autopilot： APB

7 － 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

7.3 ADJUSTMENT

This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by

service engineers during system installation.

Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment

except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is
carried out, this may cause unstable operation.
Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.
Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,
resulting in an accident or trouble.

7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level)

7.3.1.1 Noise Level Adjustment for Signal Processing

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise

level adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup

→ 1. Signal Processing

→ 1. Echo Noise Level

3) Increase/decrease the noise level adjustment value.

The noise level is factory-set. (Initial value: 140)

After system installation, a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be
avoided; it should be fine adjusted within ±5.

7 － 30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

7.3.1.2 Noise Level Adjustment Mode (Setting Mode)

A noise level is factory-adjusted while this mode is turned on.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise

level adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup

→ 1. Signal Processing

→ 2. Setting Mode

The noise level adjustment mode is switched between on and off.

Factory-adjustment method
・ The noise level adjustment value is once decreased to about 130.
・ While the noise level adjustment value is gradually increased, the value
with which radar echoes start turning yellow is determined as the set
value.
・ The noise level adjustment mode is turned off when the adjustment is
finished.

7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT)

7.3.2.1 Vector Constant Adjustment (Vector Constant) 7

Adjust the vector follow-up performance of the target tracking function.

The vector constant is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly.

　　　　　　　　
Attention

Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 5 normally. If the vector
constant value is higher, a target’s vector will be better followed
up when the target and own ship change their course or speed,
but the vector accuracy will be lower on the contrary.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Vector

Constant adjustment menu.

7 － 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup

→ 2. TT

→ 1. Vector Constant

The window for setting vector constants will appear.

3) Input the value to be set.

For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".

7.3.2.2 Quantization Level Adjustment (Video TD Level)

Use the target tracking function (TT) to adjust the level of the signal to be
recognized as a target. If a small value is set, even weak target signals will be
input to the target detection circuit of the target tracking function. However, many
unnecessary signals are also input, which may cause unstable target acquisition or
tracking. It is important to set a value four or five greater than the value with
which unnecessary signals are detected.

The quantization level is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it

carelessly.

Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If

the level deviates from the proper value, the target
acquisition and tracking functions will deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the target

tracking setting menu.
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup

→ 2. TT

3) To change the quantization level of the automatic acquisition

area, specify the item 2. Video TD Level in the menu. To change
the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition, specify
the item 3. Video High Level .

4) Input the value to be set.

7 － 32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS)

Main Bang Suppression is adjusted to suppress main bang, a reflection signal
from 3D circuit including wave guide tube, that generally appears as a circular
image focusing on the center of the radar display. Optimum adjustment allows
main bang image to remain lightly on the display.

Do not change this adjusted level carelessly.

Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point-blank
range and cause collision, resulting in death or serious
injury.

7.3.3.1 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Level (MBS Level)

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS

level adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup

→ 3. MBS

→ 1. MBS Level 7
3) Set the radar as follows:
• Set the radar range to 0.125 NM.
• Set the radar video enhance function (ENH) to OFF.
• Set the image processing (PROC) to OFF.
• Turn the [RAIN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left).
• Turn the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (fully to the right).
• Turn the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.

4) Adjust the value so that the main bang can be erased.

7 － 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

7.3.3.2 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Area (MBS Area)

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS

Area adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup

→ 3. MBS

→ 2. MBS Area

3) Set the radar as follows:

• Set the radar range to 0.125 NM.
• Set the radar video enhance function (ENH) to OFF.
• Set the image processing (PROC) to OFF.
• Turn the [RAIN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left).
• Turn the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (fully to the right).
• Turn the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.

4) Adjust the value so that the main bang can be erased.

7 － 34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (SSR MON)

Attension

Replace the Antenna unit, TRX Module(CMN-750), performance monitor circuit

(CAY-71), and radar process circuits (CHA-396, CDC-1349, CMH-2246), adjust
the perfomance monitor according to the procedures in this section:

[i]　Transmission Monitor Adjustment (Tx MON Adjustment)

The radar system is equipped with an interswitch.

For adjusting the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to
straight, i.e. No.1 scanner is connected to No.1 display unit as the Master.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the “Tx

Monitor Adjustment”menu.
1.Adjust Menu
→ 4.TXRX Adjustment
→7.SSR MON Setting
→ 2. Tx MON Adjustment
7
3) Adjust the “Tx MON Adjustment”value to “0.0 ± 1.0dB”by
operating the “+”/ “-”button.

4) Left-click the “ENT”button.

Adjust to “0.0±1.0dB”
3 4

7 － 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

[ii]　Receiver Monitor Adjustment (Rx MON Adjustment)

Attension
Do not change the parameters of “6. Monitor Range”and “7.Rx MON Gain”.

The radar system is equipped with an interswitch.

For adjusting the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to
straight, i.e. No.1 scanner is connected to No.1 display unit as the Master.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the “Tx

Monitor Adjustment”menu.
1.Adjust Menu
→ 4.TXRX Adjustment
→7.SSR MON Setting
→ 5. Monitor Sector
3) The +/- button is operated so that "Rx ATT Value" may become
the maximum.
*The PM Rx area(22.5°) displayed on the PPI screen moves to
operate "+/-" button.

4) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the “Rx

MON Adjustment”menu.

5) Adjust the “Rx MON Adjustment”value to “0.0 ± 1.0dB”by

operating the “+”/ “-”button.

6) Left-click the “ENT”button.

7 － 36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT

Adjust to “0.0dB±1.0dB”
Maximum
3.
5. 6.
4.

5.

7 － 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

This item is provided for equipment maintenance, including settings of antenna

safety switch, master reset, etc.

Only our service engineers are to make the

adjustment. Neglecting this caution may cause
accidents and failures.

Do not make the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, adjustments may affect the radar functions,
causing accidents and failures.

7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch)

Use this switch to measure the transmission/reception performance while the
antenna is in stopped state.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Safety

Switch setting menu.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 1. Safety Switch

3) Select the item to be set.

Set operation when the antenna safety switch is turned off.

1. TX-OFF ： The transmitter stops transmission. The screen on the

display unit remains in transmission state.
2. Standy ： (Normal setting) The transmitter stops transmission. The
screen on the display unit is placed in standby state.
3. TX-ON ： The transmitter continues transmission. The screen on the
display unit remains in transmission state. In this case,
however, an error such as a bearing signal failure occurs
because the safety switch is turned off.

4) Change the setting back to 2. Standy when the work is finished.

7 － 38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial)

If system operation is unstable, it may be stabilized by initializing the memory
area. To initialize the memory area, follow the procedure in this section. The
memory area is reset to the factory setting when initialized.

7.4.2.1 Partial Master Reset

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Partial

Master Rest operation menu for the memory area.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 2. Area Initial

→ 1. Partial Master Reset

3) Select the items to be initialized.

1. Serviceman Menu ： The set values in the Serviceman menu are initialized.

2. Except Serviceman Menu ： The set values not in the Serviceman menu are initialized.

3. User Setting ： The user-set values are initialized.

4. TT Setting ： The set values for the target tracking function are initialized.
5. AIS Setting ： The set values for the AIS display function are initialized.
6. Day/Night ： The color scheme and brilliance setting for the day/night

4) Select 1. Yes
mode are initialized.

in the Confirmation Menu.

7
The memory areas of specified items are initialized, and the system is restarted.

7.4.2.2 All Master Reset

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the All

Master Rest operation menu for the memory area.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 2. Area Initial

→ 2. All Master Reset

3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The whole memory area is initialized, and the system is restarted.

7 － 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2)

The system can save internal memory data such as item settings in all menus onto
a flash memory card. If the radar processing circuit in the system has been
replaced, the set values before the circuit replacement can be restored by reading
the set values you saved before the replacement.

To save the internal memory data onto a flash memory card (option), the card
must be inserted in card slot beforehand.

7.4.3.1 Copying of Internal Settings onto Card (Internal To Card1/2)

Save the internal memory data, such as item settings in menus, onto a flash memory card.

The internal memory data should be saved at completion of system setting, and the operation
condition should be saved periodically.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Open the 3. Maintenance Menu .

3) Select Slot2 in the 3. Internal To Card1/2 .

4) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The internal memory data is saved on the flash memory card.

7.4.3.2 Reading of Internal Settings from Card (Card1/2 To Internal)

Read the saved memory data from the flash memory card into the system memory.

Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition
after replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Open the 3. Maintenance Menu .

3) Select Slot2 in the 4. Card 1/2 To Internal .

4) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The memory data is read from the flash memory card into the system memory.

After the internal memory area is updated, the system is restarted.

7 － 40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time)

The system adds up the following operation time and contains it in the scanner
unit:

• Transmission time
• Motor run time
Clear the above total time when scanner unit motor is replaced.

7.4.4.1 Clear of Motor Run Time (Clear TX Time)

Clear the scanner's motor run time.

Perform the following procedure to clear the motor run time when the scanner motor is
replaced.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Clear

Motor Time menu.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 5. TXRX Time

→ 1. Clear TX Time

3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The motor run time in the TXRX's internal control circuit is cleared to 0.
7
7.4.4.2 Save of Antenna Time (Clear Motor Time)
Save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit.

Perform the following procedure to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX's
internal control circuit is replaced.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Clear

Motor Time menu.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 5. TXRX Time

→ 2. Clear Motor Time

3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The motor run time in the TXRX's internal control circuit is cleared to 0.

7 － 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7.4.4.3 Save of Scanner Unit Time (TXRX To Display Unit)

Save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit.

Perform the following procedure of 7.4.4.4 to inherit the scanner unit time data when the
TXRX's internal control circuit is replaced.

During performance monitor adjustment, all acquisitions by the

target tracking function are released.
The released target acquisitions are not recovered.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TXRX to

Display Unit menu.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 5. TXRX Time

→ 3. TXRX To Display Unit

3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The scanner unit time data in the TXRX's internal control circuit is saved transferred to the

display unit.

7.4.4.4 Restoration of Antenna Time (Display Unit To TXRX)

Restore the antenna time data from the display unit into the antenna's internal control circuit.

Perform the above procedure of 7.4.4.3 to inherit the antenna time data when the antenna's
internal control circuit is replaced.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Display

Unit to TXRX menu.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 5. TXRX Time

→ 4. Display Unit To TXRX

3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The scanner unit time data in the display unit is restored transferred to the antenna's internal
control circuit.

7 － 42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update)

The system is designed to transfer and display external character strings as the
second language display. The second language is factory-set to "Japanese."

Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be
updated.

To update character strings, the flash memory card (option) containing the
character string file must be inserted in card slot 2.

Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu.

2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the String

Data Update menu.
3. Maintenance Menu

→ 6. String Data Update

3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.

The character string file on the flash memory card is read into the system, and the second
language area is updated.
7
To display the read character strings in the second language, select Other in the menu
shown in Section 7.2.5 "Language Setting (Language)".

7 － 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU

7 － 44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE
AND ADJUSTMENT

COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT

8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................8-1
8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ...........................................................8-2
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532 .................................................................8-2
8.2.2 Display Unit (NCD-9170) ................................................................8-4
8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ......................................................................8-5
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu ...............................................8-5
8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test) ............................................8-6
8.3.1.2 Monitor Test ................................................................................8-8
8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test) .......................................8-8
8.3.1.4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display) .................8-9
8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display .......................................................8-10
8.3.1.6 System Information ..................................................................8-10
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-11
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ..................................8-12
8.4.2 Replacement of Motor ...................................................................8-12
8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit　NKE-1532 .........................................................8-12
8.4.3 Replacement of 23inch LCD ........................................................8-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.4.4 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-20
8.4.4.1 About the Battery Alarm ...........................................................8-20
8.4.4.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery .................................8-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

• Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the

equipment by users. Inspection or repair work by
unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or
electric shock. Ask the nearest branch, business office or
a dealer for inspection and repair.
• Turn off the main power before maintenance work.
Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

• Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.

Especially, make sure to turn off the indicator if a rectifier
is used. Otherwise, equipment failure, or death or serious
injury due to electric shock may result, because voltage is
outputted from the rectifier even when the radar is not
operating.

For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make
the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly,
troubles will reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work.

Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow: 8

• Clean the equipment.

Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of
dry cloth.

Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.

8－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532

• Turn off the main power source before starting

maintenance. Otherwise, an electric shock or injury
may be caused.

• Turn "OFFi" the safety switch to stop the scanner unit.

(Refer to Section 1.4 "EXTERIOR DRAWINGS".)
Otherwise, you may be injured if touching the rotating
scanner unit by accident.
• Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned
off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind.

i. After the work, turn "ON" the scanner unit safety switch.

a. Precautions in Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and
refitted after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the
following precautions:

1) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N/
cm (120 to 150kgf/cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects
the packings against permanent compressive strain).The packings
start producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N/cm
(150kgf/cm). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the
specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.

2) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm X 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of

13 mm X 17 mm (not longer than 200 mm).

3) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten
them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the
bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)

*Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.

8－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

8-M8 (stainless steel) bolt

Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm

⑦ ①

③ ⑤

⑥ ④

② ⑧

Bolt Tightening Procedure of

NKE-1532 Cover

b. Radiator

8
　　　　　　　　
Attention

• If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke,

salt, dust, paint or birds’droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft
cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all
times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect
on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
• Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichloroethylene and
ketone for cleaning. Otherwise, the radiation plane may
deteriorate.

Check up and clean the radiator.

8－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

c. Rotating section
c-1 Supply Oil Seal
An scanner unit with a grease nipple needs grease supply. Remove the cap on the
grease nipple located on the front of JMA-9172-SA radar at which the radiator is
supported, and grease with a grease gun.Make the oiling every six months. The
oil quantity shall be approximately 100 g, which is as much as the grease comes
out of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of Mobil Oil.

c-2 Oiling gears

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the
encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oiling in short intervals is more
effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but
oil at least every six months.

Use Mobilux2 of Mobile Oil.

c-3 Mounting legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the antenna unit case for corrosion
at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half
year because painting is the best measure against corrosion.

8.2.2 Display Unit (NCD-9170)

• When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly

with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to
clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may be
damaged

Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton).

Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.

8－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is
found, investigate it immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage
sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or
carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking, which can be
used effectively in the next check work.

Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8-1 Function Check
List in the order as specified in it.

Table8-1： Performance Check List

Equipment Item to be checked Criteria Remarks

Display Unit Video and echoes on the screen Sensitivity Can be correctly controlled
LCD brilliance can be controlled correctly
Various markers
Various numerical indications
Lighting

Memory See the Section [1] "Memory Test"

Communications Lines See the Section [3] "Check of

Communication Lines (Line Test)"

Power Supply, Backup Battery See the Section [4] "Supply Voltage"

Monitor

Operation Unit
See the Section 8.3.1.2 "Monitor Test"

See the Section 8.3.1.3 "Operation Unit

8
Test (Keyboard Test)"

System Alarm Log Display See the Section 8.3.1.5 "System Alarm
Log display"

System Information Display See the Section 8.3.1.6 "System

Information"

Target Tracking See the Section 5.2.7 "Operation Test

(TT Test Menu)"

Scanner Unit Signals from the Scanner Unit See the Section [2] "TXRX Test"

Performance Monitor See the Section 8.3.1.4 "Check of the

Performance Monitor (MON Display)"

8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu

The radar operating state can be checked by opening the Test Menu.

8－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Test
Menu.
Main

→ 9. Test Menu

2) Select the items to be checked.

1. Self Test 8.3.1.1Self-diagnosis function (Self Test)

2. Monitor Test 8.3.1.2Monitor Test
3. Keyboard Test 8.3.1.3Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test)
4. MON Display 8.3.1.4Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)
5. System Alarm Log 8.3.1.5System Alarm Log display
6. System Information 8.3.1.6System Information

The list of check items will appear.

8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test)

Check of memory, scanner unit, and communications Lines

1. Memory Test [1]Memory Test

2. TXRX Test [2]TXRX Test
3. Line Test [3]Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)

4. Supply Voltage [4]Supply Voltage

[1] Memory Test

Checks for the performance of built-in memory.

1. SDRAM SDRAM Check

2. SRAM SRAM Check
3. FLASH ROM FLASH ROM Check
4. GRAPHIC GRAPHIC Check

When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is

displayed.
[2] TXRX Test

Checks for signals from the scanner.

Safety Switch Scanner's safety switch check

8－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

AZI Pulse Scanner rotation signal check

HL Pulse Heading line signal check
MH Current Check on the load current of high voltage in
the modulator
Trigger Radar trigger signal check
Video Radar video check

When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is

displayed.

In standby, ** will appear.

[3] Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)

Check the status of communications with options.

TXRX Check on connection with the transmitter-receiver

SIG. PROC Check on connection with the signal processing circuit

TT Check on connection with the target tracking unit

GYRO I/F Check on connection with the GYRO I/F unit

ISW Check on connection with the interswitch

When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is

displayed.

The status display field of equipment not connected is left blank.

[4] Supply Voltage

Check the voltage of internal power supply.

8
Item Normal operating range

12V 11.4 to 12.6V

5V 4.75 to 5.25V

3.3V 3.14 to 3.46V

Battery 2.5V or more

8－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

8.3.1.2 Monitor Test

Checks for the display.

The test pattern will be shown on the display.

1. Pattern1 ： All colors are filled with white.

2. Pattern2 ： A white box is displayed on the black background of
1280 × 1024dot.
3. Pattern3 ： Displays rectangle X 2, circle X 2, and cross-shape X13
(white lines on the black background).
4. Pattern4 ： Displays“H”of 9 dots X 9 dots on the entire screen (white
character on the black background).
5. Pattern5 ： Gray scale display (16 levels)
6. Pattern6 ： Displays a color bar.
7. Pattern7 ： Displays the VDR test pattern.
8. Pattern8 ： Displays the specified color.

To return to the normal display, press any key.

If errors occur in the monitor, no test pattern will appear.

8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test)

Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel.

1. Key Test [1]Key Test

2. Buzzer Test [2]Buzzer Test
3. Light Test [3]Light Test

[1] Key Test

Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel.

Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown in reverse video at the
same time the key is pressed, and the name of the pressed key is displayed.

[2] Buzzer Test

Checks for the operation panel buzzer.

The buzzer will sound. The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a
specified length of time.

[3] Light Test

Checks for the control panel light.

The brightness of the operation panel is gradually intensified at four levels.

8－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

8.3.1.4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)

The radar system is equipped with an interswitch.

For checking the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to
straight, i.e. No.1 scanner is connected to No.1 display unit as the Master.

Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the “4.
MON Display menu”.
Main → 9. Test Menu → 4. MON Display

Blind sector appears on stern direction of ship to check receiver performance.

Range sca le will be automatically changed to 24nm.
8
i Sea and Rain dial will be automatically changed to minimum, a nd IR, ENH, PROC and FUNC
will be automatically c hanged to off. Push “EXIT” button, it will be returned to former state .

2) Check the Transmitter System ATT Value and Receiver System

ATT Value.
If Transmitter System ATT Value down > 7.0dB or Receiver System ATT Value down > 3.0dB,
i Please consult the purchased distributor or nearest branch office (or our sales department).

Note: Features of Performance monitor of JMA-9172-SA radar

-The performance of the receiver and the transmitter is automatically calculated and indicated on
the radar screen like XX.X dB in two or three-digit value.

-Receiver check is performed within the PM sector in direction of stern of ship.

Therefore, even if the performance monitor is activated, the performance monitor pattern echo like
the performance monitor of the magnetron radar is not displayed at all.
As a result, the radar operator can clearly observe the echo around ships other than the direction of
the stern.

8－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK

8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display

Displays previously occurred system alarms with the dates and times when they
occurred.

The current alarm is displayed at the lower right of the radar display. For details,
refer to Section 9.1.1 "List of Alarms and other Indications".

The Alarm log display button (page2-31 Alarm) is clicked, in the same way as
that one.

To erase the alarm logs, press the All Clear button in the log display window.

8.3.1.6 System Information

Displays the current system information.

Indicator Processor software version information

TXRX Scanner software version information
System No. System number
TX Time Total transmitting time

→ S-Band

Motor Time Total operating time (Total power-on time)

TXRX Total Time Total operating (power-on) time of the scanner unit
Total Time Total operating (power-on) time of the display unit

8 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be
replaced as scheduled. Use of parts over their service life can cause a system
failure.

• Turn off the main power source before replacing parts.

Otherwise, an electric shock or trouble may be caused.

• Two or more persons shall replace the liquid crystal

monitor. If only one person does this work, he may
drop the LCD, resulting in injury.

• Even after the main power source is turned off, some

high voltages remain for a while. Do not contact the
inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands. Otherwise,
an electric shock may be caused.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement

Here are parts required for periodic replacement

Part name Interval Part type Part code

1. Motor 10,000 hours MDBW108885*i MDBW10885*i
2. Fan (Scanner Unit) NZF-1532 NZF-1532

φ120mm (Radar process Unit) 90,000 hours

φ92mm*ii (Radar process Unit) 45,000 hours

φ60mm (Motor Driver) 45,000 hours

φ60mm (Power Supply Unit) 45,000 hours

3. LCD PANEL 50,000 hours CML-1799 CML-1799
4. Fan (Display Unit)
(Radar Process Circuit) 20,000 hours 109R0612S4D13 5BFAB00588
(Power Supply) 20,000 hours CBP-220 CBP-220
5. Backup battery 5 years CR2032 5ZBCJ00012

i. “*”means revision, such as A, B and so on.

ii. The φ92mm Fan is auxiliary use of the φ120mm Fan.

8.4.2 Replacement of Motor

Replacement of motor must be made by specialized service
personnel.

For details, refer to Service Manual.

8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit　NKE-1532

[Required tools]

• Wrenches (M5, M8, and M10)

• A Phillips screwdriver (M2)

[Required procedure]

Removal of the pedestal cover

1) Turn off the safety switch of the scanner before
replacing the motor.
Turn off the
safety switch.

8 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

2) Remove the pedestal cover of the

port side and the starboard side.

Make sure that there is no foreign

matter or dust adhered to the gasket
when you put the cover on. Remove the hexagonal bolts
( sixteen M8 bolts).

Work of Port side

3) Loosen the hexagonal bolts. (four M5 bolts)
And, remove the motor driver unit.

Bow Loosen the four M5

Portside

Motor driver unit

4) Remove the relay connector

8
(P1901) connected to the motor
driver unit.

P1901
Remove the relay connector

J1901

Back of the motor driver unit

8 － 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

Work of Starboard side

5) Remove the screws (two M4 Radar process unit

screws) and the bolts (six M5

bolts) of the radar process unit.

Bow

Remove the two Ｍ4

Starboard side
Remove the six M5 bolts

6) Pull the radar process unit to the

open-position.

Bow

Stopper

7) Loosen the M4 screw. Loosen the Ｍ4

Insertion hole

8) Hook the stopper in the insertion

hole.

8 － 14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

4.Replacement of Motor

Remove the two M10 bolts

9) Remove the bolts (two M10 bolts) on
the portside of the motor.

Bow

Motor
Port side

Remove the two M10 bolts

10) Remove the bolts (two M10 bolts) on
the starboard side of the motor

Bow

Starboard side

11) Remove the motor. 8

Bow

Starboard side
Remove the motor

8 － 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

12) Grease the gear wheel of the new motor.

13) Install the new motor in the scanner

unit and secure it using the
hexagonal bolts.
Tighten the bolts with the specified
torque (380 kgf-cm).
Grease the motor gear wheel

14) After replacing the motor, and

assemble the unit in the reverse order
of the disassembly procedure.

Do not forget to tighten the screws and bolts .

Do not forget to connect the cables.

[Operation check]

Follow the procedure below to check the operation after you have replaced the
motor.

1) Turn on the radar power supply. When the Countdown is completed, push the “TX /
STBY”button and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do
not listen any unusual sound starting, rotating, and stopping the motor.
2) Open the service engineer menu, and initialize the motor rotation time.

8 － 16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

8.4.3 Replacement of 23inch LCD

Replacement of LCD monitor must be made by specialized
service personnel.

For details, refer to Service Manual.

Do not touch the LCD screen directly with your fingers.

Do not touch the AR filter directly with your fingers.

Perform the replacement work on a soft cloth to avoid damage to the LCD screen and
other parts.

[Required tools]

• A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screws

• A Phillips screwdriver for 6 mm screws

[Disassembly]

1) Remove the tilt fixing handle (standalone type

only).

2) Tilt up the screen as much as you can

(standalone type only). 8
3) Remove the screws (M6) from the four
corners and displace the face cover.

Remove

8 － 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

4) LRemove the LCD operation circuit cables

and remove the face cover.

Remove

5) Remove six M4 screws.

Remove

Remove
6) Displace the module and remove the three
cables.

7) Remove the LCD module.

Remove

8 － 18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

[Assembly]

1) Tighten the lower three M4 screws halfway.

2) Connect the cables to the LCD module.

3) Align the module to the lower three screws

and insert it downward. Temporary
tightening
4) Check the positions of the two bosses and
ensure that appropriate space is maintained
under the LCD module. Tighten the six
screws evenly.

5) Connect the LCD operation circuit cables

and attach the face cover.

6) Tighten the screws at the four corners.

7) Attach the tilt fixing handle.

Positions of the
[Operation Check]
two bosses

1) After completing the replacement

procedures, start the system to make sure that images are displayed properly.
8
2) Turn the brightness knob to make sure the brightness can be changed between the
minimum and the maximum levels.

8 － 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

8.4.4 Replacement of Backup Battery

Replacement of backup battery must be made by specialized
service personnel.

For details, refer to Service Manual.

A coin-cell battery maintains radar system configuration, date, and time

information while power off condition. Radar system configuration is saving to
non-volatile memory at fixed intervals.

8.4.4.1 About the Battery Alarm

If Battery Low is appeared at the lower-right of the display when start up the
radar system, the battery has not enough time left to live. We recommend to
replace the battery.

If Battery Dead is appeared at the lower-right of the display when start up the
radar system, the battery has no time left to live. There is a necessary to replace
the battery. In This condition, this radar system is restored configuration
information from flash memory and normal operation is available. However, you
turned of the radar system before saving to flash memory, the configuration
information is maybe lost. In this case, you must setup the configuration again.
About disposal of used battery, refer to Section 10.2.

8.4.4.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery

[Required tools]

• A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws

• A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screws
• A flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for 3 mm screws

8 － 20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

[Disassembly]

1) Remove the four fixing screws to remove

the cover from the display unit (NCD-
9170).

（A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws）

For standalone type NCD-9170 Remove

For desktop type: NDC-1478

Remove

2) Remove the cable connected to the radar

process circuit board. Remove

The radar process circuit is the first board from

the left.
8
3) Remove the two fixing screws (M4).
4) Pull out the board to the front.

5) Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver

for adjustment or some stick between the battery
and the battery holder and lift the battery up.

8 － 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

6) Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for

adjustment or some stick to the location shown
in the figure below and slide the battery
sideways to remove the battery.

[Assembly]

1) Check the polarity of the battery. Make sure that

the battery's positive (+) side is facing up.
2) Slide the battery sideways into the battery
holder.

3) Make sure that the battery is inserted fully.

[Check Item]

1) Check that no error message comes up.

2) Check that the system starts up normally.

[Notes]

8 － 22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

If you installed the battery with the wrong polarity, remove the battery immediately and
do not use the same battery again.

During the procedures, do not put the battery on any circuit board or conductive item.

To dispose of a used battery, follow the instructions provided in Section 10.2 "DISPOSAL
OF USED BATTERIES".

To disassemble of a used battery, have to use non-conductive tool.

8 － 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

8 － 24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND
AFTER-SALES SERVICE

TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE

9.1 FAULT FINDING .....................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications .............................................9-1
9.1.2 Operation Checking ........................................................................9-6
9.1.3 Fuse Checking .................................................................................9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ...........................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Circuit Block to be Repaired ..........................................................9-7
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ......................................................................9-9
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ...........................................9-9
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ........................................................9-9
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ..........................................................9-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING

9.1 FAULT FINDING

In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which
the used semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration
except due to insufficient design or inspection or by other external and artificial
causes. In general, the relatively many causes are disconnection in a high-value
resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor contact of a switch
or relay.

Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning
adjustment) or insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be
effective to check and readjust these points.

9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications

If any of the following alarm occurs, the system displays the alarm message in red
in order to attract the attention of operator. Other messages are displayed with the
suitable color which is yellow or blue depending on the level of message
importance.
Alarm: Red • Collision-related Alarm
• Navigation Alarm
• System Alarm
Warning: Yellow • System Warning
Infomation: Blue • Operation Information

Alarm message is displayed in the lower right of the display. For more details
refer to page2-31 Alarm.

9
This section gives the list of alarms displayed by the system and other display
lists.
Table9-1：Critical Alarm
Message Class Description ALR No.i
CPA/TCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

9－1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING

Table9-2： List of System Error Message

Message Class Description ALR No.i
Autopilot (Data) Alarm Autopilot: No communication or data error. 101
Current (Data) Alarm Tidal current: No communication or data error. 119
Date (Data) Alarm Date data: No communication or data error. 112
Datum (Data) Alarm DTM: No communication or data error. 122
Depth (Data) Alarm Water depth: No communication or data error. 115
Fan (LCD) Alarm LCD monitor: Fan error. 955
Fan (Power) Alarm Power Supply: Fan error. 953
Fan (PROC) Alarm RADAR Process Unit Interconnection: Fan error. 951
GPS (Status) Alarm GPS status error. 103
GYRO I/F (Data) Alarm GYRO I/F: No communication or checksum error. 324
GYRO I/F (GYRO) Alarm GYRO I/F: GYRO error detected. 110
GYRO I/F (Log) Alarm GYRO I/F: Log error detected. 111
Heading (Data) Alarm Heading data: No communication or data error. 113
Keyboard (Data) Alarm Operation unit: Communication error or checksum 325
error.
Keyboard2 (Data) Alarm Second operation unit: Communication error or 325
checksum error.
Out of Bounds Alarm Own ship's latitude is over 85°N or 85°S. 123
Position (Data) Alarm Latitude / longitude data: No communication or data 102
error.
PROC (AZI) Alarm Process unit: AZI error. 305
PROC (HL) Alarm Process unit: HL error. 306
PROC (Interrupt) Alarm Process unit: Interrupt error. 962
PROC (Trigger) Alarm Process unit: Trigger error. 304
PROC (Video) Alarm Process unit: VIDEO error. 303
ROT (Data) Alarm Rate of Turn: No communication or data error. 120
RSA (Data) Alarm Rudder Sensor Angle: No communication or data 121
error.
Speed (2AXG) Alarm 2-axis log (speed over ground): No communication 114
or data error.
Speed (2AXW) Alarm 2-axis log (speed over water): No communication or 114
data error.
Speed (GPS) Alarm GPS speed: No communication or data error. 114
Speed (Log) Alarm 1-axis log: No communication or data error. 114
SRB (Data) Alarm SRB: No communication or data error. 960
TEMP. (Data) Alarm Water temperature: No communication or data error. 117
TXRX (AZI) Alarm Scanner: BP error. 311
TXRX (Data) Alarm Scanner: No communication, communication 326
mismatched, checksum error, or collision.
TXRX (Fan 1) Alarm Scanner: FAN 1 error. Fan_B103 is stopped.
TXRX (Fan 2) Alarm Scanner: FAN 2 error. Fan_B105 is stopped.
TXRX (Fan 3) Alarm Scanner: FAN 3 error. Fan_B106 is stopped.
TXRX (HL) Alarm Scanner: HL error.
TXRX (Lo PLL) Alarm Scanner: Local PLL error.
TXRX (PROC) Alarm Radar Processor error
TXRX (PS) Alarm Power Supply error

9－2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING

Table9-2： List of System Error Message

Message Class Description ALR No.i
TXRX (Reverse) Alarm Scanner: Reverse rotation.
TXRX (SSW Off) Alarm Scanner: Safety switch OFF.
TXRX (Trigger) Alarm Scanner: TRIGGER error..
TXRX (Video) Alarm Scanner: VIDEO error.
Wind (Data) Alarm Wind direction/velocity: No communication or data 118
error.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

Table9-3：List of Notification
Message Class Description ALR No.i
CCRP Changed INFO CCRP is automatically changed.
Copying INFO Displayed-image is capturing to file.
POSN Reset INFO Change the latitude and longitude sentence.
Set GYRO INFO Requires setting of true bearing.
TM Reset INFO Resetting TM in a short time.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

Table9-4： List of Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms

Message Class Description ALR No.i
AIS (Data) Alarm AIS: No communication or communication error. 116
AIS 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets.
AIS ACT 95% INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets to
Capacity be activated.
AIS ACT MAX INFO Maximum number of AIS targets to be activated.
AIS Alarm ***ii Alarm AIS alarm (Up to 10 alarm messages can be
displayed.).
AIS Max Target INFO Maximum number of AIS targets.
AIS PROC (Data) Alarm AIS processing circuit: No communication or 328
communication error.
CPA/TCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
Lost Alarm Failure in tracking the target that has been under
tracking.
Failure in receiving AIS target data for a specified
time.
9
New Target Alarm Acquisition or activation of a target in the automatic 302
acquisition / activation zone.
REF Target Alarm Decrease in the reference target accuracy.
Trial Warning There is a dangerous target, when trial maneuver is
active.
TT (Boot) Alarm Target tracking unit start failure. 344
TT (Data) Alarm The target tracking unit is malfunctioning. 323
TT 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of targets to be
tracked.
TT MAX Target INFO The maximum number of targets is under acquisition.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

9－3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING

ii. *** is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence.

Table9-5：List of Route Messages and Warnings

Message Class Description ALR No.i
Approach Alarm Approach the route.
Arrival Alarm Arrive at way point.
Break Off(WPT) Alarm Out of the way point.
Cross Track Error Alarm Go off the route.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

Table9-6： List of Operational Alarm Messages and Warnings

Message Class Description ALR No.i
Can't Transmit INFO Tried to transmit within 5 second after standby or
when the transmitter-receiver has any trouble.
Card Full INFO Card: Run out of free space.
Copy Failed INFO Card: Copy failure.
Delete Failed INFO Card: Deletion failure.
Format Card INFO Card: Unformatted card.
Format Failed INFO Card: Format failure.
Invalid Card INFO Card: Invalid card.
Invalid Connection INFO The operator set performance monitor to on without
selecting straight.
Invalid Data INFO Tried to enter any data beyond its range.
Invalid Range INFO TM selection due to TM-disabled range (96 nm).
Zooming in a ZOOM-disabled range (0.125 nm).
MAX Point INFO Tried to enter navigation information beyond the
specified.
No Card INFO Card not detected yet.
No Heading Data INFO Target tracking operation or TM selection when
bearing data is invalid.
No Object INFO No object at the cursor-specified position.
No Position Data INFO Mark or line input when the latitude and longitude is
invalid.
Not Allowed INFO General operation error.
Out of Range INFO Out of target acquisition range.
Read Failed INFO Card: Read failure.
Slave Mode INFO Operation of a menu for the scanner unit when the
slave mode is active.
Write Failed INFO Card: Write failure.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

9－4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING

Table9-7：List of Conditions Messages

Message Class Description ALR No.i
Battery Dead Warning The battery is dead.
Battery Low Warning battery is weakening.
GPS (HDOP) Warning The HDOP level is increased (Decrease in the GPS
accuracy.).
MON Test Warning Performance monitor is active.
Scanner Rotating Warning The scanner is rotating (When transmitter is standby
state.).
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

Table9-8： List of Interswitch Alarms and Messages

Message Class Description ALR No.i
Connection INFO Inhibition of control / connection is set.
Masked
ISW (Data) Alarm No communication, data mismatched, or checksum error. 327
ISW Busy INFO Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching.
ISW Complete INFO The switchover of the Interswitch ended normally.
ISW Error INFO The interswitch is disabled.
ISW Standby INFO The Interswitch recovered normally.
ISW Straight INFO The interswitch is forced to change the connection
into straight.
ISW Time Out INFO Failed in switching.
Master Range CHG INFO The range of the own display unit has changed due
to change in the range of the master display unit.
Master Standby INFO The master display unit does not transmit any
signals.
Pattern CHG Failed INFO Connection change failed.
TXRX Standby INFO The scanner unit is in the standby mode.

9
Update ISW INFO Tried to enter new TXRX function, when interswitch
Software software used old version.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence

Note: Interswitch is un-available for evaluation model.

9－5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING

9.1.2 Operation Checking

When the system is operating, the operation status (located at the upper right of
the screen) is changing pictures.

If picture freeze occurred, turn off the system and restart the system.

Operation Status

9.1.3 Fuse Checking

Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is
necessary to check the related circuits even if there is no trouble. In checking, note
that there is some dispersion in the fusing characteristics. Table 9-8 shows a list of
fuses used in the equipment.
Table9-9：Fuse List
Location Parts# C u r r e n t P r o t e c t i o n Type
Rating Circuit

AC/DC Converter F501 10A Motor ST6-10AN1

GYRO Interface F1 ～ F4 0.5A GYRO MF60NR250V0.5

circuit Interface
circuit

9－6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING

9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING

As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a

specialist engineer for repair or instructions for remedy if any circuit is defective.

There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in
checking or repair work.

１　Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a. Poor contact in terminal board
b. The cable end is not fully connected, that it, contacted with earthed another
terminal.
c. Disconnected cable wire

２　Poor Contact of Connector within Unit

This radar equipment is provided with Table 9-10 standard
i spares.

Table9-10：7ZXRD0025
Name Type/Code Shape (mm) In Spare Parts # Location
use
Fuse MF60NR250V0.5 4 12 F1 ～ F4 GYRO Interface
Circuit
(5ZFGD00006)
Φ6.4 CMJ-462E
30

Fuse ST6-10AN1 1 3 F501 AC/DC Converter

(5ZFCA00053) NBA-5135
Φ6.35
31.8

9－7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING

9.2.1 Circuit Block to be Repaired

Table9-11：Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9172-SA)

Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

SCANNER UNIT MOTOR MDBW10885 DC brushless motor
SCANNER UNIT TRX MODULE CMN-750
SCANNER UNIT AC220V MOTOR DRIVER CBD-2010
SCANNER UNIT AC100V MOTOR DRIVER CBD-2011
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE CIRCUIT CFA-1255
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE UNIT NZR-1017 Including CFA-1261 and
CFA-1262
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT CCB-1655
SCANNER UNIT ENCODER CHT-1071A
SCANNER UNIT SIGNAL PROCESS UNIT NDC-1493 Including CHA-396,
CDC-1349 and CMH-2246
SCANNER UNIT IF INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT CHA-396
SCANNER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1798
SCANNER UNIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1349
SCANNER UNIT INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMH-2246
SCANNER UNIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT CSC-1656
SCANNER UNIT FAN MOTOR KIT NZF-1532 All four of fans in the scanner are
included within this kit.
RADAR RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC45622* CDC-1362 with mounting bracket,
PROCESS UNIT CDC-1363 and CDC-1364
RADAR RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW12056* CDC-1362 with mounting bracket
PROCESS UNIT

RADAR AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1363

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1364

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ-523

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR TERMINAL BOARD CQD-2176

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR MOTHER BOARD CQC-1230

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR FAN (RPU) 109R0612S4D13

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR POWER SUPPLY CBD-1861

PROCESS UNIT

RADAR FAN (PSU) CBP-220

PROCESS UNIT

OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK-1005

UNIT

OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK-1006

UNIT

OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK-1007

UNIT

OPERATION TRACKBALL CCK-2013

UNIT

MONITOR UNIT BEZEL KIT MPXP34743 Radar bezel kit

MONITOR UNIT 23 inch LCD CML-1799 23.1-inch LCD PANEL

9－8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING

Table9-11：Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9172-SA)

Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

MONITOR UNIT LCD OPERATION CIRCUIT CCK-1004

9－9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE

9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE

9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts

Keeping period of maintenance parts is ten years from the production is
discontinued.

9.3.2 When you Request for Repair

If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section 9
carefully and check the suspected point again.

If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment
and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch
office in your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.

Repair within the Warranty Period

If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of charge. In case that
any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major
such as natural disaster and fire, the product will be repaired with charges.

Repair after the Warranty Period

If any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it

will be made at your own charge upon your request.

Necessary Information for Repair

• Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number

• Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check List"
on page 9-10
• Name of company/organization, address and telephone number

9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance

The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the
parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of
operation. So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in
addition to your daily care.

For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.Such
maintenance will be made with charges.

For further details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices.

9 － 10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE

Radar Failure Check List

When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could
i confirm the check items and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.
If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is
installed, and give the correct information on the product.

Ship name: 　Phone: 　Fax:

i i
Radar general model name:JMA- 　 Serial No. :
i. Write the full model name correctly

Check the following items in the order of the number, and check the applicable
answer between YES or NO.

If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (16),
others.

No. Check Item Result

(1) Power can be turned on. (The lamp on the Operation unit is lit) YES NO
i
(2) A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status. YES NO
(3)i When powering-on (or TX ON), LCD monitor something is lit. YES NO
i,ii
(4) YES NO
ii
(5) Fixed marker is displayed. YES NO
(6)ii VRM is displayed. YES NO
(7)ii While noise is displayed while set at SEA and RAIN minimum, GAIN YES NO
maximum, IR-OFF and range 48 NM.
(8)ii Target reflection echo is displayed. YES NO
(9)ii Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal. YES NO
ii
(10) EBL is displayed. YES NO
(11)ii Cursor mark moves. YES NO
(12)ii,ii GYRO course can be set and normally displayed. YES NO
ii,iii
(13) LOG speed can be normally displayed. YES NO
ii
(14) Target tracking function works normally. YES NO
(15)ii,iii If equipped with an interswitch, when switching from the straight mode (II) to YES NO
(X), the failures (items marked NO) in the above (1) to (14), are switched over
to the other unit.
（16） Others (Error message, etc. )
9

i. If result is NO, then check the fuse. (Refer to Section 9.1.2 "Operation Checking" and Section 9.2 "TROUBLE
SHOOTING")
ii. Check these items at transmission.
iii. Functions mentioned in the items (12), (13) and (15) may be optional, answer is not necessary.

9－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE

9 － 12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 10
DISPOSAL

DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ....................................................................10-1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .....................................................10-1
10.3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS .................................................................10-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT

10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT

When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations for
the place of disposal.

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES

When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to

insulate the batteries by taping the + - terminals.
Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may
occur.

In this unit, Lithium batteries are used for the following parts:

Radar Processing circuit (CDC-1362): BT300 (Maxell: CR2032)

• Do not store used lithium batteries. Dispose of them in accordance with

regulations of local government.
• When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by
taping the + - terminals. For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local
laws and regulations. For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the
product our business office, or local government.
10

10－ 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS

10.3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS

有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements）

形式名(Type): JMA-9100 Series, JMA-7100Series 名称(Name): RADAR

有毒有害物质或元素
部件名称 (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name)
铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)

雷达天线单元
(Scanner Unit) × × ○ × × ×
收发信单元
(Transmitter-receiver Unit) × × × × × ×
主船内装置 (Inboard Unit)
・显示装置 (Display Unit)
・键盘装置 (OperationUnit) × × × × × ×
・信号处理装置
(RADAR Process Unit)

外部设备 (Peripherals)
・选择 (Options)
・电线类 (Cables) × × × × × ×
・手册 (Documennts)

○：表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11306-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this
part is below the requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.)

×：表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。
　　(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials
used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

10－ 2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION

SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9172-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-1
11.2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532) ...............................................................11-2
11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170) .................................................................11-3
11.4 Target Tracking Function ...................................................................11-6
11.5 AIS FUNCTION .....................................................................................11-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.1 JMA-9172-SA TYPE RADAR

11.1 JMA-9172-SA TYPE RADAR

GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Class of emission P0N, Q0N
Display Color Raster Scan
Screen 23.1inch LCD (Effective diameter of Radar: more than 320mm)
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Range Resolution less than 30m
Minimum Detection Range less than 40m
Bearing Accuracy less than 1°
Bearing Indication Relative motion mode : N-UP, C-UP and H-UP
True motion mode : N-UP and C-UP
Ambient Condition Temperature
SCANNER UNIT -25 to +55℃ (Storage -25 to +70 ℃ )
Other Unit -15 to +55 ℃
Relative humidity 93% at +40 ℃
Vibration 2 to 13.2Hz　 Amplitude +/-1mm +/-10%
13.2 to 100Hz　Acceleration 7m/s2
Power Supply Input AC100 to 115V, 50/60Hz, 1φ or
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1φ
Power Consumption Approx.600VA typical
Approx. 2200VA at Maximum wind speed
PS Voltage Fluctuation +/-10% (at the maximum cable length)
Pre Heating Time Within10 sec
From STBY to TX Within 5 sec.
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532)

See 11.2
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)

See 11.3
OPTION

Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE-1532-D (Only heater collar)

Interswitch Unit NQE-3141-2A (Maximum 2 Radars)
NQE-3141-4A (Maximum 4 Radars)
DISPLAY UNIT (Desktop type) NCD-9170T
Maximum Cable Length

SCANNER UNIT to
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
65m
SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS

SCANNER UNIT 5.1m

DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m

11

11 － 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532)

11.2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532)

SCANNER UNIT　NKE-1130
Dimension Height 791 x Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
Mass Approx.170kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.9°
Vertical beam width : 25°
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10°)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10°)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor AC100 - 115V、50/60Hz、1φ or
AC220 - 240V、50/60Hz、1φ
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency P0N(3040MHz), Q0N(3060MHz ± 4MHz)
Transmitting Power 250W (+25/-50%)
Transmitter Solid State Power Amplifier
TX Pulse width (1st) / SP1：0.07μs / 4.6μs, 8MHz / 1860Hz or 2280Hz *i
TX Pulse width, MP1：0.14μs / 9.1μs, 8MHz / 1860Hz or 2280Hz *i
Frequency Deviation Width (2nd) MP2：0.29μs / 9.1μs, 8MHz / 1860Hz or 2280Hz *i
/ Repetition Frequency LP1：0.57μs / 9.1μs, 8MHz / 1280Hz
LP2：1.14μs / 18.3μs, 8MHz / 640Hz
0.125、0.25、0.5NM ：SP1
0.75NM ：SP1/MP1
1.5NM ：SP1/MP1/MP2
3NM ：SP1/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
6NM ：MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
12NM ：MP2/LP1/LP2
24NM ：LP1/LP2
48NM ：LP2
96NM ：LP2
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 63MHz
Band Width : 30MHz
Gain : more than 50dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Linear Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure within 4.0dB ( Typical)

*i: PRF setting is "Normal" : 1860Hz

PRF setting is "High Power" : 2280Hz Refer to Appendix 3.8.3.2

11 － 2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)

11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)

DISPLAY UNIT NCD-9170

Dimension Width 700 x Depth 850 x Height 1100 (mm)
Structure Self-Standing, Drip Proof
Mass Approx.130kg
Screen 23.1inch Color LCD (Effective Diameter, more than 320mm)
Viewing Distance 1m from the center of Display
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Range Marker 0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16NM
Range Accuracyr Less than 1% of the Range Scale in use, or 30m whichever is larger
Variable Range Marker 2 (VRM1/VRM2)
VRM Scale 0.000 to 100.0nm, Numerical Indication in 4 digits
Bearing Scale 360° in 1° step
Off Center Within 66% of Radius, except 96nm range
Trackball Cursor Built-in (Target Range, Relative/True bearing Presentation)
Electronic Bearing Lines 2 (EBL1/EBL2) (on Center/Floating)
EBLBearing Indication 000.0° to 359.9°Numerical Indication in 4 digits
Marking Function Electronic Mark (Maximum 20 points)
Heading Line Indication Electronic
True Motion Unit Built in (0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24 and 48nm)
Anti Sea Clutter (SEA) Manual/AUTO
Anti Rain Clutter (SEA) Manual/AUTO
Display mode North-up / Head-up / Course-up
Trails Indication Off/0.25/0.5/1/3/6/10/15/30/60min
Video Process (PROC) Built in (Scan correlation / Remain)
Interference Rejection (IR) Built in ( Off / Low / Middle / High)
Auto-acquisition Zone (AZ) Sector (2)
User Mapi Built in, Mark and Line (20,000 points)
Self diagnostic function Built in
i
Own Ship's Track Indication Built in
Parallel Index Line (PI) Built in
AIS Indication Built in Display 300
Activate 100　
Association function:Built in
Interfacing Slave Display (TRG, VD, BP, BZ)
GPS IEC61162-1(NMEA0183)
LOG
GYRO
AIS IEC61162-2
Inter Switch (OPTION)
11
Radar Buoy
External Alarm output

11 － 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)

Receivable Signalii
Receive capability NAV1/NAV2/LOG/ALM/AIS/HDG at TB4501
Port: COM DSub-9pin
Navigation equipment Longitude/Latitude GGA>RMC>RMA>GNS>GLL
IEC61162-1/2
Waypoint RMB>BWC(BWR)
COG/SOG RMC ＞ RMA ＞ VTG
SPEED VBW
Day/Time information ZDA
Alarm acknowledge ACK
Rate of Turn ROT
Rudder RSA
Bearing signal GYRO-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 36x(GYRO I/F)
GYRO-STEP 360x, 180x, 90x, 36x(GYRO I/F)
IEC61162-2 38400bps THS>HDT　over 40Hz
(HDG port at terminal board TB4501)
iii
IEC61162-1 HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW
(HDG port at terminal board TB4501)
Speed signal LOG-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 30x(GYRO I/F)
LOG-PULSE 800, 400, 200, 100(GYRO I/F)
External event mark Contact input (EVENT port at terminal board TB4601)
Radar buoy Negative input (RBVD port at terminal board TB4401)
Depth IEC61162-1/JRC DPT>DBS>DBT>DBK,
JRC format
Water temperature IEC61162-1/JRC MTW, JRC format
Tendency IEC61162-1/JRC CUR, JRC format
Wind IEC61162-1 MWV>MWD
AIS IEC61162-2 VDM,VDO (AIS port at terminal
board TB4601 )
Acknowledge Contact input (SYSACK, ARPAACK, PWRACK port
at terminal board TB4601)
Sendable Signal
Slave video Radar video: TIY, VD, BP(2048p), BZ
(Terminal board TB4401)
Send capability NAV1/NAV2/ALM/ARPA/JARPA port at TB4501
Port MNT port at TB4601
COM at DSub-9pin
Navigation information Radar system data RSD
IEC61162-1/2
Own ship data OSD
Tracking target data TTM,TLL,TTD,TLB,JRC-ARPA
AIS target data TTM,TLL,TTD,TLB
Alarm ALR
Auto pilot APB
Bearing of destination BOD
Latitude/Longitude data GGA,GLL,RMC
Waypoint RMB,BWC
COG/SOG VTG
Cross track error XTE

11 － 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)

Heading data HDT,THS

External alarm Default setting normally closed contact
Maximum current 200mA (SYSALM, ALPAALM, PWRALM
port at terminal board TB4601)

Acknowledge Contact output (ACKOUT port at terminal board TB4401)

Watchman reset Contact output (WMRST port at terminal board TB4401)
Remote maintenance JRC format (MNT port at terminal board TB4601)
AIS alarm acknowledge ACK (AIS port at terminal board TB4601)
External monitor Multi scan monitor Analog RGB, HD15pin Connector 2 port

i. Only with Navigation Equipment is connected.

ii. The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.96(72).
The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).

iii. Can't be use for target tracking.

11

11 － 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.4 Target Tracking Function

11.4 Target Tracking Function

Target Tracking
Function
Available range scale All range
Acquisition Acquisition mode Manual/AUTO（AUTO mode uses Auto-acquisition Zone）
Manual Cancellation Any one Target or All targets at once
Acquisition Range 0.1nm - 24nm/32nm*i (Available all range scale)
Tracking Number of Target 100 Targets (AUTO Tracking)
Tracking range 0.1nm - 24nm/32nm*i (Available all range scale)
Presentation Display mode TM (True Motion) / RM (Relative Motion)
Azimuth mode North-up / Head-up / Course-up
Vector mode True/Relative Display
Vector Length Variable, 1 to 60 min. (1min. step)
Past Position True/Relative Display　
Number of Dots…10 points　
Display Interval Time…0.5 / 1 / 2/ 4 min
Time to Display Vector Within 1min
Time to Stabilize Vector Within 3min
Alarm Auto-acquisition Zone 2 (sector)
Setting Range AZ1 (0.5 ～ 32nm),AZ2 (0.5 ～ 32nm)
Alarm Indication Symbol on Display, Visible / Audible Alarm
Safe Limits Setting Condition CPA LIMIT 0.1 to 9.9NM
（CPA ／ TCPA） TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99 minute
Setting Condition Safe Target CPA ＞ CPA LIMIT
0 ＞ TCPA
TCPA ＞ TCPA LIMIT
Danger Target CPA ≦ CPA LIMIT
0 ≦ TCPA ≦ TCPA LIMIT
Alarm Indication Status Symbol Alarm Audible
Safe Target 〇 (wht) OFF OFF
Danger Target ○ (red) CPA/TCPA ON
Lost Target Symbol on Display
Visible / Audible Alarm
Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 4 Targets
True Bearing, Range, True Course, True Speed,CPA,TCPA,BCR,BCT

Own Ship's Data Course and Speed

Trial Maneuver Manual Setting
Trial Course 0°to 359.9°
Trial Speed 0 to 100 kn
Accuracy of Display Complied with IMO Requirement
System Failure Alarm Visible / Audible Alarm
Speed Input Manual/AUTO (LOG)
*i: PRF setting is "Normal" : 32 nm.
PRF setting is "High Power" : 24 nm. Refer to Appendix 3.8.3.2

11 － 6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.5 AIS FUNCTION

11.5 AIS FUNCTION

AIS Function
Available range scale All range
Activation Activation mode Manual/AUTO（AUTO mode uses Auto-activation Zone）
Manual Cancellation Any one Target
Presentation Number of Activated Target 100 Targets
Number of Target 300 Targets (sleeping target and activated target)
Past Position True/Relative Display
Number of Dots…10 points
Display Interval Time…0.5 / 1 / 2/ 4 min
Display Interval distance…0.1 / 0.2 / 0.5/ 1 NM
Message Broadcast Message, Addressed Message
Display mode TM (True Motion) / RM (Relative Motion)
Azimuth mode North-up / Head-up / Course-up
Vector mode True/Relative Display
Vector Length Variable, 1 to 60 min. (1min. step)
Alarm Auto-activation Zone 2 (Sector)
Setting Range AZ1(0.5 to 32nm), AZ2(0.5 to 32nm)
* 3.8.3.3 PRF setting “Normal”
AZ1(0.5 to 32nm), AZ2(0.5 to 32nm)
* 3.8.3.3 PRF setting “High Power”
Alarm Indication Symbol on Display, Visible / Audible Alarm
Safe Limits Setting Condition CPA LIMIT 0.1 to 9.9NM
（CPA ／ TCPA） TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99min
Alarm Condition Safe Target CPA ＞ CPA LIMIT
0 ＞ TCPA
TCPA ＞ TCPA LIMIT
Danger Target CPA ≦ CPA LIMIT
0 ≦ TCPA ≦ TCPA LIMIT
Alarm Indication Status Symbol Alarm Audible
Safe Target △ (wht) OFF OFF
Danger Target △ (red) CPA/TCPA ON
Lost Target Symbol on Display
Visible / Audible Alarm
Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 2 Targets
simple display Ship's Name, Call Sign, MMSI, Course, Speed,
CPA and TCPA
detail display Ship's Name, Call Sign, MMSI, Course, Speed, CPA,
TCPA, Bearing, Range, Ship's Heading Bearing,

11
Rate of Turn, Latitude, Longitude, Destination
and Navigation Status
Own Ship's Data The ship's name, call sign, MMSI, course, speed,
ship's heading bearing, rate of turn, latitude,
longitude, destination and navigation status of own ship
Trial Maneuver Manual Setting

11 － 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.5 AIS FUNCTION

Trial Course 0° to 360°

Trial Speed 0 to 100 kn
Accuracy of Display Complied with IMO Requirement
System Failure Alarm Visible / Audible Alarm
Speed Input Auto (LOG)

11 － 8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix A
NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit

NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit

A.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ A-1
A.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Interswitch Setup ........................................................................... A-1
A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A.2.1 Operation Flow ............................................................................... A-3
A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu ........................................................................... A-4
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................ A-6
A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display Units) .. A-7
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units ................................. A-9
A.3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-10
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-10
A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern .................................... A-10
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-10
A.3.4 Setting at Installation ................................................................... A-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.1 OVERVIEW

A.1 OVERVIEW

A.1.1 Overview
Interswitch NQE-3141 is equipment that enables free changeover between radar
display units installed on the bridge and antenna units having different
characteristics.

If display unit is turned off or malfunctioned, the scanner unit can be controlled by
other display unit.

If interswitch unit had malfunctioned, the radar system is switched to standalone

mode.

Up to 8 units can be changed over.

When the connected scanner is changed, following setting values are

automatically loaded.

Tune Adjustment Section 7.1.3 "Tuning (Tune Adjustment)"

Bearing Adjustment Section 7.1.4 "Bearing Adjustment"

Range Adjustment Section 7.1.5 "Range Adjustment"

Antenna Height Section 7.1.8 "Antenna Height Setting (Antenna

Height)"

Antenna installation location Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)"

Sector Blank Section 7.2.2 "Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)"

Performance monitor Section 7.3.4 "Adjustment of Performance Monitor

adjustment (SSR MON)"

PRF Fine Tuning Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)"

A.1.2 Interswitch Setup

Connection modes can be changed simply by changing the interswitch connection
(upper left of the display).
A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a slave
i connection.

Before a slave display unit can be placed in transmission state, the

master display unit must be placed in transmission state.

A
A－ 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.1 OVERVIEW

upper left of the display

Connected
Scanner
Unit
Connection
Mode
Connection Switch

The upper stand indicates the number of the connected scanner unit.

The lower stand indicates the connection mode.

Master :Mode in which the scanner unit can be controlled by the

display unit
Slave :Mode in which the scanner unit cannot be controlledi

i. When Slave is selected, transmission / standby and pulse length cannot be changed.
The available range is also limited.

A－ 2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

Follow the flowchart below to change the current interswitch connection pattern.

A.2.1 Operation Flow

Place the transmission standby state .

Open the Inter Switch Menu .

Change the connection pattern .

Close the Inter Switch Menu .

A
A－ 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu

The Inter Switch Menu can be opened only when the transmission standby state.

Procedures
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop transmitting.
The transmission standby state will be placed.

2) Move the cursor onto the Interswitch connection change (upper

left of the display), and left-click.
The Inter Switch Menu will appear.

Exit
1) Left-click the 0.Exit button.
The Inter Switch Menu will close.

Inter Switch Menu (with 2 Display Units)

Current
connection
status

a. Connection
pattern

Display unit
in operation

b. Set c.Exit

A－ 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

a. Connection pattern
If this button is clicked, the connection pattern is selected.

The display unit in operation is enclosed in a square □ .

The background of the current connection pattern display is highlighted.

b. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is determined.

c. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed .

If only 2 display units are installed but the interswitch is set for 3
i or more display units, the Inter Switch Menu for 3 or more
display units will appear.

Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units)

a. Connected
scanner unit

b. Display unit
connected as
master

c. Display unit
connected as
slave

f. Set
d. Name

e. File
g. Exit
Operations

a. Connected scanner unit

In mode for naming a display unit or antenna unit, clicking on a unit opens the name input
window.

A
A－ 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

b. Display unit connected as master

c. Display unit connected as slave
If this button is clicked, select / cancel the display unit.

If this button is clicked in the naming a display unit or scanner unit mode , the name input
window is opened .

d. Name
If this button is clicked, set to the display or scanner unit rename mode.

e. File Operations
If this button is clicked, the File Operations menu is opened.。

f. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is determined.

g. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed .

A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units)

If two display units are installed, a connection pattern needs to be selected.

Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch menu (with 2 Display Units).

2) Move the cursor onto the Connection pattern (see Section A.2.2 "Inter
Switch Menu" and Section a. "Connection pattern") to be changed , and left-click.

The connection pattern will be selected, and 3. Set (Section b. "Set") will blink.

3) Left-click the 3. Set button.

The connection pattern will be changed.

A－ 6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display

Units)
If three or more display units are installed, the layout of connection patterns needs
to be set.

Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).

2) Move the cursor onto the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave") to be changed , and left-
click.
The selected display unit will be highlighted.

To deselect the display unit, left-click key again.

3) Move the cursor to the change-destination display unit, and left-

click.
he selected display unit in step 2 will be switched to the change-destination display unit, and
3. Set (Section f. "Set") will blink.

If the change destination is empty, control will move and 3. Set will blink.

4) Left-click the 3. Set button.

The connection pattern will be changed.

A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a

i slave connection.

A
A－ 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations)

Frequently used connection patterns can be read easily by saving interswitch
connection patterns.

[1] Loading connection patterns (Load)

Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).

2) Left-click the 2. File Operation button.

The File Operations menu will appear.

3) Left-click the 3. Load button.

Currently saved connection patterns in memory will be listed.

4) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded.

Confirmation Window will appear.

5) Left-click the 1. Yes to load.

The connection pattern will be changed.

[2] Saving connection patterns (Save)

Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).

2) Left-click the 2. File Operation button.

The File Operations window will appear.

3) Left-click the 2. Save button.

The Save menu will appear.

Currently saved connection patterns in memory will be listed.

4) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be saved.

The Input File Name window will appear.

5) Enter the file name to be saved.

Up to 8 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".

The connection pattern will be saved when the name is input.

A－ 8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION

[3] Erasing a connection pattern (Erase)

Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).

2) Left-click the 2. File Operation button.

The File Operations window will appear.

3) Left-click the 3. Erase button.

The Erase menu will appear.

The list of connection patterns stored in the memory will be displayed.

4) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be erased.

Confirmation Window will appear.

5) Left-click the 1. Yes to load.

The selected connection pattern is erased and the file name is deleted from the list.

A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units

The display units and antenna units can be named.

Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).

2) Left-click the 1. Name button.

"Name" will be highlighted, indicating that the rename mode is activated.

3) Move the cursor to the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
or scanner unit (Section a.
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave")
"Connected scanner unit") to be renamed , and left-click.
he Input IND Name or the Input TXRX Name window will appear.

4) Input a new unit name.

Up to 8 characters can be input as a unit name. For the input method on the character input
menu, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".

The selected display unit or antenna unit will be renamed when the new name is input.

A
A－ 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE

A.3 REFERENCE

A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern

After the current interswitch connection pattern has been changed, operation
needs to wait until the system is ready. This is because the preheat time varies
depending on the previous connection of the scanner unit and display unit.

The wait time is necessary for protecting the electronic tubes that emit radio
waves.

a) When not changed to a new connection pattern Preheating not

required
b) When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating not
scanner unit had been used before the change required
c) When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating
scanner unit had not been used before the change required

A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern

An attempt to change to another connection pattern immediately after the
completion of connection pattern change may fail.

This is because internal processing still needs some preparation time upon
completion of connection pattern change. Let several seconds pass between
connection pattern change operations.

A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit

Before a slave display unit can be placed in transmission state, the master display
unit must be placed in transmission state. If the master display unit is moved from
the transmission state to the transmission standby state, the slave display unit is
forcibly placed in transmission standby state. When they are in transmission
standby state, Master Standby is shown in the alarm indication (lower right of the
display), and the alarm sounds.

A slave display unit cannot control tune. Tune is controlled by the master display
unit. Slave is shown in the transmitter pulse length (upper left of the display).

Range change for a slave display unit is limited by the range and pulse length /
repetition frequency of the master display unit. As a rule, a greater range than the
range of the master display unit cannot be set for a slave display unit. However, if
the transmitter pulse length of a slave display unit is identical to the master
display unit's and the repetition frequency is within the master display unit's, a
greater range than the master display unit's can be selected for the slave display
unit. When the master display unit narrows the range or changes the transmitter

A －10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE

pulse length, the range of the slave display unit may be forcibly changed. In this
case, Master Range CHG is shown in the alarm indication (lower right of the
display), and the alarm sounds.

A.3.4 Setting at Installation

Setting of the interswitch circuit (CCL-304*)

The settings of the DIP switches SW11 to SW13 are shown below.

SW 11 SW 13 SW 12

Interswitch circuit PCB

CCL-304*

1) SW11 setting (extension mode and master/slave settings)

1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

Unused

Description 1, 2
Set the switch to OFF in
Unused ON
normal state.
Unused OFF

Master/slave setting

Description 3
Set the switch to ON if the
slave ISW PCB is selected in Slave ON
extension mode.
Master OFF

Extension mode setting

Description 4
Set the switch to OFF if the
number of connected display Extension mode ON
units is four or less .
Normal mode OFF

A
A－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE

2) SW12 setting (radar connection settings)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

OFF
Radar connection settings

No.1 display unit connected ON

1
No.1 display unit NOT connected OFF

No.1 scanner unit connected ON

2
No.1 scanner unit NOT connected OFF

No.2 display unit connected ON

3
No.2 display unit NOT connected OFF

No.2 scanner unit connected ON

4
No.2 scanner unit NOT connected OFF

No.3 display unit connected ON

5
No.3 display unit NOT connected OFF

No.3 scanner unit connected ON

6
No.3 scanner unit NOT connected OFF

No.4 display unit connected ON

7
No.4 display unit NOT connected OFF

No.4 scanner unit connected ON

8
No.4 scanner unit NOT connected OFF

3) SW13 (unused)
1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

Unused (All OFF) 1,2,3,4

Before the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit can be set, the
interswitch breaker must be turned off in order to ensure safety
operation.

A －12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix B
DRAWINGS

DRAWINGS
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-1
B.1.1 NCD-9170 ........................................................................................ B-2
B.1.2 NCD-9170T ...................................................................................... B-3
B.1.3 NWZ-178-R ...................................................................................... B-4
B.1.4 NWZ-178-RT .................................................................................... B-5
B.1.5 NCE-5322-R ..................................................................................... B-6
B.1.6 NCE-5322-RT ................................................................................... B-7
B.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ............................................. B-8
B.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit .................................................. B-9
B.4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-10
B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ B-11
B.5.1 NKE-1532 ...................................................................................... B-12
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit ....................................... B-13
B.6.1 NKE-1532 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-14
B.6.2 NKE-1532 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-15
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-16
B.7.1 JMA-9172-SA ................................................................................ B-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B.7.2 NCD-9170T .................................................................................... B-18
B.8 GYRO I/F ............................................................................................. B-19
B.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-21
B.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ......................................... B-21
B.9.2 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................. B-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

B
B－ 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178-R
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
(USER SUPPLY)
NCE-5322-R
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRKBALL
(USER SUPPLY)
OPERATION OPERATION
LCD PANEL CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
H-7WSRD0002※ CCK-1006 CCK-1005
PC620 PC610
A1
(“※” means revision of the specification document.) 7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK-1004 PC710
OPERATION
CIRCUIT

*PS/2 EXTENSION CABLE

LCD

(USER SUPPLY)
8P
J711

Fig B-1: Interconnection Diagram of NCD-9170

8P
H-7ZCRD1328 6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P
J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

9P 2m H-7ZCRD1329A (NWZ-178-R) OPERATION CIRCUIT D

6P 6P
CCK-1007
30P
PC640
AC 2m VM0301-VM0303B2M (NWZ-178-R)

J6410 J6409 J6401

DVI 2m H-7ZCRD1345 (NWZ-178-R)

RADAR PROCESS UNIT AIS PROCESS

CIRCUIT
NDC-1478 15P
J4409 64P
J4403
VGA
CDC-1363 2m H-7ZCRD1337 (NCE-5163-R )
15P 64P JRC SUPPLY
J4405 J4601
PC460
VGA

B－ 2
28P
J4406
ARPA PROCESS
DVI-D CIRCUIT
64P
J4404 9P TO OPU
8P
J4407 CDC-1364 *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
J4311
RJ-45 64P
J4501
PC450
3P
50P J4313 TO SUB OPU
J4408 30P
CF-card
B102 J4312
3P
11P
RADAR PROCESS GYRO INTERFACE TB914
J4314
TO TRU

INTERSWITCH UNIT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P
CH1 26P
14P
TB4101

NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-523 TO ISW
>

CDC-1362 PC420
11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
CH2
B.DRAWINGS

AC OUT2 2P
PC440 15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
TB911 TO EXT-RADAR
J4401 J4402 J1 J4308
30P
+ BATTERY
POWER SUPPLY

2P
ー
IN 2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
U AC OUT2 CBD-1861 CQD-2176 TO SENSOR
22P
20P W401 H-7ZCRD1339
PC430

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

V 50P TB4501
NCD-9170

SCANNER MOTOR
W J4301
50P POWER
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO ALARM SYSTEM
>

J4101 J4102 J4104 J4103 22P

W402 H-7ZCRD1339 TB4601
50P
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

18P
J4302
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
TO GYRO
6P
TB4701
RED W403 H-7ZCRD1339
50P
WHT 8P
20P
CQC-1230

AC IN
J4108 J4303 TO LOG
BLU 50P
PC410 J4107 12P
TB4701
18P
J4304
TO PC
9P
8P J4310
RED J4305
U 4351A07335 FILTER U
BLU
W OUT IN W AC100-115V 50/60Hz
WHT AC220-240V 50/60Hz
NCD-9170（自立型）　機内接続図
B.1.1

V V
JMA-9172-SA
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9170 (self standing)
 B
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178-RT
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

(USER SUPPLY)
NCE-5322-RT
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRKBALL
(USER SUPPLY)
OPERATION OPERATION
LCD PANEL CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
H-7WSRD0002※ CCK-1006 CCK-1005
PC620 PC610
A1
(“※” means revision of the specification document.) 7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK-1004 PC710
OPERATION
CIRCUIT

*PS/2 EXTENSION CABLE

LCD

(USER SUPPLY)
8P
J711

Fig B-2: Interconnection Diagram of NCD-9170T

8P
H-7ZCRD1328 6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P
J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
9P 5m H-7ZCRD1330A (NWZ-178-RT)
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
6P 6P
CCK-1007
30P
PC640
AC 5m VM0301-VM0303B5M (NWZ-178-RT)

DVI 5m H-7ZCRD1346 (NWZ-178-RT)

J6410 J6409
>

J6401
B.DRAWINGS

RADAR PROCESS UNIT AIS PROCESS

CIRCUIT
NDC-1478 15P
J4409 64P
J4403
VGA
CDC-1363 5m H-7ZCRD1338 (NCE-5322-RT)
15P 64P JRC SUPPLY
J4405 J4601
PC460
VGA

B－ 3
28P
J4406
ARPA PROCESS
CIRCUIT
>

DVI-D
64P
J4404 9P TO OPU
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

8P
J4407 CDC-1364 *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
J4311
RJ-45 64P PC450
J4501 3P
50P J4313 TO SUB OPU
J4408 30P
CF-card
B102 J4312
3P
11P
RADAR PROCESS GYRO INTERFACE TB914
J4314
TO TRU

INTERSWITCH UNIT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P CH1 26P
14P
TB4101

NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-523 TO ISW
CDC-1362 PC420
11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
CH2
AC OUT2 2P
PC440 15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
TB911 TO EXT-RADAR
J4401 J4402 J1 J4308
30P
+ BATTERY
POWER SUPPLY

2P
ー
IN 2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
CQD-2176
NCD-9170T

U AC OUT2 CBD-1861 TO SENSOR

20P W401 H-7ZCRD1339 22P

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

V
W
50P
J4301 PC430 TB4501 SCANNER MOTOR
POWER
50P
64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO ALARM SYSTEM
J4101 J4102 J4104 J4103 22P
W402 H-7ZCRD1339 TB4601
50P
18P
J4302
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106
TO GYRO
6P
TB4701
RED W403 H-7ZCRD1339
50P
WHT 8P
20P
CQC-1230

AC IN
J4108 J4303 TO LOG
BLU 50P
PC410 J4107 12P
TB4701
18P
J4304
TO PC
9P
8P J4310
RED J4305
U 4351A07335 FILTER U
BLU
W OUT IN W AC100-115V 50/60Hz
WHT AC220-240V 50/60Hz
NCD-9170T（卓上型）　機内接続図
B.1.2

V V
JMA-9172-SA
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9170T (desktop)
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

B.1.3 NWZ-178-R

CML-1799
(H-7WSRD0002※)
(“※” means revision of the specification document.)

LCD

CCK-1004
PC710

FAN AC100V
RGB DVI ALM 240V BRILL J7101
DVI 2m H-7ZCRD1345

9P 2m H-7ZCRD1329A

AC 2m VM0301-VM0303B2Mｸﾛ

FL1

8P
H-7ZCRD1328
CQD-2176
CDC-1362

CBD-1861
OUTLET
J4406

J4309

CML-790-R (NWZ-178-R)

Monitor Unit Interconnection

Fig B-3: Interconnection Diagram of NWZ-178-R

B－ 4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

B.1.4 NWZ-178-RT

CML-1799
(H-7WSRD0002※)
(“※” means revision of the specification document.)
LCD

CCK-1004
PC710

FAN AC100V
RGB DVI ALM 240V BRILL J7101
DVI 5m H-7ZCRD1346

9P 5m H-7ZCRD1330A

AC 5m VM0301-VM0303B5Mｸﾛ

FL1

8P
H-7ZCRD1328
CQD-2176
CDC-1362

CBD-1861
OUTLET
J4406

J4309

CML-790-RT (NWZ-178-RT)

Monitor Unit Interconnection

Fig B-4: Interconnection Diagram of NWZ-178-RT

B
B－ 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

B.1.5 NCE-5322-R

OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5322-R

OPERATION OPERATION
CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK-1006 CCK-1005
PC620 PC610
A1

7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1

W63 H-7ZCRD1333A
W62 H-7ZCRD1332

W64 H-7ZCRD1334
W65 H-7ZCRD1335

6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P

J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402

OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-1007
PC640
6P 6P 2P 30P
J6410 J6409 J6407 J6401

FL1

W67 2m H-7ZCRD1337

CMD-1031-R (NCE-5322-R)

Operation Unit Interconnection

Fig B-5: Interconnection Diagram of NCE-5322-R

B－ 6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit

B.1.6 NCE-5322-RT

OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5322-RT

OPERATION OPERATION
CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK-1006 CCK-1005
PC620 PC610
A1

7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1

W63 H-7ZCRD1333A
W62 H-7ZCRD1332

W64 H-7ZCRD1334
W65 H-7ZCRD1335

6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P

J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402

OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-1007
PC640
6P 6P 2P 30P
J6410 J6409 J6407 J6401

FL1

W68 2m H-7ZCRD1338

CMD-1031-RT (NCE-5322-RT)

Operation Unit Interconnection

Fig B-6: Interconnection Diagram of NCE-5322-RT

B
B－ 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power System Diagram of Display Unit

MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178-R/RT
*OPTION OPERATION UNIT
(USER SUPPLY)
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRKBALL
NCE-5322-R/RT
(USER SUPPLY)
OPERATION OPERATION
LCD PANEL CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CML-1799 CCK-1006 CCK-1005
PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK-1004 PC710
OPERATION

+5V
CIRCUIT

*PS/2 EXTENSION CABLE

LCD

Fig B-7: Power System Diagram of NCD-9170/T

(USER SUPPLY)
8P
J711
U,V
AC100-115V
AC220-240V 8P
B.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit

50/60Hz,1φ H-7ZCRD1328 6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P

J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
9P 2m H-7ZCRD1329A (NWZ-178-R )
9P 5m H-7ZCRD1330A (NWZ-178-RT)
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-1007
AC 2m VM0301-VM0303B2M (NWZ-178-R )
AC 5m VM0301-VM0303B5M (NWZ-178-RT)

6P 6P 30P
PC640
DVI 2m H-7ZCRD1345 (NWZ-178-R )
DVI 5m H-7ZCRD1346 (NWZ-178-RT)

J6410 J6409 J6401

RADAR PROCESS UNIT AIS PROCESS
5V
NDC-1478 15P
J4409 64P
J4403
CIRCUIT
VGA
2m H-7ZCRD1337 (NCE-5163-R ) / self standing
CDC-1363 5m H-7ZCRD1338 (NCE-5322-RT) / desktop
15P 64P
J4405 PC460 JRC SUPPLY

B－ 8
J4601
VGA
P+12V
28P
ARPA PROCESS DC+24V
J4406
DVI-D
3.3V CIRCUIT
64P
8P J4404 9P TO OPU
J4407 CDC-1364 *OPTION B101
J4309 30P
RJ-45 J4311
64P
J4501
PC450
3P
50P J4313 TO SUB OPU
J4408 30P
CF-card B102 J4312
3P +48V
RADAR PROCESS GYRO INTERFACE
11P
TB914
J4314
TO TRU (to SCANNER UNIT)

INTERSWITCH UNIT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P CH1 26P
14P
TB4101

NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
CMJ-523
>

TO ISW
CDC-1362 PC420
11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
B.DRAWINGS

CH2
AC OUT2 2P
PC440 P+5V 15P
64P 64P 64P 2P
J4401 TB911 TO EXT-RADAR
J4402 J1 J4308
+ BATTERY 30P
POWER SUPPLY
2P
P+12V
ー
IN
3.3V,5V,
2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
U AC OUT2
12V,-12V CQD-2176 TO SENSOR

CBD-1861
20P W401 H-7ZCRD1339 22P
PC430
V 50P

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TB4501 SCANNER MOTOR
INPUT VOLTAGE W J4301
50P POWER
SELECT SWITCH 64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 P+5V TO ALARM SYSTEM
J4101 J4102 J4104 J4103
>

22P
W402 H-7ZCRD1339 TB4601
50P
AC100-115V 18P
J4302
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

AC220-240V MOTHERBOARD 50P

J4106
TO GYRO
50/60Hz,1φ 6P
RED 3.3V,5V, W403 H-7ZCRD1339
50P
TB4701
CQC-1230
WHT 20P
8P
12V,-12V

AC IN
J4108 J4303
BLU 50P TO LOG
3.3V,5V,12V,-12V PC410 J4107
18P

12P
TB4701
+48V,DC+24V J4304
3.3V,5V,12V,-12V TO PC
9P
8P +48V,DC+24V J4310
B.2
RED J4305
U 4351A07335 FILTER U
BLU
W OUT IN W AC100-115V 50/60Hz
WHT AC220-240V 50/60Hz
V V
NCD-9170/T 電源系統図
Power Supply system diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9170/T
 B
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178-R/RT
B.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit

Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit

*OPTION OPERATION UNIT

(USER SUPPLY)
*PS/2 MOUSE/TRKBALL
NCE-5322-R/RT
(USER SUPPLY)
OPERATION OPERATION
LCD PANEL CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK-1006 CCK-1005
CML-1799 PC620 PC610
A1
7P 14P 15P
J6201 J6101 J6102
SP1
CCK-1004 PC710

PS/2 PS/2
OPERATION

I/F I/F Audio

CIRCUIT

*PS/2 EXTENSION CABLE

Dimmer
LCD

(USER SUPPLY)
8P Power SW KEY matrix
J711 Encoder

Fig B-8: Signal Flow Diagram of NCD-9170/T

8P
H-7ZCRD1328 6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P 15P
J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
9P 2m H-7ZCRD1329A (NWZ-178-R ) OPERATION CIRCUIT D
>

9P 5m H-7ZCRD1330A (NWZ-178-RT)
CCK-1007
B.DRAWINGS

6P 6P
AC 2m VM0301-VM0303B2M (NWZ-178-R )
AC 5m VM0301-VM0303B5M (NWZ-178-RT)

30P
PC640
DVI 2m H-7ZCRD1345 (NWZ-178-R )
DVI 5m H-7ZCRD1346 (NWZ-178-RT)

J6410 J6409 J6401

RADAR PROCESS UNIT AIS PROCESS
15P Analog RGB CIRCUIT
NDC-1478 J4409 64P
J4403
VGA
2m H-7ZCRD1337 (NCE-5163-R ) / self standing
CDC-1363 5m H-7ZCRD1338 (NCE-5322-RT) / desktop
15P Analog RGB 64P
J4405 J4601
PC460 JRC SUPPLY
VGA

B－ 9
Serial
>

28P Digital Video Interface

J4406
ARPA PROCESS
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

DVI-D CIRCUIT LCD Fan Alarm

64P
J4404 9P TO OPU
8P
J4407
Ethernet CDC-1364 *OPTION J4309 30P
B101 J4311
RJ-45 64P
J4501
PC450
3P
50P J4313 TO SUB OPU
J4408 30P
CF-card
B102 J4312
3P Radar video,
11P
RADAR PROCESS GYRO INTERFACE TB914
J4314
TO TRU
Trigger, Rotation

INTERSWITCH UNIT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 15P CH1 26P
14P
TB4101
Serial

NQE-3141-2A
TB913 J4306
Radar video, Radar video,
CMJ-523 Trigger, Rotation TO ISW
Radar video, CDC-1362 PC420
11P
TB912
26P
J4307
26P
TB4201
Trigger, Rotation
Trigger, Rotation CH2Radar video,
AC OUT2 2P
PC440Serial, GPIO GYRO/LOG
15P Radar video,
64P 64P 64P TB911
Trigger, Rotation 2P
TO EXT-RADAR
J4401 J4402 J1 J4308
30P
Trigger, Rotation
+ BATTERY
POWER SUPPLY

2P
ー
IN 2P
TB905
TERMINAL BOARD TB4401
PC900
U AC OUT2 CQD-2176 TO SENSOR
Serial
CBD-1861
20P W401 video,
H-7ZCRD1339 22P
Radar
V
W Trigger, Rotation
50P
J4301 PC430 TB4501 SCANNER MOTOR
POWER
50P

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

64P 64P 64P 64P J4105 TO ALARM SYSTEM Dry Contact
J4101 J4102 J4104 J4103 22P
W402 H-7ZCRD1339 TB4601
50P
18P
J4302
MOTHERBOARD 50P
J4106 Serial, GPIO
TO GYRO
6P
GYRO
(STEP/SYNC)
TB4701
RED W403 H-7ZCRD1339
50P
WHT 8P
20P
CQC-1230 GYRO

AC IN
J4108 J4303
50P TO LOG
BLU (PULSE/SYNC)
GYRO/LOG
PC410 J4107 12P
TB4701
Power supply Control 18P
J4304
Power supply Fan alarm TO PC
9P
Serial
8P J4310
RED J4305
U 4351A07335 FILTER U
B.3
BLU Power supply Control
W OUT IN W AC100-115V 50/60Hz
WHT AC220-240V 50/60Hz Power supply Fan alarm
V V
NCD-9170/T 信号系統図
Signal flow diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9170/T
 OVER VOLTAGE
PROTECTION
AC100-115V
AC220-240V
50/60Hz,1φ INTERSWITCH=1A
CIRCUIT
Primary Power System Diagram

LINE FILTER P+12V OPERATION UNIT=0.5A(typ)

BREAKER
GYRO I/F CIRCUIT=0.1A(typ)
VOLTAGE SELCT
SWITCH SCANNER
+48V±3V
X BAND_2.5A, S BAND_3.0A

Fig B-9: Primary Power System Diagram

B.4 Primary Power System Diagram

AC100-115V RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 1.2A(typ)

AC220-240V MONITOR UNIT +5.0V ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.15A(typ)
50/60Hz,1φ POWER AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.15(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD = 1.0A(typ)

B －10
SCANNER
MOTOR
POWER RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 2.2A(typ)
AC100/230V +3.3V ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1A(typ)
SCAN NER MOTOR
1φ POWER AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD = 0.2A(typ)
POWER CONTROL
CIRCUIT
>

+12V RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1A(typ)

B.DRAWINGS

TERMINAL BOARD = 0.4A(typ)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

>

-12V RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0.1A(typ)

FAN ALM POWER CONTROL

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

TERMINAL BOARD = 0.1A(typ)

B.4
BATTRY
DC24V
OPERATION UNIT = 0.1A
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit

B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit

B
B－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Slot Antenna
RX_RF

TX_RF
DC
NKE-1532 (Scanner) Rotary
Encoder
Motor Joint

Fig B-10: Block Diagram of NKE-1532

TX_IF_Analog
IF Input/Output TRX PM_OUT *1 PM Antenna
DC280V

CHA-396 CMN-750 (External)

B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit

RX_IF_Analog

BP, BZ

+12V
RX_IF_Digital

TX_IF_Digital

+28V
Control
Clock

+5V, +3.3V,
Motor Driver -2.5V
CBD-2010 (AC220V)/

B －12
Control,
CBD-2011 (AC100V)
+3.3V
Radar Processor Interface
Absorbable Recovery Current

CDC-1349 CMH-2246
VERR

Control,

Control
±12V, +5V

+15V
+12V(ON/OFF Control)
+15V, ±12V,
AC100V/220V +5V, -2.5V
+15V 14 cores
>

Brake Control Circuit VERR Relay and Filter Power Supply composite
B.DRAWINGS

CCB-1655 CSC-1656 CBD-1798 +28V cable

DC48V
Absorbable

Absorbable
Recovery

Recovery
AC100V/220V Display Unit
Current

Current

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

BP, BZ, TRIG, MTR, VD
NKE-1532

Safety Switch Terminal Board NCD-9170

>

AC100V/220V
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

Brake Circuit Brake Circuit A Brake Circuit B CSD-1656 TB102 DC48V,

CFA-1255 CFA-1261 CFA-1262 AC100V/AC220V
Note *1 PM (Performance Monitor)
B.5.1
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit

B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit

B
B －13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RADAR PROCESS
RADAR PROC ESS UNIT UNIT
NDC-1493 INTERCONNECTION
CMC-1359
J2607
J3401
XG 4C- 143 1 P2604
P 3401 8830E-1 00- 170 S-F
J2604
ＰＣ２６０１ 8830E-100-170S- F
RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT
J2606 ＣＤＣ－１３４９ ( W101)
ＰＣ３４０１
HI F3FC -10 PA-2.54D SA ZC RD1576※
J2603
J3402 IF INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT
B 5P -S HF
IL_ G_ 12P P 34 02 ＣＨＡ－３９６
J2605 J2601
1.- 2.5V A
2.+ 5V A
↑ANTENNA
5.IT _TX _MO NI _C P
3.IT _TX _MO NI _SP

B 10P-VH
8 830 E-050-170S -F (W004) 3.A GN D
11.IT_ RF_ STC
1.IT _ID _MONI

7.IT _VD _ ERR

ZC RD 156 1※ 4.+ 3.3V D （ROTA RY JOI NT）

( SMA typ e connector)
10.AG ND

12.AG ND
7.+ 3.3VD

10.DG ND
1.+ 12VA
2.- 12VA

4.AG ND

8.DG ND
9.DG ND

2.AG ND

4.AG ND

6.AG ND

8.AG ND
5.+ 5VD
6.+ 5VD

9.IT _VD
3.+ 5VA

B103 5.D GN D

IF_ O UT(Tx )
J2602

IF_ IN (Rx )
(f or R ADA R PROC ESS UN IT)
8830E-060-170S-F
J3901 （TR ANS DUC ER）
FAN J340 3 J3404
P2601 P3 901
P2603 P2 602 Φ１ ２０
P3403 P3404 (N type c on nec tor)
(W00 1)
ZCR D1558※ ( W013 )

Fig B-11: Interconnection Diagram of NKE-1532 (AC110V)

ZC RD1569※
(W20) (W21)
( W002 ) ( W003)
ZC RD16 07※ ZCRD 1608※
Z CRD 1559※ ZC RD1560※
P2209 P 2208 P 2204 B 10 7
P 2203 (f or R ADA R PR OC ESS UN IT) P3007 P3008
J3007 J3008

IF _O UT （Rx )
IＦ_ IN （Tx )
( W201)
5.SP_TX_ MO NI_ C P
3.SP _TX_ MO NI _SP

Ｊ2208
7.+3 .3VD

2.-2 .5VA
10.DG ND

4.+3 .3VD

(W014)
1.+1 2VA
2.-1 2VA

FAN
4.AG ND

8.DG ND
9.DG ND

3.AG ND

ZCR D1578※
5.DG ND
5.+5 VD
6.+5 VD
3.+5 VA

1.+5 VA

J3004
ＰＣ３６０１
11.SP_ RF_STC

8830E-060-17 0L- F
1.SP _ID _ MONI

Φ９ ２
7.SP_VD _ERR

ZC RD 15 70※ H RM-300-386B P 30 04 （Semi Rig id）

PERFORMANCE MONITOR
10.AG ND

12.AG ND
9.SP_VD

J2204 ( SMA type connector) RF_ AN T

2.AG ND

4.AG ND

6.AG ND

8.AG ND

J2203
B 5P -SH F ( W005) (S MA typ e connector)
ＣＡＹ－７１
B10P -V H P 22 12
RED ZC RD 1562※
1 .+5V D J22 05 1.+12VD J3 002 J3601
J220 9 B LK PERFORMANCE MONITOR
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit

B 4P -S HF J2212 2.DG ND H RM-300-376B P 30 02 P3601 TMA2302-10

2 .+5V D IL_G _ 12P
IL-G -7P YEL P3001 J3001 D F3DZ-6P -2H PM_ OUT CIRCUIT
3 .DG N D 3.FAN _ER R1
1.PA _I
(SMA ty pe connector) ( SMA typ e connector) 7PCRD1892
4 .DG N D 4.（接続な し）
2.G ND
RED R ED ＰＣ３００１ (W202) ( W204 )
5.+12VD 3.ST C
BLK BLK TRX MODULE ZC RD1579※ ZCR D1581※
6.DG ND 4.G ND
J2217 YEL YEL ＣＭＮ－７５０
1.MNT _TX + 7.FA N_ERR2 5.TX _D ET
IL-7P
2.MNT _TX - J1903 P1 903 6.G ND
3.MNT _TX E BRAKE CIRCUIT A
P3006 J3006 DF3DZ-11P-2H CFA-1261
4.MNT _R X+ P2206
J220 6 1.R F_G ATE 1.TX_ G ATE
5.MNT _R X- 120Ω
IL_G _ 14P 2.D G ND 2.G ND ×4
6.MNT _R XE 30W
3.PM_ G ATE 3.PM_ GA TE R1 BRAKE CIRCUIT B
7.D GN D
4.D GN D 4.G ND CFA-1262
5.PLL_ DET 5.LO _C H R2
330Ω
6.LO_MO D E 6.G ND 30W ×1
1.B P+ TB101 R3
MST BA2.5/11-G 7.D GN D 7.G ND
2.B P- (W3 10) R1
8.R EF_MO D E 8.PLL_DET ZC RD1544※
3.B Z+
R4 ( W309)
4.B Z-
ＰＣ２２０１ 9. RF_S TC 9.G ND
Z CRD 1543※

B －14
5.TR IG +
INTERFACE CIRCUIT 10.AG ND 10.R EF_MOD E
DISPLAY UNIT ＣＭＨ－２２４６ 11.TX _MO NI 11.GN D
6.TR IG -
12.AG ND P 1921 P 191 1
7.MTR +
13.ID _MON I 1.+32V P1941 J1941 J1921 J1911
8.MTR -

1.BKS 1

2.BKS 2
1.BKH 1

3.BKH 2
2. NC
14.A GN D 2.G ND 1.+15V 1-350209-0
9.MTR E 1-350210-0
P 30 03 J3003 D F22-2P -7.92D S 2.NC
10.VD +
3.+15VE
11.VD - ( W006)
ZC RD1563※ S3B -XH-A
P2211
J22 11 1. HMCN T BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.TI Y J1 B3P- SH F 2. +15VD
CCB-1655
IL-G-6P
2.TI YE 3. DG ND
P 1211
3.B P B2P-VH
J121 1 IL-2P
4.B PE

1 .HMC NT
J2210 1.MC T IL-3 P 1.V ERR1 1.VERR 1
B10 2

2 .+15V
3 .G ND
5.B Z IL-G -6P 2 .E
NKE-1532 (AC110V)

2.MBK 2.E
6.B ZE
3.(N.C .) J1201 J1212 P1212 P 19 12 J1912

1.VERR
P 1201

2.NC
4.D GN D_ MOT OR SE B4P-VH 1-480700-0

3.N
1.P

2.E
RED .T (W306)
5.MPS 1.U1 J19 03 IL-2P J1905
ZC RD1587※
1.VD J2
6.MIER ( W019 ) 2 .NC RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT P19 03 ( W307 ) P1905
IL-G-4P BLK .T B 3P -N V
CSC-1656 ( W311)
>

2.VD E

1 .RED

3 .BLK
ZC RD 1575※ 3.V 1 ZC RD 1606※ ( W304)
1.MU 2 ZCRD 1632※
3.MTR+ J13
4 .N C
PC1201 ZC RD 1316※
IL-6P J1511 P1 505
P13 2 .GN D
4.MTR- YEL
B.DRAWINGS

1.PH Z P1511 J1505 B 3P -V H

BLK 3 .MV2 1. P

1. VERR
2.E
J220 7 2.DG ND B2 P-VH
J2215 J2214
BLU CHT-1071A J1202 P1202 2. N 1.R 1
IL-G- 5P I L-G -3P I L-G -3 P
J2216 3.PH A
SAFETY SWITCH J220 1 J22 02
WH T ENCODER 2. NC

5.DG ND _PWR
RED

3.FAN _ERR 4

3.FAN _ERR 3
IL-G-2P B 8P-S HF

1.+ 32V_C NT
2.+ 15V_C NT
4.PH B 1 .MU2

4.SPC _ FAIL
B8P-VH 3.R 2
CSD-1656 RED

3.PS_FAIL
CBD-2011

5.- 2.5VA
1.+ 12VD

1.+ 15VD
2.+ 12VD

1.+ 12VD

1.+ 12VD
1.+ 12VA
2.- 12VA
5.+12VD

5.DG ND
6.DG ND
7.DG ND
8.DG ND

6.AG ND
7.AG ND
8.AG ND

2.DG ND

2.DG ND
2 .NC

3.+ 5VD
4.+ 5VD

3.+ 5VA
4.+ 5VA
S HIELD
MOTOR DRIVER
2.C 2

J1504
P1504
6.DG ND BLK
3 .MV2 R2

B6P- VH
G RN
(100V )
4. NC
R1
TB102 J19 01 P1901 5 .NC PC1 501 1.2kΩ
G RN
S 10 1 P 2216 P2 201 P2214 10W

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RED .T RE D RED 6 .G ND B 201
F AN

RED

YEL
+ 48V +48V S-3 2 P220 7 Φ６ ０ H-7EP RD 003 5
P2202 B LK BLK

J1501
2 CFA-1255

P150 1
WHT.T 3 ( W009 ) ( W017)
+48VG +48V G ( W008 ) ( W010 ) P 2215 YEL YEL C .G.
BREAK CIRCUIT

J15 03

J1502
ZCR D1565※ ZC RD 1 56 6※ ZCR D1573※

1.M1

3.M2

5.M3
2.NC

4.NC
ZCR D1 567 ※

1.S1

2.S2
3.S3

4.S4

5.S5

6.S6
>

RED .T 5 6 R ED.T B 105

U1 U1 (for MO TOR D RIV ER)
(W01 5) (W305)
BLK.T 8 9 B LK.T ZC RD 157 1※ (W016) ZC RD 15 86※
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

V1 V1 ZCR D1572※
DISPLAY P1102 P1503 P1502
UNIT W1 W1 ( W007)
P1103
P1104
ZC RD 1564※
( W302 )
U TH U TH R ED.T ZC RD 1583※

RED
BLK
WH T.T WC 1

YEL
( W301 )
J1902
TH1 01

U U ZCR D1582※ (W203)

P3 J3

1.+15VD
2.+12VD

1.+3 2V_ C NT
2.+1 5V _C NT
5.G ND1
6.G ND1
WH T.T TR101

7.G ND2
8.G ND2
ZCR D15 80※

3.+5VD
4.+5VD

1.+12VA
2.-12VA

5.-2.5VA

4 .SPC _ FAIL
R ED.T

6.G ND3
7.G ND 3
8.G ND 4
3 .+5VA
4 .+5VA

3.PS_FAIL
（200W） 1.1A P1902

BLK
RED

YEL
V V R ED.T

5 .G ND1
WH T.T
2.2A
G RN .T J1102 MO TO R
3.FG B 8P -V H J1103 B 101
B 8P -S HF J1104 ( W01 8) C BP-1 205
B03P-VL IL-G-5P MO TOR
ZCR D157 4※
( W401) H -7B DRD 0049
HEATER CONTROL PART (W30 3) ＰＣ１１０１
ZCR D1509※ P 1101
CHG-215 ZC RD1584※ POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.+32VA
（OPTION） ＣＢＤ－１７９８ FAN
2.G ND2 Φ６ ０
H-7ZCRD####*:
J1101
“#” means specification document No.
B02P -V L
B106
“*” means revision of the specfication document.
RADAR PROCESS UNIT (f or POWER SU PPLY U NIT )
INTERCONNECTION
POWER SUPPL Y UNIT
B.6.1

FG
CMP-482 NBD-890
ＮＫＥ-１５３２（AC110V) S250W SSR 2unit
SCANNER UNIT
ＳＣＡＮＮＥＲ　ＵＮＩＴ　ＩＮＴＥＲＣＯＮＮＥＣＴＩＯＮ
INTERCONNECTION
CAX-16
空中線機内接続図
 B
RADAR PROCESS
RADAR PROC ESS UNIT UNIT
NDC-1493 INTERCONNECTION
CMC-1359
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit

J2607
J3401
XG 4C- 143 1 P2604
P 3401 8830E-1 00- 170 S-F
J2604
ＰＣ２６０１ 8830E-100-170S- F
RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT
J2606 ＣＤＣ－１３４９ ( W101)
ＰＣ３４０１
HI F3FC -10 PA-2.54D SA ZC RD1576※
J2603
J3402 IF INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT
B 5P -S HF
IL_ G_ 12P P 34 02 ＣＨＡ－３９６
J2605 J2601
1.- 2.5V A
2.+ 5V A
↑ANTENNA
5.IT _TX _MO NI _C P
3.IT _TX _MO NI _SP

B 10P-VH
8 830 E-050-170S -F (W004) 3.A GN D
11.IT_ RF_ STC
1.IT _ID _MONI

7.IT _VD _ ERR

ZC RD 156 1※ 4.+ 3.3V D （ROTA RY JOI NT）

( SMA typ e connector)
10.AG ND

12.AG ND
7.+ 3.3VD

10.DG ND
1.+ 12VA
2.- 12VA

4.AG ND

8.DG ND
9.DG ND

2.AG ND

4.AG ND

6.AG ND

8.AG ND
5.+ 5VD
6.+ 5VD

9.IT _VD
3.+ 5VA

B103 5.D GN D

IF_ O UT(Tx )
J2602

IF_ IN (Rx )
(f or R ADA R PROC ESS UN IT)
8830E-060-170S-F
J3901 （TR ANS DUC ER）
FAN J340 3 J3404
P2601 P3 901
P2603 P2 602 Φ１ ２０
P3403 P3404 (N type c on nec tor)
(W00 1)

Fig B-12: Interconnection Diagram of NKE-1532 (AC220V)

ZCR D1558※ ( W013 )
ZC RD1569※
(W20) (W21)
( W002 ) ( W003)
ZC RD16 07※ ZCRD 1608※
Z CRD 1559※ ZC RD1560※
P2209 P 2208 P 2204 B 10 7
P 2203 (f or R ADA R PR OC ESS UN IT) P3007 P3008
J3007 J3008

IF _O UT （Rx )
IＦ_ IN （Tx )
( W201)
5.SP_TX_ MO NI_ C P
3.SP _TX_ MO NI _SP

Ｊ2208
7.+3 .3VD

2.-2 .5VA
10.DG ND

4.+3 .3VD

(W014)
1.+1 2VA
2.-1 2VA

FAN
4.AG ND

8.DG ND
9.DG ND

3.AG ND

ZCR D1578※
5.DG ND
5.+5 VD
6.+5 VD
3.+5 VA

1.+5 VA

J3004
ＰＣ３６０１
11.SP_ RF_STC

8830E-060-17 0L- F
1.SP _ID _ MONI

Φ９ ２
7.SP_VD _ERR

ZC RD 15 70※ H RM-300-386B P 30 04 （Semi Rig id）

PERFORMANCE MONITOR
10.AG ND

12.AG ND
9.SP_VD

J2204 ( SMA type connector) RF_ AN T

2.AG ND

4.AG ND

6.AG ND

8.AG ND

J2203
B 5P -SH F ( W005) (S MA typ e connector)
ＣＡＹ－７１
B10P -V H P 22 12
RED ZC RD 1562※
1 .+5V D J22 05 1.+12VD J3 002 J3601
J220 9 B LK
B 4P -S HF
IL_G _ 12P
J2212 2.DG ND H RM-300-376B P 30 02 P3601 TMA2302-10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR
2 .+5V D IL-G -7P P3001 J3001 D F3DZ-6P -2H
3.FAN _ER R1
YEL PM_ OUT CIRCUIT
3 .DG N D 1.PA _I
(SMA ty pe connector) ( SMA typ e connector) 7PCRD1892
4 .DG N D 4.（接続な し）
2.G ND
RED R ED ＰＣ３００１ (W202) ( W204 )
5.+12VD 3.ST C
BLK BLK TRX MODULE ZC RD1579※ ZCR D1581※
6.DG ND 4.G ND
J2217 YEL YEL ＣＭＮ－７５０
1.MNT _TX + 7.FA N_ERR2 5.TX _D ET
IL-7P
2.MNT _TX - J1903 P1 903 6.G ND
3.MNT _TX E BRAKE CIRCUIT A
P3006 J3006 DF3DZ-11P-2H CFA-1261
>

4.MNT _R X+ P2206
J220 6 1.R F_G ATE 1.TX_ G ATE
5.MNT _R X- 120Ω
IL_G _ 14P 2.D G ND 2.G ND ×4
30W
B.DRAWINGS

6.MNT _R XE
3.PM_ G ATE 3.PM_ GA TE R1 BRAKE CIRCUIT B
7.D GN D
4.D GN D 4.G ND CFA-1262
5.PLL_ DET 5.LO _C H R2
330Ω
6.LO_MO D E 6.G ND 30W ×1
1.B P+ TB101 R3
MST BA2.5/11-G 7.D GN D 7.G ND
2.B P- (W3 10) R1
8.R EF_MO D E 8.PLL_DET ZC RD1544※
3.B Z+
R4 ( W309)
4.B Z-
ＰＣ２２０１ 9. RF_S TC 9.G ND
Z CRD 1543※

B －15
5.TR IG +
INTERFACE CIRCUIT 10.AG ND 10.R EF_MOD E
DISPLAY UNIT ＣＭＨ－２２４６ 11.TX _MO NI 11.GN D
6.TR IG -
12.AG ND P 1921 P 191 1
7.MTR +
13.ID _MON I 1.+32V P1941 J1941 J1921 J1911
8.MTR -

1.BKS 1

2.BKS 2
1.BKH 1

3.BKH 2
2. NC
14.A GN D 2.G ND 1.+15V 1-350209-0
1-350210-0
>

9.MTR E
P 30 03 J3003 D F22-2P -7.92D S 2.NC
10.VD +
3.+15VE
11.VD - ( W006)
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

ZC RD1563※ S3B -XH-A

P2211
J22 11 1. HMCN T BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.TI Y J1 B3P- SH F 2. +15VD
CCB-1655
IL-G-6P
2.TI YE 3. DG ND
P 1211
3.B P B2P-VH
J121 1 IL-2P
4.B PE

1 .HMC NT
J2210 1.MC T IL-3 P 1.V ERR1 1.VERR 1
B10 2

2 .+15V
NKE-1532 (AC220V)

3 .G ND
5.B Z IL-G -6P 2 .E
2.MBK 2.E
6.B ZE
3.(N.C .) J1201 J1212 P1212 P 19 12 J1912

1.VERR
P 1201

2.NC
4.D GN D_ MOT OR SE B4P-VH 1-480700-0

3.N
1.P

2.E
RED .T (W306)
5.MPS 1.U1 J19 03 IL-2P J1905
ZC RD1587※
1.VD J2
6.MIER ( W019 ) 2 .NC RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT P19 03 ( W307 ) P1905
IL-G-4P BLK .T B 3P -N V
2.VD E CSC-1656 ( W311)

1 .RED

3 .BLK
ZC RD 1575※ 3.V 1 ZC RD 1606※ ( W304)
1.MU 2 ZCRD 1632※
3.MTR+ J13
4 .N C
PC1201 ZC RD 1316※
IL-6P J1511 P1 505
P13 2 .GN D
4.MTR- YEL
1.PH Z P1511 J1505 B 3P -V H
BLK 3 .MV2 1. P

1. VERR
2.E
J220 7 2.DG ND B2 P-VH
J2215 J2214
BLU CHT-1071A J1202 P1202 2. N 1.R 1
IL-G- 5P I L-G -3P I L-G -3 P
J2216 3.PH A
SAFETY SWITCH J220 1 J22 02
WH T ENCODER 2. NC

5.DG ND _PWR
RED

3.FAN _ERR 4

3.FAN _ERR 3
IL-G-2P B 8P-S HF

1.+ 32V_C NT
2.+ 15V_C NT
4.PH B 1 .MU2

4.SPC _ FAIL
B8P-VH 3.R 2
CSD-1656 RED

3.PS_FAIL
CBD-2010

5.- 2.5VA
1.+ 12VD

1.+ 15VD
2.+ 12VD

1.+ 12VD

1.+ 12VD
1.+ 12VA
2.- 12VA
5.+12VD

5.DG ND
6.DG ND
7.DG ND
8.DG ND

6.AG ND
7.AG ND
8.AG ND

2.DG ND

2.DG ND
2 .NC

3.+ 5VD
4.+ 5VD

3.+ 5VA
4.+ 5VA
S HIELD
MOTOR DRIVER
2.C 2

J1504
P1504
6.DG ND BLK
3 .MV2 R2

B6P- VH
G RN
(220V )
4. NC
R1
TB102 J19 01 P1901 5 .NC PC1 501 1.2kΩ
G RN
S 10 1 P 2216 P2 201 P2214 10W

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RED .T RE D RED 6 .G ND B 201
F AN

RED

YEL
+ 48V +48V S-3 2 P220 7 Φ６ ０ H-7EP RD 003 5
P2202 B LK BLK

J1501
2 CFA-1255

P150 1
WHT.T 3 ( W009 ) ( W017)
+48VG +48V G ( W008 ) ( W010 ) P 2215 YEL YEL C .G.
BREAK CIRCUIT

J15 03

J1502
ZCR D1565※ ZC RD 1 56 6※ ZCR D1573※

1.M1

3.M2

5.M3
2.NC

4.NC
ZCR D1 567 ※

1.S1

2.S2
3.S3

4.S4

5.S5

6.S6
RED .T 5 6 R ED.T B 105
U1 U1 (for MO TOR D RIV ER)
(W01 5) (W305)
BLK.T 8 9 B LK.T ZC RD 157 1※ (W016) ZC RD 15 86※
V1 V1 ZCR D1572※
DISPLAY P1102 P1503 P1502
UNIT W1 W1 ( W007)
P1103
P1104
ZC RD 1564※
( W302 )
U TH U TH R ED.T ZC RD 1583※

RED
BLK
WH T.T WC 1

YEL
( W301 )
J1902
TH1 01

U U ZCR D1582※ (W203)

P3 J3

1.+15VD
2.+12VD

1.+3 2V_ C NT
2.+1 5V _C NT
5.G ND1
6.G ND1
WH T.T TR101

7.G ND2
8.G ND2
ZCR D15 80※

3.+5VD
4.+5VD

1.+12VA
2.-12VA

5.-2.5VA

4 .SPC _ FAIL
R ED.T

6.G ND3
7.G ND 3
8.G ND 4
3 .+5VA
4 .+5VA

3.PS_FAIL
（200W） 1.1A P1902

BLK
RED

YEL
V V R ED.T

5 .G ND1
WH T.T
2.2A
G RN .T J1102 MO TO R
3.FG B 8P -V H J1103 B 101
B 8P -S HF J1104 ( W01 8) C BP-1 205
B03P-VL IL-G-5P MO TOR
ZCR D157 4※
( W401) H -7B DRD 0049
HEATER CONTROL PART (W30 3) ＰＣ１１０１
ZCR D1509※ P 1101
CHG-215 ZC RD1584※ POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.+32VA
（OPTION） ＣＢＤ－１７９８ FAN
2.G ND2 Φ６ ０
H-7ZCRD####*:
J1101
“#” means specification document No.
B02P -V L
B106
“*” means revision of the specfication document.
RADAR PROCESS UNIT (f or POWER SU PPLY U NIT )
INTERCONNECTION
POWER SUPPL Y UNIT
B.6.2

FG
CMP-482 NBD-890
ＮＫＥ-１５３２（AC220V) S250W SSR 2unit
SCANNER UNIT
ＳＣＡＮＮＥＲ　ＵＮＩＴ　ＩＮＴＥＲＣＯＮＮＥＣＴＩＯＮ
INTERCONNECTION
CAX-16
空中線機内接続図
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

B －16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 B
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-9170
SCANNER UNIT
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

19-CORES COMPOSITE CABLE (JRC SUPPLY)

RADAR
(INTERSWITCH)
H-2695111153
(JRC SUPPLY) CQD-2176 TERMINAL BOARD
H-2695110056
NKE-1532-1/2
TB4101(ANT)
1
1 VD+
2 VD-
2
TB4201(ISW IN/OUT) 3 TRIG+
1
1 VDIN1 4 TRIG-
3
2 VDIN1E 5 BP+
BLU
3 TRIGIN1 6 BP-
250V-TTYCS-1 4
VDR
4 TRIGIN1E 7 BZ+
3C-2V x5 (MAX 30m) YEL TB101 TB102
5 BPIN1 8 BZ- 3 RED
1 BP+ 1 +48V

Fig B-13: Terminal Board Connection Diagram of JMA-9172-SA

ORN
6 BPIN1E 9 MTR+ BLU
GRN WHT 2 BP- 2 +48VG
7 BZIN1 10 MTR- 4 YEL
3 BZ+ 3 U1
8 BZIN1E 11 MTRE GRN
WHT-BLU 4 BZ- 4 V1
9 MTRIN1+ 12 (NC) 2
WHT-WHT RED 5 TRIG+ 5 W1
10 MTRIN1- 13 +48V
BLU 6 TRIG- 6 UTH
11 MTRIN1E 14 +48VG ORN
ORG 7 MTR+ 7 U
12 PWRIN1 WHT
BLK 8 MTR- 8 V
13 PWRIN1E
PNK 9 MTRE
14 PWROUT1 1
J4407 BRN 10 VD+
15 PWROUT1E
RJ-45 LAN 2 11 VD-
16 VDOUT1
17 VDOUT1E
RED
18 TRIGOUT1
19 TRIGOUT1E
PUR
CQD-1891 20 BPOUT1
(JRC SUPPLY) 21 BPOUT1E
WHT
22 BZOUT1
>

RED
R
23 BZOUT1E
J4409(DSUB-15P)

GRN WHT-YEL
24 MTROUT1+
G
B.DRAWINGS

WHT-WHT
BLU 25 MTROUT1- CBD-1861 ACOUT1
B
CDC-1362

26 MTROUT1E BATT IN +
GRY BATT IN -
H
YEL
BLK U
V GRN
V
H-2695110006 W “D” HEATER OPTION
(JRC SUPPLY)
ECDIS 250V-TTYCS-1 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
CIRCUIT BREAKER
5A (SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
AC100V,1φ,100W

B －17
0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
>

CONNING 250V-TTYCS-1
DISPLAY
SHIP’S MAINS
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

TB4501(OPTION) TB4601(ALARM) TB4401(EXT RADAR) NBL-175 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

1 NAV1TX+ 1 ARPAALM+ 1 RBVD STEP-DOWN
TRANSFORMER AC220V, 1φ,for HEATER
2 NAV1TX- 2 ARPAALM- 2 RBVDE
DGPS 250V-TTYCS-1
3 NAV1RX+ 3 SYSALM+ 3 ETIY3
4 NAV1RX- 4 SYSALM+ 4 ETIY3E
5 NAV2TX+ 5 PWRALM+ 5 SVD1
6 NAV2TX- 6 PWRALM- 6 SVD1E
ECHO 250V-TTYCS-1
7 NAV2RX+ 7 ARPAACK+ 7 ETIY1
SOUNDER 8 NAV2RX- 8 ARPAACK- 8 ETIY1E
9 LOGRX+ 9 SYSACK+ 9 EXφA1
LOG 250V-TTYCS-1
10 LOGRX- 10 SYSACK- 10 EXφA1E
(NMEA0183) 11 ALMTX+ 11 PWRACK+ 11 EXφB1
12 ALMTX- 12 PWRACK- 12 EXφB1E
13 ALMRX+ 13 EXEVT+ 13 EXφZ1
14 ALMRX- 14 EXEVT- 14 EXφZ1E
15 ARPATX+ 15 AISTX+ 15 SVD2
16 ARPATX- 16 AISTX- 16 SVD2E
RED
17 JARPATX+ 17 AIS_TG 17 ETIY2
JMA-9172-SA

18 JARPATX- 18 AISRX+ 18 ETIY2E

19 NSKTX+ 19 AISRX- 19 EXφA2
20 NSKTX- 20 AIS_RG 20 EXφA2E
WHT
21 HDGRX+ 21 MNTTX+ 21 EXφB2
22 HDGRX- 22 MNTTX- 22 EXφB2E

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

BLK
23 EXφZ2
AIS 250V-TTYCS-4 24 EXφZ2E
25 (NC)
26 (NC)
27 ACKOUT+
LOG 0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
TB4801(LOG)
28 ACKOUT-
(200P/NM) 29 WMRST+
1 (NC)
30 WMRST-
2 (NC)
3 (NC)
GYRO 250V-MPYCYS-7
4 (NC)
5 P1+
TB4701(GYRO) 6 P1-
1 1/R1 7 (NC)
2 2/S1 8 (NC)
3 3/S2 9 S1+
4 S3 10 S2-
5 5/R2 11 (NC)
FILTER ACIN
U
WHT 0.6/1kV-DPYCY-6
SHIP’S MAINS
ALARM MONITORING
6 (NC) 12 (NC) W
V
BLK
AC100-115V/AC220-240V 50/60Hz 1φ
(S-BAND 300W RADAR)
SYSTEM
JMA-9172-SA レーダー 盤間接続図
B.7.1

(NEAREST APPROACH)
0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9172-SA
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

B.7.2 NCD-9170T

DISPLAY UNIT NCD-9170T

MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178

OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5322
J4406 DSUB-9P J4309
DVI-D
FEMALE

RADAR PROCESS
CIRCUIT
CDC-1364

TERMINAL BOARD
CQD-2176

Option
SUB OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5322
CBD-1661
AC OUT2
Main
POWER SUPPLY
J4311
CBD-1861
Sub
J4312

RADAR PROCESS UNIT

NDC-1478

JMA-9172-SA RADAR
NCD-9170T 卓上型レーダー指示機 ユニット間接続図
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD-9170T(desktop)

Fig B-14: Inter-Unit Connection Diagram of NCD-9170T

B －18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.8 GYRO I/F

B.8 GYRO I/F

SERIAL SIGNAL
INDICATOR LED
シリアル信号表示LED

KEEP DEFAULT
設定不要

OPEN
プラグ無し

GYRO INPUT SIGNAL GYRO LOW-VOLTAGE

INDICATOR LED ALERT LED
ジャイロ入力信号LED ジャイロ低電圧警告LED

ERROR INDICATOR LED GYRO SIGNAL PROCESS

エラー表示LED INDICATOR LED
ジャイロ信号処理表示LED

LOG PULSE
INDICATOR LED
ログパルス表示LED

LOW-VOLTAGE GYRO
SETTING
ジャイロ低電圧時に設定

Fig B-15: Parts Location of CMJ-523

TableB-1：Setting Table of CMJ-523 S1/S2

S1 SETTING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S2 SETTING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEP ON ON
BSHLOG ALM
SYNC OFF OFF
GYRO SETTING

36X ON ON ON
ジャイロ信号

GYRO SIMULATOR
RATIO

90X OFF ON OFF

180X ON OFF ON
LOG SIMULATOR
360X OFF OFF OFF
回転方向 逆／REV ON N.C. (No Connection) OFF
DIRECTION 正／NOR OFF 5 SEC ON
GYRO ALM TIME
シンクロ／SYNC ON 0.2 SEC OFF
パルス／PULSE OFF GYRO SRC HDT ( NMEA (HDT/THS) ) ON
LOG SETTING

未接続／NC OFF (Heading Sensor Source) GYRO OFF

ログ信号

100P／30X ON ON 4800 BPS OFF OFF

パルス 200P／90X OFF ON 9600 BPS ON OFF
NMEA BAUDRATE
PULSE/NM 400P／180X ON OFF 19200 BPS OFF ON
800P／360X OFF OFF 38400 BPS ON ON

B
B －19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.8 GYRO I/F

TableB-2： Gyro, Log Settings

CMJ-523)
CMJ-523

B －20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.9 Inter Switch Unit

B.9 Inter Switch Unit

B.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2
NCD-9170 NCD-4990

TB4201 TB4201
ISW IN/OUT ISW IN/OUT

1
VDIN 1 1 1 VDIN 1

VDIN 1E 2 2 VDIN 1E
BLUE
TRIGIN 1 3 3 TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E 4 4 TRIGIN 1E
YELLOW
BPIN 1 5 5 BPIN 1

BPIN 1E 6 6 BPIN 1E
GREEN
BZIN 1 7 7 BZIN 1

BZIN 1E 8 8 BZIN 1E
WHITE-BLUE
MTRIN 1+ 9 9 MTRIN 1+
WHITE-WHITE
MTRIN 1- 10 10 MTRIN 1-

MTRIN 1E 11 11 MTRIN 1E
ORANGE
PWRIN 1+ 12 12 PWRIN 1+
BLACK
PWRIN 1E 13 13 PWRIN 1E
PINK
PWROUT 1 14 14 PWROUT 1
BROWN
PWROUT 1E 15 15 PWROUT 1E
2
VDOUT 1 16 16 VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E 17 17 VDOUT 1E
RED
TRIGOUT 1 18 18 TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E 19 19 TRIGOUT 1E
PURPLE
BPOUT 1 20 20 BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E 21 21 BPOUT 1E
CLEAR
BZOUT 1 22 22 BZOUT 1

BZOUT 1E 23 23 BZOUT 1E
WHITE-YELLOW
MTROUT 1+ 24 24 MTROUT 1+
WHITE-WHITE
MTROUT 1- 25 25 MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E 26 26 MTORUT 1E
H-2695111153
(JRC SUPPLY)

Fig B-16: Terminal Board Connetion Diagram of NQE-3141-2A

B
B －21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 D ISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 DISPLAY3 D ISPLAY4
N CD-9170 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990
TB420 1 TB420 1 TB4 20 1 TB4 201
1 1 1 1
1 VD IN 1 1 VDIN 1 1 VDI N 1 1 VDI N 1
2 VDI N 1E 2 VDI N 1E 2 VDI N 1E 2 V DI N 1E
BLU BLU BLU BLU
3 TRI GIN 1 3 TRI GI N 1 3 TRI GI N 1 3 TRI GI N 1
4 TRI GI N 1E 4 TRIGI N 1E 4 TR IGI N 1E 4 TR IGI N 1E
YEL YEL YEL YEL
5 BPI N 1 5 BPI N 1 5 BPI N 1 5 BPI N 1
6 BPI N 1 E 6 BPI N 1 E 6 BPIN 1E 6 BPIN 1E
GRN GRN GRN GRN
7 BZI N 1 7 BZI N 1 7 BZI N 1 7 BZI N 1
8 BZI N 1E 8 BZI N 1 E 8 BZI N 1 E 8 BZIN 1E
W HT-BLU WHT-BLU WH T-BLU WHT-BLU
9 MTR IN 1 + 9 MTRI N 1 + 9 MTRI N 1 + 9 MTRI N 1 +
WH T-W HT W HT-W HT W HT- WHT W HT-W HT
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

10 MTRI N 1- 10 MTRI N 1- 10 MTR I N 1- 10 MTR I N 1-

11 MTRI N 1E 11 MTRI N 1E 11 MTRI N 1E 11 MTRI N 1E
>

ORG ORG ORG ORG

12 PW RI N 1 + 12 PWR I N 1 + 12 PWR I N 1 + 12 P WR IN 1 +
BLK BLK BLK BLK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13 P WR IN 1E 13 P WR IN 1E 13 P WRI N 1E 13 P WRI N 1E
PNK PNK PNK PNK
14 P WROUT 1 14 PW ROU T 1 14 PW ROU T 1 14 PW ROUT 1
BRN BRN BRN BR N
15 PW ROUT 1E 15 PW ROUT 1E 15 PWR OUT 1E 15 PWROUT 1E
2 2 2 2
16 VDOU T 1 16 VD OUT 1 16 VD OUT 1 16 VDOUT 1
17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT 1 E 17 VDOUT 1 E
B.DRAWINGS

RED RED RED RED

18 TR IGOUT 1 18 TRI GOUT 1 18 TRI GOUT 1 18 TRI GOUT 1
>

19 TRI GOUT 1E 19 TRI GOUT 1 E 19 TRI GOUT 1 E 19 TRI GOUT 1E

PUR PUR PUR PU R
20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1
21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOUT 1E 21 BPOU T 1E 21 BPOU T 1E
CLR CLR CLR CLR
22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1 22 BZOUT 1
23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOU T 1E 23 BZOU T 1E
WHT-YEL W HT-YEL W HT-YEL W HT-YEL
24 MTROUT 1 + 24 MTR OUT 1 + 24 MTROUT 1 + 24 MTROUT 1 +
W HT-W HT WHT- WHT WH T-W HT WHT- WHT
25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROU T 1-
26 MTORUT 1 E 26 MTORUT 1 E 26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E
B.9 Inter Switch Unit

B －22
N KE-31 41-4A
CCL-304 R

CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4

TB911 TB91 2 TB913 TB91 4 TB9 15 TB91 6 TB9 15 TB916
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
BLU R ED BLU RED BLU R ED BLU R ED
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
YEL PU R YEL PUR YEL P UR Y EL PU R
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
GR N CLR GR N W HT GR N W HT GR N WH T
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
WHT-B LU W HT-YEL WHT-BLU W HT-YEL WHT-BLU W HT-YEL WHT-BLU W HT-YEL
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
WHT-W HT WH T- W HT WHT-WH T WH T-W HT WHT-WH T WH T-W HT WHT-WH T WH T-W HT
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
OR
OR G OR G OR G
12 G 12 12 12

Fig B-17: Terminal Board Connection Diagram of NQE-3141-4A

B LK B LK BLK BLK
13 13 13 13
PN K PN K PN K PNK
14 14 14 14
BR N BRN BRN BRN

H- 2695111153 ( JRC SUPPLY)

H- 2695111153 ( JRC SUPPLY)
H- 2695111153 ( JRC SUPPLY)
H- 2695111153 ( JRC SUPPLY)

15 15 15 15
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.9 Inter Switch Unit

B.9.2 Interconnection Diagram

ＴＢ918

CH-4
ＴＢ917

ＴＢ916

CH-3
CCL-304
ＴＢ915
H-7ZCRD0970A

Terminal board Terminal board

26 26

(ISW-1CH)
CQD-1973
ＴＢ914

J4307
CH-2

J3
ＴＢ913 1 1

H-7ZCRD0970A
26 26
CQD-1973

(ISW-1CH)
ＴＢ912

J4306
J3
CH-1

ＴＢ911 1 1
J903

-15V

+15V
GND

GND

GND

5V
P903
1
2
3
4
5
6
H-7ZCRD0972
P902
1
2
3
4
5
6
-15V

+15V
GND

GND

GND

5V
J2

CBD-1675
J1
VIN
VIN
+
-
1
2
H-7ZCRD0971

Terminal board
J4308 ISW
1
2

Fig B-18: Interconnection Diagram of NQE-3141-2A B

B －23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CBA-357 CN2 P902 H-7ZCRD0920 P903 J903
CB901 1 1
P901 CN1 -15V -15V
H-7ZCRD0919 2 2
LINE LOAD 1 GND GND
AC(L)
A 3 3 3
B GND GND
AC(N) 4 4
C 5 +15V +15V
FG 5 5
C901 C902 C903 D GND GND
6 6
5V 5V
3 4
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual

LF901
>

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

E
H -7ZCRD 0921 P904 J904
1
AC
2
B.DRAWINGS

FG (L)
3
>

1 2 AC CCL-304
TB901 4 (N)
5
U V TE901 TRT
6
AC100V-240V P+
7
TRT
8 P-
9
CD9 E
10
B.9 Inter Switch Unit

01 PO WLED

B －24
CH-1 CH -2 CH-3 CH-4

TB 911 TB 912 TB 913 TB 914 TB 915 TB 916 TB 917 TB 918

B901 1.V DI N 1.V DOUT
2.V DI NE 2.V DOUTE
P905 J905
3.T RG IN 3.TR GOU T
1 4.T RG INE 4.TR GOU TE
FANV 5.B PIN 5.B POUT
S 2 6.B PIN E 6.B POUTE
FANE
7.B ZIN 7.B ZOU T
3 FANP LS 8.B ZIN E 8.B ZOU TE
9.MT RIN + 9.MTR OU T+
10 .MTROU T
10.MTR IN-
-
11 .MTROU T
11.MTR INE
E
12.PWR IN
13.RWR INE
14.PWR OU T
15.PWR OU T

Fig B-19: Interconnection Diagram of NQE-3141-4A

P909 J909 E
R901
1
2

TO TO TO
DISPLAY1 DISPLAY2 DISPLAY3
NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990
TB4201 TB4201 TB4201
 Appendix C
Menu Index

Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.5 AZ .......................................................................................................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-10
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
C.9 Serviceman Menu ............................................................................... C-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main

C.1 Main

├ 1. EBL Maneuver Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4.1.5 on page 4-14

│ ├ 1. EBL Maneuver
│ ├ 2. Reach
│ ├ 3. Turn Mode
│ └ 4. Turn Set
├ 2. File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.11.1 on page 3-122
├ 3. RADAR Menu
│ ├ 1. Process Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1 on page 3-93
│ │ ├ 1. Video Latitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.1 on page 3-93
│ │ ├ 2. Video Noise Rejection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.2 on page 3-94
│ │ ├ 3. AUTO Dynamic Range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.3 on page 3-94
│ │ ├ 4. Process Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.4 on page 3-95
│ │ ├ 5. 2nd Process Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.5 on page 3-95
│ │ ├ 6. Process Switch Range- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.6 on page 3-95
│ │ ├ 7. Fast Target Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.7 on page 3-96
│ │ ├ 8. User Function Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.9.3 on page 3-115
│ │ │ ├ 1. Function1 Setting
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-115
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. IR
│ │ │ │ ├ 3. Process
│ │ │ │ ├ 4. Target Enhance
│ │ │ │ ├ 5. AUTO Sea/Rain
│ │ │ │ ├ 6. Save Present State
│ │ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Pulse Length 0.75nm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. Pulse Length 1.5nm
│ │ │ │ ├ 3. Pulse Length 3/4nm
│ │ │ │ ├ 4. Pulse Length 6/8nm
│ │ │ │ ├ 5. Pulse Length 12nm
│ │ │ │ ├ 6. Pulse Length 16nm
│ │ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Video Latitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. Video Noise Rejection
│ │ │ │ ├ 3. AUTO Dynamic Range
│ │ │ │ ├ 4. Process Switch
│ │ │ │ ├ 5. 2nd Process Mode
│ │ │ │ ├ 6. Process Switch Range
│ │ │ │ ├ 7. Fast Target Detection
│ │ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Trails Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. Trails Mode
│ │ │ │ ├ 3. Trails Reference Level
│ │ │ │ ├ 4. Trails Reduction
│ │ │ │ ├ 6. Trails Process
│ │ │ │ ├ 7. Max Interval
│ │ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Gain Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. PRF
│ │ │ │ ├ 3. Small Buoy Detection
│ │ │ │ ├ 4. Fishnet Detection
│ │ │ │ ├ 5. Antenna Height
│ │ │ │ ├ 8. Set Mode Default
│ │ │ │ └ 9. Initialize
│ │ │ ├ 2. Function2 Setting
│ │ │ ├ 3. Function3 Setting
│ │ │ └ 4. Function4 Setting
│ ├ 2. RADAR Trails Setting
│ │ ├ 1. Trails Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.1 on page 3-97
│ │ ├ 2. Trails Reference Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.2 on page 3-97
│ │ ├ 3. Trails Reduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.3 on page 3-98

C
│ │ ├ 5. Trails Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.4 on page 3-98
│ │ └ 6. Max Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.5 on page 3-98

C －1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main

│ └ 3. TXRX Setting
│ │ ├ 1. PRF Fine Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.3.1 on page 3-99
│ │ ├ 4. PRF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.3.2 on page 3-99
│ │ └ 5. Ice Class Standby Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.3.3 on page 3-99
├ 4. Multi Window Setting
│ ├ 1. DIR/DIST EXP Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.1 on page 3-107
│ ├ 2. Numeric NAV INFO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.2 on page 3-107
│ ├ 3. Depth Graph Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.3 on page 3-107
│ │ ├ 1. Depth Graph Display
│ │ ├ 2. Depth Range
│ │ ├ 3. Time Range
│ │ └ 4. Depth Unit
│ ├ 4. Wind Graph Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.4 on page 3-109
│ │ ├ 1. Wind Graph Display
│ │ └ 2. Wind Speed Unit
│ ├ 5. TEMP Graph Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.5 on page 3-109
│ │ ├ 1. TEMP Graph Display
│ │ ├ 2. TEMP Graph Color
│ │ ├ 3. TEMP Range
│ │ │ ├ 1. Temperature setting (MIN)
│ │ │ ├ 2. Temperature setting
│ │ │ ├ 3. Temperature setting
│ │ │ ├ 4. Temperature setting
│ │ │ ├ 5. Temperature setting
│ │ │ └ 6. Temperature setting (MAX)
│ │ └ 4. Time Range
│ └ 6. Course Bar Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.6 on page 3-110
│ │ ├ 1. Course Bar Display
│ │ ├ 2. Autopilot Course
│ │ └ 3. ROT Scale
├ 5. Map Setting
│ ├ 3. JRC/ERC Setting
│ │ ├ 1. Day/Night
│ │ ├ 2. Color of Land
│ │ ├ 3. Bright of Land
│ │ ├ 4. Color of Sea
│ │ ├ 5. Bright of Sea
│ │ ├ 6. Color of Name
│ │ ├ 7. Bright of Name
│ │ ├ 8. Bright of Track/Mark/Line
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. LAT/LON Line
│ │ ├ 2. Color of L/L Line
│ │ └ 3. Bright of L/L Line
│ ├ 5. Map Display Setting
│ │ └ 3. LAT/LON Correction
│ └ 7. Map Draw AZI Mode
├ 6. NAV Equipment Setting
│ ├ 1. GYRO Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.4.14 on page 3-37, section 7.1.2 on page 7-2
│ ├ 2. MAG Compass Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.4.16 on page 3-38
│ │ ├ 1. Heading Correction
│ │ └ 2. Correct Value
│ └ 3. Set/Drift Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.4.16.1 on page 3-39
│ │ ├ 1. Correction
│ │ ├ 2. Set
│ │ └ 3. Drift
│ │ ├ 6. Rx Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.12.1 on page 3-129
│ │ ├ 1. Heading
│ │ ├ 2. Speed
│ │ ├ 3. AIS
│ │ ├ 4. GPS
│ │ ├ 5. DLOG
│ │ ├ 6. Alarm
│ │ ├ 7. Depth
│ │ ├ 8. Temperature
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Wind
│ │ ├ 2. Current
│ │ ├ 3. ROT
│ │ ├ 4. RSA

C －2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main

│ │ ├ 5. Time Zone
│ │ └ 6. Date/Time
├ 7. Sub Menu
│ ├ 1. Display Color Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.1 on page 3-101
│ │ ├ 1. Day/Night - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.2 on page 3-101
│ │ ├ 2. Outer PPI
│ │ ├ 3. Inner PPI
│ │ ├ 4. Character
│ │ ├ 5. RADAR Video
│ │ ├ 6. RADAR Trails(Time)
│ │ ├ 8. Target Symbol
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Cursor
│ │ ├ 2. Range Rings
│ │ ├ 3. EBL/VRM/PI
│ │ └ 4. Own Symbol/HL/Vector
│ ├ 2. Brilliance Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.3 on page 3-102
│ │ ├ 1. RADAR Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.4 on page 3-103
│ │ ├ 2. RADAR Trails
│ │ ├ 3. Target Symbol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.5.5 on page 3-103
│ │ ├ 4. Range Rings
│ │ ├ 5. EBL/VRM/PI
│ │ ├ 6. Character
│ │ ├ 7. Own Symbol/HL/Vector
│ │ └ 8. Keyboard
│ ├ 3. User Setting
│ │ ├ 1. Load User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.2 on page 3-121
│ │ ├ 2. Save User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.1 on page 3-120
│ │ └ 3. Delete User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.3 on page 3-121
│ ├ 4. Option Key Setting
│ │ ├ 1. Option1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.7 on page 3-104
│ │ └ 2. Option2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.7 on page 3-104
│ ├ 5. Buzzer Volume - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.6 on page 3-104
│ │ ├ 1. Key ACK
│ │ ├ 2. OPE Miss
│ │ ├ 3. CPA/TCPA Alarm
│ │ ├ 4. New Target Alarm
│ │ ├ 5. Lost Alarm
│ │ ├ 6. Navigation Alarm
│ │ ├ 7. System Alarm
│ │ └ 8. Inter Switch
│ ├ 6. Date/Time Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.6 on page 7-18
│ │ ├ 1. UTC/LMT
│ │ ├ 2. LMT Date
│ │ ├ 3. LMT Time
│ │ ├ 4. Time Zone
│ │ ├ 5. Display Style
│ │ └ 6. Synchronize with GPS
│ ├ 7. Screen Capture Setting
│ │ ├ 1. Select Item
│ │ │ ├ 1. Graphic
│ │ │ ├ 2. RADAR Video
│ │ │ ├ 3. RADAR Trails
│ │ │ └ 4. Map
│ │ ├ 2. Select Card Slot
│ │ ├ 3. File Erase
│ │ ├ 4. AUTO Capture Interval
│ │ ├ 5. AUTO File Erase
│ │ └ 6. File Format
│ ├ 9. EBL/Cursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4.1.3 on page 4-3
│ │ ├ 1. EBL1 Bearing Fix
│ │ ├ 2. EBL2 Bearing Fix
│ │ └ 3. Cursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.4 on page 3-100
│ │ │ ├ 1. EBL/VRM Control Cursor
│ │ │ ├ 2. Cursor Length
│ │ │ └ 4. Cursor Pattern
├ 8. Plot Setting

C
│ └ 6. AUTO Backup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.9 on page 3-111
├ 9. Test Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1 on page 8-5
│ ├ 1. Self Test- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.1 on page 8-6

C －3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main

│ │ ├ 1. Memory Test
│ │ │ ├ 1. SDRAM
│ │ │ ├ 2. SRAM
│ │ │ ├ 3. FLASH ROM
│ │ │ └ 4. GRAPHIC
│ │ ├ 2. TXRX Test
│ │ ├ 3. Line Test
│ │ └ 4. Supply Voltage
│ ├ 2. Monitor Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.2 on page 8-8
│ │ ├ 1. Pattern 1
│ │ ├ 2. Pattern 2
│ │ ├ 3. Pattern 3
│ │ ├ 4. Pattern 4
│ │ ├ 5. Pattern 5
│ │ ├ 6. Pattern 6
│ │ ├ 7. Pattern 7
│ │ └ 8. Pattern 8
│ ├ 3. Keyboard Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.3 on page 8-8
│ │ ├ 1. Key Test
│ │ ├ 2. Buzzer Test
│ │ └ 3. Light Test
│ ├ 4. MON Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.4 on page 8-9
│ ├ 5. System Alarm Log - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.5 on page 8-10
│ └ 6. System Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.6 on page 8-10
└ 0. EXIT

C －4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.2 PI

C.2 PI

├ 1. Display for All Lines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4.1.4 on page 4-8

├ 2. Operation Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-10
│ ├ All
│ ├ Individual
│ ├ Track
│ └ Equiangular
├ 3. Control1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-11

│ ├ All:All2
│ ├ Individual:Sequential
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 1
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 2
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 3
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 4
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 5
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 6
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 7
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 8
│ ├ Track:Group 1
│ ├ Track:Group 2
│ ├ Track:Group 3
│ ├ Track:Group 4
│ ├ Equiangular:Group 1
│ ├ Equiangular:Group 2
│ ├ Equiangular:Group 3
│ └ Equiangular:Group 4
├ 4. Floating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-11
├ 5. Heading Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-11
├ 6. Next
├ 8. Press EBL Dial to Control PI#3
├ 9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#ii
├ 1. Range Scale Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-12
├ 2. Reference Bearingi- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 4-12

│ ├ All:True4
│ ├ All:HL
│ ├ Individual:True
│ ├ Individual:HL
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 1
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 2
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 3
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 4
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 5
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 6
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 7
│ ├ Individual:Index Line 8
│ ├ Track:True
│ ├ Track:HL
│ ├ Track:Index Line 1
│ ├ Track:Index Line 2
│ ├ Track:Index Line 3
│ ├ Track:Index Line 4
│ ├ Track:Index Line 5
│ ├ Track:Index Line 6
│ ├ Track:Index Line 7
│ └ Track:Index Line 8
├ 3. Operation Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13
├ 4. Display for Individual Line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13

1.The setting items are determined by the setting of Operation Mode.

2.Operating Mode: Control
3.Displayed only when "3. Control" is Individual.
4.Operating Mode: Reference Bearing
C
C －5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.2 PI

│ ├ 1. Index Line 1
│ ├ 2. Index Line 2
│ ├ 3. Index Line 3
│ ├ 4. Index Line 4
│ ├ 5. Index Line 5
│ ├ 6. Index Line 6
│ ├ 7. Index Line 7
│ └ 8. Index Line 8
├ 8. Press EBL Dial to Control PI#ii
└ 9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#ii

C －6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.3 TT

C.3 TT
├ 1. Association Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.4.1 on page 5-38
│ ├ 1. Association
│ ├ 2. Proprity
│ ├ 3. Bearing
│ ├ 4. Range
│ ├ 5. Course
│ ├ 6. Speed
│ └ 7. Applicable AIS Target
├ 2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 on page 5-45
│ ├ 1. Target Track Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.2 on page 5-45
│ ├ 2. Target Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.1 on page 5-45
│ │ ├ 1. All
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.1
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.2
│ │ ├ 4. Target Track No.3
│ │ ├ 5. Target Track No.4
│ │ ├ 6. Target Track No.5
│ │ ├ 7. Target Track No.6
│ │ ├ 8. Target Track No.7
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Target Track No.8
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.9
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.10
│ │ └ 4. Other
│ ├ 3. Target Track Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.4 on page 5-47
│ │ ├ 1. All
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.1
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.2
│ │ ├ 4. Target Track No.3
│ │ ├ 5. Target Track No.4
│ │ ├ 6. Target Track No.5
│ │ ├ 7. Target Track No.6
│ │ ├ 8. Target Track No.7
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Target Track No.8
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.9
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.10
│ │ └ 4. Other
│ ├ 4. Track Memory Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.5 on page 5-48
│ ├ 5. Clear Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.6 on page 5-48
│ ├ 6. Clear Track Number
│ └ 7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.7 on page 5-49
│ │ ├ 1. Select Card Slot
│ │ ├ 2. Load Mode
│ │ ├ 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-50
│ │ ├ 4. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-51
│ │ ├ 5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-52
│ │ └ 6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-53
├ 3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.7 on page 5-54
│ ├ 1. Trial Function
│ ├ 2. Course(EBL)
│ ├ 3. Speed(VRM)
│ ├ 4. Vector Time
│ ├ 5. Time to Maneuver
│ └ 6. Own Ship's Dynamic Trait
│ │ ├ 1. Reach
│ │ ├ 3. Turn Radius
│ │ ├ 4. Acceleration
│ │ └ 5. Deceleration
├ 4. Target Number Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.4 on page 5-19
└ 9. TT Test Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7 on page 5-22
│ ├ 1. Test Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.1 on page 5-23
│ ├ 2. TT Simulator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C
section 5.2.7.2 on page 5-24
│ ├ 3. Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.3 on page 5-25
│ └ 4. Gate Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.4 on page 5-26

C －7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.4 AIS

C.4 AIS

├ 1. Association Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.4.2 on page 5-38

│ ├ 1. Association
│ ├ 2. Proprity
│ ├ 3. Bearing
│ ├ 4. Range
│ ├ 5. Course
│ ├ 6. Speed
│ └ 7. Applicable AIS Target
├ 2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 on page 5-45
│ ├ 1. Target Track Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.2 on page 5-45
│ ├ 2. Target Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.1 on page 5-45
│ │ ├ 1. All
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.1
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.2
│ │ ├ 4. Target Track No.3
│ │ ├ 5. Target Track No.4
│ │ ├ 6. Target Track No.5
│ │ ├ 7. Target Track No.6
│ │ ├ 8. Target Track No.7
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Target Track No.8
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.9
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.10
│ │ └ 4. Other
│ ├ 3. Target Track Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.4 on page 5-47
│ │ ├ 1. All
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.1
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.2
│ │ ├ 4. Target Track No.3
│ │ ├ 5. Target Track No.4
│ │ ├ 6. Target Track No.5
│ │ ├ 7. Target Track No.6
│ │ ├ 8. Target Track No.7
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Target Track No.8
│ │ ├ 2. Target Track No.9
│ │ ├ 3. Target Track No.10
│ │ └ 4. Other
│ ├ 4. Track Memory Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.5 on page 5-48
│ ├ 5. Clear Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.6 on page 5-48
│ ├ 6. Clear Track Number
│ └ 7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.7 on page 5-49
│ │ ├ 1. Select Card Slot
│ │ ├ 2. Load Mode
│ │ ├ 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-50
│ │ ├ 4. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-51
│ │ ├ 5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-52
│ │ └ 6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-53
├ 3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.7 on page 5-54
│ ├ 1. Trial Function
│ ├ 2. Course(EBL)
│ ├ 3. Speed(VRM)
│ ├ 4. Vector Time
│ ├ 5. Time to Maneuver
│ └ 6. Own Ship's Dynamic Trait
│ │ ├ 1. Reach
│ │ ├ 2. Turn Radius
│ │ ├ 3. Acceleration
│ │ └ 4. Deceleration
├ 4. AIS Filter Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.7 on page 5-33
│ ├ 1. Filter Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.7.2 on page 5-33
│ ├ 2. Make AIS Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.7.3 on page 5-34

C －8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.5 AZ

│ ├ 3. Filter Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.7.4 on page 5-35

│ ├ 4. ENT
│ └ 6. Filter Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.7.5 on page 5-35
├ 5. Target Number Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.6 on page 5-32
├ 6. AIS Alarm Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.9 on page 5-37
│ ├ 1. Lost Alarm- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.9.1 on page 5-37
│ └ 2. CPA/TCPA Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.9.2 on page 5-37
├ 7. Message - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.5.5 on page 5-30
│ ├ 1. Addressed Message
│ └ 2. Broadcast Message
├ 8. Display Lost TGT Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.5.6 on page 5-32
└ 9. Own Ship's AIS Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3.5.7 on page 5-32

C.5 AZ

├ 1. AZ 1- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.1.1 on page 5-15

├ 2. AZ 2- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.1.1 on page 5-15
├ 3. Make AZ 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.1.2 on page 5-16
├ 4. Make AZ 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.1.2 on page 5-16
└ 5. ENT

C
C －9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.6 Track

C.6 Track

├ 1. DISP Own Track Color- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.2 on page 3-41

│ ├ 1. All
│ ├ 2. White
│ ├ 3. Cyan
│ ├ 4. Blue
│ ├ 5. Green
│ ├ 6. Yellow
│ ├ 7. Pink
│ └ 8. Red
├ 2. Clear Own Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.5 on page 3-43
├ 3. Track Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.6 on page 3-43
├ 4. Num/Vector Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.6 on page 3-43
├ 5. File Operations
│ ├ 1. Select Card Slot
│ ├ 2. Load Mode
│ ├ 3. Load
│ ├ 4. Save
│ ├ 5. Erase
│ └ 6. Card Own Track Display
├ 6. Water Depth Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.7 on page 3-45
│ ├ 1. Depth setting (MIN)
│ ├ 2. Depth setting
│ ├ 3. Depth setting
│ ├ 4. Depth setting
│ ├ 5. Depth setting
│ └ 6. Depth setting (MAX)
├ 7. Water TEMP Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.8 on page 3-46
│ ├ 1. Temperature setting (MIN)
│ ├ 2. Temperature setting
│ ├ 3. Temperature setting
│ ├ 4. Temperature setting
│ ├ 5. Temperature setting
│ └ 6. Temperature setting (MAX)
├ 8. Current Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5.9 on page 3-47
│ ├ 1. Current Size
│ ├ 2. Layer A
│ ├ 3. Layer B
│ └ 4. Layer C

C －10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.7 Route

C.7 Route

├ 1. Select Route - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.1 on page 3-68

├ 2. WPT/Route Settig
│ ├ 1. Waypoint Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.4.1 on page 3-80
│ ├ 2. Route Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.4.2 on page 3-81
│ ├ 3. Set Route Sequence- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.2 on page 3-69
│ ├ 6. Waypoint Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.3 on page 3-76
│ ├ 7. Save Temporary Route
│ ├ 8. Cross-Track Limit Line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.1 on page 3-84
│ ├ 9. Next
│ ├ 1. SEL. NUM/Comment Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.2 on page 3-85
│ ├ 2. Waypoint Vector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.3 on page 3-85
│ ├ 3. Status of Origin/DEST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.4 on page 3-86
│ ├ 4. WPT Number Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.5 on page 3-86
│ ├ 6. Route Information Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.6 on page 3-87
│ └ 7. Map Draw AZI Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.7 on page 3-87
├ 3. WPT/Route Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.5 on page 3-82
│ ├ 1. Route Sequence- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.5.1 on page 3-82
│ ├ 2. Waypoint Switch Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.6 on page 3-87
│ ├ 3. Waypoint Skip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.5.2 on page 3-83
│ ├ 4. Waypoint Back Skip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.5.2 on page 3-83
│ ├ 5. Set/Cancel Waypoint
│ └ 6. Clear WPT/Route Data
├ 4. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.8 on page 3-89
│ ├ 1. Select Card Slot - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.8.1 on page 3-89
│ ├ 2. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.8.3 on page 3-90
│ ├ 3. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.8.2 on page 3-89
│ └ 4. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.8.4 on page 3-91

C
C－ 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.8 U.Map

C.8 U.Map

├ 1. Own Ship Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.1 on page 3-53

├ 2. Edit User Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3 on page 3-53
│ ├ 1. Make with Cursor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.1.1 on page 3-48
│ │ ├ 1. Type
│ │ └ 2. Color
│ ├ 2. Make with L/L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.1.3 on page 3-50
│ │ ├ 1. Type
│ │ ├ 2. Color
│ │ ├ 3. L/L
│ │ ├ 4. Comment
│ │ ├ 5. Enter
│ │ └ 9. New Line Input/9.New Mark Input
│ ├ 3. Move - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.2 on page 3-54
│ ├ 4. Delete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.3 on page 3-56
│ ├ 5. Insert/Move Vertex- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.4 on page 3-57
│ ├ 6. Delete Vertex - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.6 on page 3-59
│ └ 7. Delete by Type by Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.7 on page 3-60
├ 3. Shift - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.4.1 on page 3-61
├ 4. Shift Clear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.4.2 on page 3-62
├ 5. Mark Display Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2 on page 3-51
│ ├ 1. Display Mark Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.1 on page 3-51
│ │ ├ 1. All
│ │ ├ 2. ○
│ │ ├ 3. △
│ │ ├ 4. ▽
│ │ ├ 5. □
│ │ ├ 6. ◇
│ │ ├ 7. Wreck (mark)
│ │ ├ 8. △△
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. ▽▽
│ │ ├ 2. △▽
│ │ ├ 3. ▽△
│ │ ├ 4. ＋
│ │ ├ 5. ×
│ │ ├ 6. Ｙ
│ │ ├ 7. Hand drum (mark)
│ │ ├ 8. Light house (mark)
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. Trapezoid（mark）
│ │ ├ 2. filled Trapezoid（mark）
│ │ ├ 3. Hat(mark)
│ │ ├ 4. ●●
│ │ ├ 5. ●
│ │ ├ 6. Filled Triangle(mark)
│ │ ├ 7. ！
│ │ ├ 8. anchor(mark)
│ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ ├ 1. slash-anchor(mark)
│ │ ├ 2. circle-dotted line(mark)
│ │ ├ 3. non-dangerous wreck(mark)
│ │ ├ 4. ◎
│ │ ├ 5. mariner's event mark(mark)
│ │ ├ 6. ・
│ │ ├ 7. Wavy line (mark)
│ │ ├ 8. Solid line (mark)
│ │ └ 9. Next
│ │ └ 1. Dashed-dotted line (mark)
│ ├ 2. Display Mark Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.2 on page 3-52
│ │ ├ 1. All
│ │ ├ 2. White
│ │ ├ 3. Cyan

C －12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.8 U.Map

│ │ ├ 4. Blue
│ │ ├ 5. Green
│ │ ├ 6. Yellow
│ │ ├ 7. Pink
│ │ └ 8. Red
│ ├ 3. Select Mark Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.3 on page 3-52
│ └ 4. Comment Font Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.4 on page 3-53
├ 6. Geodetic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.6 on page 3-66
└ 7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5 on page 3-62
│ ├ 1. Select Card Slot
│ ├ 2. Load Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.1 on page 3-62
│ ├ 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.1 on page 3-62
│ ├ 4. Unload - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.2 on page 3-63
│ ├ 5. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.3 on page 3-63
│ ├ 6. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.4 on page 3-64
│ └ 7. Card Mark Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.5 on page 3-65

C
C －13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu

C.9 Serviceman Menu

├ Serviceman Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1.1 on page 7-1

├ 1. Adjust Menu
│ ├ 2. Bearing Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1.4 on page 7-5
│ ├ 3. Range Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1.5 on page 7-5
│ └ 4. TXRX Adjustment
│ │ ├ 1. Antenna Height - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
│ │ └ 6. Output Pulse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.3 on page 7-16
│ │ └ 7. SSR Mon Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.4 on page 7-35
│ │ │ ├ 2. Tx2 Mon Adjustment
│ │ │ ├ 4. Rx2 Mon Adjustment
│ │ │ ├ 5. Monitor Secter
│ │ │ ├ 6. monitor Range
│ │ │ ├ 7. Rx Mon Gain
├ 2. Installation Menu
│ ├ 1. Installation Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.7 on page 7-19
│ │ ├ 1. Date
│ │ ├ 2. Name
│ │ └ 3. Company
│ ├ 2. Master/Slave - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.4.1 on page 7-17
│ ├ 3. Sector Blank- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2 on page 7-15
│ │ ├ 1. Sector1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.1 on page 7-15
│ │ ├ 2. Sector2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.1 on page 7-15
│ │ ├ 3. Sector3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.1 on page 7-15
│ │ ├ 4. Make Sector1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.2 on page 7-15
│ │ ├ 5. Make Sector2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.2 on page 7-15
│ │ ├ 6. Make Sector3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.2 on page 7-15
│ │ └ 7. ENT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.2 on page 7-15
│ ├ 4. CCRP Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1.9 on page 7-8
│ ├ 5. COM Port Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.1 on page 7-11
│ │ ├ 1. Baud Rate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.1.1 on page 7-11
│ │ │ ├ 1. COMPASS
│ │ │ ├ 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
│ │ │ ├ 3. NAV1
│ │ │ ├ 4. NAV2
│ │ │ ├ 5. ALARM
│ │ │ ├ 6. JARPA
│ │ │ ├ 7. AIS
│ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ ├ 1. ARPA
│ │ │ └ 2. COM
│ │ ├ 2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.1.2 on page 7-12
│ │ │ ├ 1. GPS
│ │ │ ├ 2. DLOG
│ │ │ ├ 3. Alarm
│ │ │ ├ 4. Depth
│ │ │ ├ 5. Temperature
│ │ │ ├ 6. Wind
│ │ │ ├ 7. Current
│ │ │ ├ 8. ROT
│ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ ├ 1. RSA
│ │ │ └ 2. Time Zone
│ │ ├ 3. RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.1.3 on page 7-13
│ │ │ ├ 1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG)
│ │ │ ├ 2. GPS(WPT/TIME)
│ │ │ ├ 3. Depth
│ │ │ ├ 4. Wind
│ │ │ └ 5. Current
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Data Set Number
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. Layer A
│ │ │ │ ├ 3. Layer B
│ │ │ │ ├ 4. Layer C
│ │ │ │ └ 6. Autopilot

C －14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu

│ │ ├ 4. TX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.1.4 on page 7-14

│ │ │ ├ 1. TTM(TT)
│ │ │ ├ 2. TLL(TT)
│ │ │ ├ 3. TTD(TT)
│ │ │ ├ 4. TLB(TT)
│ │ │ ├ 5. OSD
│ │ │ ├ 6. RSD
│ │ │ ├ 7. ALR
│ │ │ ├ 8. ACK
│ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ ├ 1. TTM(AIS)
│ │ │ ├ 2. TLL(AIS)
│ │ │ ├ 3. TTD(AIS)
│ │ │ ├ 4. TLB(AIS)
│ │ │ ├ 5. Remote Maintenance
│ │ │ ├ 6. JRC-ARPA
│ │ │ ├ 7. NMEA0183 Output Format
│ │ │ ├ 8. NMEA0183 Talker
│ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ ├ 1. NMEA0183 TX Interval
│ │ │ ├ 2. APB
│ │ │ ├ 3. BOD
│ │ │ ├ 4. GGA
│ │ │ ├ 5. GLL
│ │ │ ├ 6. RMC
│ │ │ ├ 7. RMB
│ │ │ ├ 8. VTG
│ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ ├ 1. XTE
│ │ │ ├ 2. BWC
│ │ │ ├ 3. HDT
│ │ │ └ 4. THS
│ │ ├ 7. Line Monitor
│ │ │ ├ 1. COMPASS
│ │ │ ├ 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
│ │ │ ├ 3. NAV1
│ │ │ ├ 4. NAV2
│ │ │ ├ 5. ALARM
│ │ │ ├ 6. JARPA
│ │ │ ├ 7. AIS
│ │ │ ├ 9. Next
│ │ │ ├ 1. ARPA
│ │ │ ├ 2. COM
│ │ │ ├ 3. TXRX/ISW
│ │ │ ├ 4. KEYBOARD1
│ │ │ └ 5. KEYBOARD2
│ ├ 6. Alarm System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8 on page 7-19
│ │ ├ 1. Watch Alarm
│ │ │ ├ 1. Reset Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.1 on page 7-19
│ │ │ └ 2. Trackball Threshold - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.2 on page 7-20
│ │ ├ 2. Relay Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.3 on page 7-20
│ │ │ ├ 1. Relay Output Mode
│ │ │ ├ 2. TT CPA/TCPA
│ │ │ ├ 3. AIS CPA/TCPA
│ │ │ ├ 4. New Target
│ │ │ ├ 5. Lost
│ │ ├ 3. ALR Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.4 on page 7-21
│ │ │ ├ 1. System Alarm
│ │ │ └ 2. TT/AIS Alarm
│ │ ├ 4. Sound Output Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.6 on page 7-23
│ │ ├ 5. External ACK Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.5 on page 7-22
│ │ │ ├ 1. Critical Alarm
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Audio
│ │ │ │ ├ 2Indication
│ │ │ │ └ 3. Acknowledge State
│ │ │ ├ 2. Normal Alarm
│ │ │ │ ├ 1. Audio

C
│ │ │ │ ├ 2. Indication
│ │ │ │ └ 3. Acknowledge State
│ ├ 7. Inter Switch

C －15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu

│ │ ├ 1. ISW Install
│ │ ├ 2. Mask Setting
│ │ │ ├ 1. No.1 Connection/No.1 Master
│ │ │ ├ 2. No.2 Connection/No.2 Master
│ │ │ ├ 3. No.3 Connection/No.3 Master
│ │ │ ├ 4. No.4 Connection/No.4 Master
│ │ │ ├ 5. No.5 Connection/No.5 Master1
│ │ │ ├ 6. No.6 Connection/No.6 Masteri
│ │ │ ├ 7. No.7 Connection/No.7 Masteri
│ │ │ └ 8. No.8 Connection/No.8 Masteri
│ │ └ 3. S-ISW TXRX Power Supply
│ ├ 8. Language - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.5 on page 7-17
│ ├ 9. Next
│ ├ 1. Input BP Count - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.4.2 on page 7-17
│ ├ 3. Device Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1.6 on page 7-6
│ │ ├ 1. Gyro
│ │ ├ 2. Compass
│ │ ├ 4. LOG
│ │ ├ 5. 2AXW
│ │ ├ 6. 2AXG
│ │ └ 7. GPS
│ ├ 4. Network
│ │ ├ 1. Network Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.1 on page 7-25
│ │ ├ 2. IP Address
│ │ ├ 3. Sensor Priority- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.2 on page 7-25
│ │ └ 4. Synchronization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.3 on page 7-26
│ ├ 5. LAN Port Setting
│ │ ├ 1. TX Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.10.1 on page 7-27
│ │ ├ 2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.10.2 on page 7-28
│ │ ├ 3. RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.10.3 on page 7-29
│ │ └ 7. Line Monitor
├ 3. Maintenance Menu
│ ├ 1. Safety Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.1 on page 7-38
│ ├ 2. Area Initial - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2 on page 7-39
│ │ └ 1. Partial Master Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2.1 on page 7-39
│ │ │ ├ 1. Serviceman Menu
│ │ │ ├ 2. Except Serviceman Menu
│ │ │ ├ 3. User Setting
│ │ │ ├ 4. TT Setting
│ │ │ ├ 5. AIS Setting
│ │ │ ├ 6. Day/Night
│ │ │ └ 7. JRC Card Copy Record
│ │ └ 2. All Master Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2.2 on page 7-39
│ ├ 3. Internal To Card1/2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.3.1 on page 7-40
│ ├ 4. Card1/2 To Internal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.3.2 on page 7-40
│ ├ 5. TXRX Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4 on page 7-41
│ │ ├ 1. Clear TX Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.1 on page 7-41
│ │ ├ 2. Clear Motor Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.2 on page 7-41
│ │ ├ 3. TXRX to Display Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.3 on page 7-42
│ │ └ 4. Display Unit to TXRX - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.4 on page 7-42
│ └ 6. String Data Update - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.5 on page 7-43
└ 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup
│ ├ 1. Signal Processing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.1 on page 7-30
│ │ ├ 1. Echo Noise Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.1.1 on page 7-30
│ │ └ 2. Setting Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.1.2 on page 7-31
│ ├ 2. TT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.2 on page 7-31
│ │ ├ 1. Vector Constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.2.1 on page 7-31
│ │ ├ 2. Video TD Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.2.2 on page 7-32
│ │ ├ 3. Video High Level
│ │ ├ 4. Video Low Level
│ │ ├ 5. Gate Size
│ │ └ 6. Limit Ring
│ └ 3. MBS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.3 on page 7-33
│ │ ├ 1. MBS Level- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.3.1 on page 7-33
│ │ └ 2. MBS Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3.3.2 on page 7-34

1.Only for ISW Extended Mode

C －16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPRD0730 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
APR. 2011 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine